Onkyo Stereo Receiver TXNR727 User Manual

Contents  
Safety Information and Introduction ............2  
AV RECEIVER  
Table of Contents...........................................6  
Connections .................................................12  
Turning On & Basic Operations..................21  
Playback........................................................29  
Advanced Operations ..................................52  
Controlling Other Components...................76  
Appendix.......................................................82  
TX-NR727  
Instruction Manual  
Internet Radio Guide  
Remote Control Codes  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Information and Introduction  
interference in a residential installation. This  
extended period, remove the power cord from the  
AC outlet.  
5. Preventing Hearing Loss  
Precautions  
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there  
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does cause  
harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the  
interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
–Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
–Increase the separation between the equipment  
and receiver.  
–Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit  
different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal  
use only, recording copyrighted material is illegal  
without the permission of the copyright holder.  
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-  
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact  
your Onkyo dealer.  
Caution  
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and  
headphones can cause hearing loss.  
6. Batteries and Heat Exposure  
Warning  
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall  
not be exposed to excessive heat as sunshine,  
fire or the like.  
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all  
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a  
soft cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild  
detergent and water. Dry the unit immediately  
afterwards with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive  
cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical  
solvents, because they may damage the finish or  
remove the panel lettering.  
7. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never  
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands  
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets  
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo  
dealer.  
8. Handling Notes  
4. Power  
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original  
packaging to pack it how it was when you  
originally bought it.  
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit  
for a long time, because they may leave marks  
on the case.  
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm  
after prolonged use. This is normal.  
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may  
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so  
be sure to use it occasionally.  
WARNING  
–Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV  
technician for help.  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE  
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION  
CAREFULLY.  
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.  
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the  
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear  
panel (e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).  
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-  
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) this device may not  
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie  
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de  
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux  
conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne doit pas  
produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil  
doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,  
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en  
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this  
unit from the AC power source. Make sure that  
the plug is readily operable (easily accessible) at  
all times.  
For U.S. and Canadian models  
FCC CAUTION  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
the party responsible for compliance could void the  
user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
For models with [POWER] button, or with both  
[POWER] and [ON/STANDBY] buttons:  
Pressing the [POWER] button to select OFF  
mode does not fully disconnect from the mains. If  
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended  
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.  
compromettre le fonctionnement.  
Note:  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in  
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to  
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed  
to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
For models with [ON/STANDBY] button only:  
Pressing the [ON/STANDBY] button to select  
Standby mode does not fully disconnect from the  
mains. If you do not intend to use the unit for an  
En-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
RF Exposure Compliance  
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation  
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled  
Modèle pour les Canadien  
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE  
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME  
NMB-003 DU CANADA.  
IMPORTANT  
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse  
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must  
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the  
same ampere rating as that indicated on the plug.  
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the  
body of the fuse.  
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket  
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable  
fuse in the plug.  
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency  
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65  
and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)  
Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of  
RF energy that it deemed to comply without  
maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).  
But it is desirable that it should be installed and  
operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more  
away from person’s body (excluding extremities:  
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).  
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:  
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS  
ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS  
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE  
CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER  
JUSQU’AU FOND.  
For British models  
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the  
power supply cord of this unit should be performed  
only by qualified service personnel.  
For European Models  
Declaration of Conformity  
We declare, under our sole  
responsibility, that this product  
complies with the standards:  
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition  
aux rayonnements énoncées pour un environnement  
non contrôlé et respecte les régles les  
radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices  
d’exposition dans le Supplément C à OET65 et  
d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF)  
CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie  
RF trés faible qui est considérée conforme sans  
évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.  
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé  
en gardant une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le  
dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des  
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).  
IMPORTANT  
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in  
accordance with the following code:  
Blue: Neutral  
–Safety  
–Limits and methods of  
measurement of radio disturbance characteristics  
–Limits for harmonic current emissions  
–Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations  
and flicker  
–RoHS Directive, 2011/65/EU  
–Hereby, Onkyo Corporation, declares that this  
TX-NR727 is in compliance with the essential  
requirements and other relevant provisions of  
Directive 1999/5/EC.  
Brown: Live  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured  
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,  
proceed as follows:  
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to  
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or  
coloured black.  
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected  
to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or  
coloured red.  
For Canadian Models  
С настоящето, Onkyo Corporation, декларира, че  
TX-NR727 е в съответствие със съществените  
изисквания и другитеприложими разпоредби на  
Директива 1999/5/EC.  
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS  
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.  
For models having a power cord with a polarized  
plug:  
–Onkyo Corporation tímto prohlašuje, že TX-NR727  
splňuje základní požadavky a všechna příslušná  
ustanoveni Směrnice 1999/5/ES.  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
–Undertegnede Onkyo Corporation erklærer herved,  
at følgende udstyr TX-NR727 overholder de  
væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante krav i direktiv  
1999/5/EF.  
En-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Information and Introduction  
–Hiermit erklärt Onkyo Corporation, dass sich das  
Gerät TX-NR727 in Übereinstimmung mit den  
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen  
einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie  
1999/5/EG befindet.  
essentiële eisen en de andere relevante bepalin-  
gen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.  
23764/SDPPI/2012  
2371  
Complies with  
IDA Standards  
DA106032  
–Niniejszym Onkyo Corporation deklaruje że  
TX-NR727 jest zgodny z zasadniczymi  
wymaganiami i innymi właściwymi  
TA-20120424004  
TRA  
–Käesolevaga kinnitab Onkyo Corporation seadme  
TX-NR727 vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ  
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele  
teistele asjakohastele sätetele.  
postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.  
REGISTERED No  
ER0086260/12  
–Eu, Onkyo Corporation, declaro que o TX-NR727  
cumpre os requisitos essenciais e outras provisões  
relevantes da Directiva 1999/5/EC.  
527090  
No  
ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Ο ΚΑΤΑΣΚΕΥΑΣΤΗΣ Onkyo  
Corporation ∆ΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ TX-NR727  
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩ∆ΕΙΣ  
ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ  
∆ΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ ΤΗΣ Ο∆ΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ  
–Prin prezenta, Onkyo Corporation, declară că  
aparatul TX-NR727 este în conformitate cu  
cerinţele esenţiale şi cu alte prevederi pertinente  
ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.  
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV  
Receiver. Please read this manual thoroughly  
before making connections and plugging in the  
Following the instructions in this manual will  
enable you to obtain optimum performance and  
listening enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.  
Please retain this manual for future reference.  
–Onkyo Corporation týmto vyhlasuje, že TX-NR727  
a spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné  
ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.  
–Por la presente, Onkyo Corporation, declara que  
este TX-NR727 cumple con los requisitos  
esenciales y otras exigencias relevantes de la  
Directiva 1999/5/EC.  
–Onkyo Corporation izjavlja, da je ta TX-NR727 v  
skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in drugimi  
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.  
–Par la présente, Onkyo Corporation déclare que  
l’appareil TX-NR727 est conforme aux exigences  
essentielles et aux autres dispositions pertinentes  
de la directive 1999/5/CE.  
–Onkyo Corporation vakuuttaa täten että TX-NR727  
tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten  
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden  
ehtojen mukainen.  
Supplied Accessories  
–Con la presente Onkyo Corporation dichiara che  
questo TX-NR727 è conforme ai requisiti essenziali  
ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla  
direttiva 1999/5/CE.  
Make sure you have the following accessories:  
–Härmed förklarar Onkyo Corporation att denna  
TX-NR727 följer de väsentliga kraven och andra  
relevanta stadgar i Direktiv 1999/5/EC.  
Indoor FM antenna (page 19)  
AM loop antenna (page 19)  
Power cord (European and Taiwanese models)  
(page 21)  
–Ar šo Onkyo Corporation deklarē, ka TX-NR727  
atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām  
un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.  
–Hér með lýsir Onkyo Corporation því yfir að varan  
TX-NR727 er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar  
kröfur sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.  
Speaker cable labels (page 12)  
Speaker setup microphone (page 25)  
Remote controller (RC-868M) and two batteries (AA/R6)  
Quick Start Guide  
–Šiuo Onkyo Corporation deklaruoja, kad šis  
TX-NR727 atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas  
1999/5/EB Direktyvos nuostatas.  
–Onkyo Corporation erklærer herved at denne  
TX-NR727 er i overensstemmelse med vesentlige  
krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i direktiv  
1999/5/EC.  
*
–A Onkyo Corporation ezzennel kijelenti, hogy a  
TX-NR727 típusú beren-dezés teljesíti az alapvető  
követelményeket és más 1999/5/EK irányelvben  
meghatározott vonatkozó rendelkezéseket.  
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the  
product name indicates the color. Specifications and  
operations are the same regardless of color.  
–Hierbij verklaart Onkyo Corporation dat het toestel  
l TX-NR727 in overeenstemming is met de  
En-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Initial Setup .................................................................22  
Selecting the Language  
Table of Contents  
Advanced Operations  
for the On-screen Setup Menus.............................22  
Audyssey MultEQ: Auto Setup .................................22  
Source Connection ...................................................23  
Remote Mode Setup.................................................23  
Network Connection .................................................23  
Terminating the Initial Setup.....................................23  
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup.........................24  
Performing Wireless LAN Setup...............................27  
On-screen Setup......................................................... 52  
Using the Quick Setup.............................................. 52  
Using the Audio Settings of Quick Setup.................. 53  
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)................................ 56  
Setup Menu Items .................................................... 56  
1. Input/Output Assign.............................................. 57  
2. Speaker Setup...................................................... 59  
3. Audio Adjust ......................................................... 62  
4. Source Setup........................................................ 64  
5. Listening Mode Preset.......................................... 68  
6. Miscellaneous....................................................... 69  
7. Hardware Setup.................................................... 69  
8. Remote Controller Setup...................................... 73  
9. Lock Setup............................................................ 73  
Multi Zone ................................................................... 74  
Making Multi Zone Connections ............................... 74  
Controlling Multi Zone Components ......................... 75  
Safety Information and Introduction  
Important Safety Instructions......................................2  
Precautions ...................................................................3  
Supplied Accessories...................................................5  
Table of Contents..........................................................6  
Features.........................................................................7  
Front & Rear Panels......................................................8  
Front Panel..................................................................8  
Rear Panel ................................................................10  
Remote Controller.......................................................11  
Controlling the AV Receiver......................................11  
Playback  
Playback......................................................................29  
Controlling Contents of USB or Network Devices.....30  
Understanding Icons on the Display.........................31  
Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device ....31  
Playing a USB Device...............................................32  
Listening to TuneIn ...................................................32  
Registering Other Internet Radio..............................34  
Changing the Icon Layout  
on the Network Service Screen..............................34  
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA) ..................34  
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder ...................36  
Remote Playback......................................................37  
Listening to AM/FM Radio ........................................38  
Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources.....40  
Using the Listening Modes .......................................41  
Displaying Source Information..................................49  
Using the Sleep Timer ..............................................49  
Setting the Display Brightness..................................49  
Changing the Input Display.......................................50  
Muting the AV Receiver............................................50  
Using the Whole House Mode..................................50  
Using the Home Menu..............................................51  
Connections  
Connecting the AV Receiver......................................12  
Connecting Your Speakers .......................................12  
Connecting the TV/AV components..........................15  
About RIHD-compatible components........................16  
Operations that can be performed  
with RIHD connection.............................................17  
Confirm the settings ..................................................17  
Connection Tips ........................................................17  
Connecting the Antennas..........................................19  
Connecting Onkyo RI Components...........................20  
Using Headphones....................................................20  
Controlling Other Components  
Controlling Other Components................................. 76  
Preprogrammed Remote Control Codes.................. 76  
Looking up for Remote Control Codes ..................... 76  
Entering Remote Control Codes............................... 76  
Remapping Colored Buttons .................................... 77  
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo Components  
Connected via RI ................................................... 77  
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons................... 77  
Resetting the Remote Controller .............................. 77  
Controlling Other Components................................. 78  
Using the Onkyo Dock.............................................. 80  
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone ................................... 81  
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Turning On/Off the AV Receiver................................21  
Connecting the Power Cord......................................21  
Turning On ................................................................21  
Turning Off ................................................................21  
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator....................22  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting......................................................... 82  
Firmware Update ........................................................ 90  
About HDMI................................................................. 93  
Network/USB Features............................................... 94  
License and Trademark Information ........................ 96  
Specifications............................................................. 97  
To reset the AV receiver, see page 82.  
En-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Information and Introduction  
Connections  
Features  
• 8 HDMI Inputs (1 on front panel) and 2 Outputs  
Amplifier  
*
• 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough )-compatible HDMI  
Inputs  
• 110 Watts/Channel @ 8 ohms (FTC)  
• 170 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (IEC)  
• 185 Watts/Channel @ 6 ohms (JEITA)  
• WRAT–Wide Range Amplifier Technology  
(5 Hz to 100 kHz bandwidth)  
• Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry  
• H.C.P.S. (High Current Power Supply) Massive  
High Power Transformer  
* Compatible with HDMI IN 1 to HDMI IN 4 only  
• Onkyo pfor System Control  
• 3 Digital Inputs (1 Optical/2 Coaxial)  
• Component Video Switching (1 Input/1 Output)  
• Banana Plug-Compatible Speaker Posts  
*
In Europe, using banana plugs to connect speakers to an  
audio amplifier is prohibited.  
• Powered Zone 2  
• Bi-Amping Capability for FL/FR with SBL/SBR  
• Internet Radio Connectivity  
• Network Capability for Streaming Audio Files  
• Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Connectivity  
• Wireless Music Playback via Bluetooth  
• Front-Panel USB Input for Memory Devices  
• MHL-Enabled AUX Front Input  
• 3 Stage Inverted Darlington Amplifier Design  
Processing  
• THX Select2 Plus Certified  
• Incorporates Qdeo™ technology for HDMI Video  
Upscaling (to 4K Compatible)  
• HDMI (Audio Return Channel, 3D, DeepColor,  
x.v.Color, Lip Sync, 4K (up-scaling and  
Passthrough), DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High  
Resolution Audio, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,  
DSD and Multi-CH PCM)  
Miscellaneous  
• 40 FM/AM Presets  
®
• Audyssey MultEQ to correct room acoustic  
• Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio  
problems  
®
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz and Audyssey DSX  
®
• Audyssey Dynamic EQ for loudness correction  
• Non-Scaling Configuration  
• A-Form Listening Mode Memory  
• Direct Mode  
• Pure Audio Mode (European, Australian and Asian  
models)  
• Music Optimizer for Compressed Digital Music files  
• Phase Matching Bass System  
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A Converters  
• Powerful and Highly Accurate 32-bit Processing  
DSP  
®
• Audyssey Dynamic Volume to maintain optimal  
listening level and dynamic range  
• Crossover Adjustment  
(40/50/60/70/80/90/100/120/150/200 Hz)  
• A/V Sync Control Function (up to 800 ms)  
• Auto Standby Function  
• On-Screen Display via HDMI  
• Preprogrammed u-Compatible Remote  
• Jitter Cleaning Circuit Technology  
En-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Front & Rear Panels  
Front Panel  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
a
bcde f g  
h i j k l m  
n
o
x
o p q r  
s
w
t u v  
y
For detailed information, see the pages in  
parentheses.  
i MEMORY button (38)  
s Input selector buttons (29)  
t DISPLAY button (49)  
u USB port (32)  
j TUNING MODE button (38)  
a 8ON/STANDBY button (21)  
k HOME button (51)  
b MUSIC OPTIMIZER button (North American  
l TUNING q/w(38), PRESET e/r(38), cursor  
v SETUP MIC jack (25)  
w HYBRID STANDBY indicator (22)  
and Taiwanese models) (54)  
and ENTER buttons  
c ZONE 2 and ZONE 3 buttons (50, 75)  
d Wi-Fi indicator (27)  
m RETURN button  
x RT/PTY/TP button (European, Australian and  
n MASTER VOLUME control and indicator (29,  
Asian models) (39)  
e Remote control sensor (11)  
f Display (9)  
49)  
y PURE AUDIO button and indicator (European,  
o BLUETOOTH button and indicator (31, 73)  
p PHONES jack (20)  
Australian and Asian models) (41)  
g LISTENING MODE buttons (41)  
h DIMMER button (North American and  
q AUX INPUT HDMI/MHL jack (16)  
r TONE and Tone Level buttons (53)  
Taiwanese models) (49)  
En-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Information and Introduction  
Display  
s
abcde  
f
g h  
i
j
k l m n k e  
o
p q r  
For detailed information, see the pages in  
parentheses.  
i Tuning indicators  
p SLEEP indicator (49)  
q Channel/Unit indicators  
ch indicator  
RDS indicator (excluding North American and  
Taiwanese models) (39)  
a Z2 (Zone 2) indicator (75)  
AUTO indicator (38)  
TUNED indicator (38)  
b Z3 (Zone 3) indicator (75)  
Hz indicator  
c 3D indicator  
m/ft indicator  
FM STEREO indicator (38)  
j MUTING indicator (50)  
k Input indicators (18)  
HDMI indicator (70)  
This lights when a 3D input signal is detected.  
dB indicator  
d Headphone indicator (20)  
r ASb (Auto Standby) indicator (71)  
e 1, 3and cursor indicators (32)  
f Listening mode and format indicators (41, 68)  
g Audyssey indicator (24, 64)  
Audyssey DSX indicator (45)  
DIGITAL indicator  
l ARC (Audio Return Channel) indicator (71)  
Dynamic EQ indicator (64)  
n NET indicator (32 to 36, 73)  
o Message area  
Dynamic Vol indicator (64)  
h M.Opt (Music Optimizer) indicator (54)  
En-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Rear Panel  
(North American, Australian and Asian models)  
(European and Taiwanese models)  
f
a
b c  
d
e
g
n
hi  
j
k
l m  
See “Connecting Your Speakers” for connection  
(pages 12 to 20).  
g Power cord (North American, Australian and  
Asian models)  
a u REMOTE CONTROL jack  
b COMPONENT VIDEO IN and OUT jacks  
c ETHERNET port  
h DIGITAL IN COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks  
i GND screw  
j Composite video and analog audio jacks  
d FM ANTENNA jack and AM ANTENNA terminal  
(BD/DVD IN, CBL/SAT IN, STB/DVR IN, GAME  
IN, PC IN, TV/CD IN, PHONO IN)  
e HDMI IN and HDMI output (HDMI OUT MAIN and  
HDMI OUT SUB) jacks  
k MONITOR OUT V jack  
f SPEAKERS terminals  
l SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks  
m ZONE 2/ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks  
n AC INLET (European and Taiwanese models)  
(CENTER, FRONT, SURROUND, SURROUND  
BACK or FRONT HIGH, ZONE 2)  
En-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Safety Information and Introduction  
Aiming the remote controller  
To use the remote controller, point it at the AV  
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.  
For detailed information, see the pages in  
parentheses.  
Remote Controller  
a 8RECEIVER button (21)  
Controlling the AV Receiver  
b REMOTE MODE/INPUT SELECTOR buttons  
Remote control sensor  
AV receiver  
(29)  
To control the AV receiver, press RECEIVER to  
select Receiver mode.  
c q/w/e/rand ENTER buttons  
d Q SETUP button (52)  
e Listening Mode buttons (41)  
f DIMMER button (49)  
g DISPLAY button (49)  
h MUTING button (50)  
i VOL q/wbutton (29)  
j RETURN button  
a*1  
gc  
b*1  
Approx. 16 ft. (5 m)  
RECEIVER  
h*1  
Installing the batteries  
i*1  
k HOME button (51)  
l SLEEP button (49)  
d
Tip  
ac  
• You can also use the remote controller to control Onkyo  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, CD player, and other  
components.  
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for more details  
(page 76).  
j
k
d
Batteries (AA/R6)  
Note  
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try replacing  
the batteries.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of  
batteries.  
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long time,  
remove the batteries to prevent damage from leakage or  
corrosion.  
• Remove expired batteries as soon as possible to prevent  
damage from leakage or corrosion.  
Controlling the tuner  
To control the AV receiver’s tuner, press TUNER (or  
RECEIVER).  
You can select AM or FM by pressing TUNER  
repeatedly.  
e
e
a q/wbuttons (38)  
b D.TUN button (38)  
c DISPLAY button  
d CH +/– button (39)  
e Number buttons (38)  
bf  
l
*1  
These buttons can also be used when a REMOTE  
MODE other than Receiver mode is selected.  
En-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Connections  
To find the best position for your subwoofer, while  
Speaker Configuration  
playing a movie or some music with good bass,  
experiment by placing your subwoofer at various  
positions within the room, and choose the one that  
provides the most satisfying results.  
You can connect the powered subwoofer with two  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jacks respectively.  
The same signal is output from each jack.  
The following table indicates the channels you should  
use depending on the number of speakers that you  
have.  
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered  
subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and  
solid bass.  
To get the best from your surround sound system,  
you need to set the speaker settings automatically  
(page 24) or manually (page 59).  
Connections  
Tip  
• If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an  
external amplifier, connect the subwoofer pre out jack to an  
input on the amplifier.  
Number of speakers  
Front speakers  
2 3 4 5 6 7 7  
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔  
Connecting the AV  
Receiver  
Center speaker  
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔  
Attaching the Speaker Cable Labels  
Surround speakers  
Surround back speaker*1  
Surround back speakers*1  
Front high speakers*1  
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔  
The speaker terminals are color-coded for  
identification purpose.  
Connecting Your Speakers  
Speaker  
Color  
White  
Red  
Front left, Front high left, Zone 2 left  
Speaker Configuration  
Front right, Front high right, Zone 2  
right  
a b  
cI J  
f
5.1-channel:  
7.1-channel:  
7.1-channel:  
a bcdef  
a bcdef  
a bcdef  
Center  
Green  
Blue  
+
+
G H  
I J  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
Gray  
Brown  
Tan  
*1  
Front high and surround back speakers cannot be used  
at the same time.  
Using Powered Subwoofers  
The supplied speaker cable labels are also color-  
coded and you should attach them to the positive (+)  
side of each speaker cable in accordance with the  
table above. Then all you need to do is to match the  
color of each label to the corresponding speaker  
terminal.  
d e G H  
Front speakers  
Center speaker  
a b  
c
Corner  
position  
Surround speakers  
Subwoofer(s)  
Surround back speakers  
Front high speakers  
de  
f
1/3 of wall  
position  
G H  
I J  
En-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Connections  
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of  
Connecting the Speaker Cables/Powered Subwoofers  
your speakers and AV components. A setup wizard  
is launched upon first-time use to let you perform  
the settings.  
Please connect a, b, c, d, eand ffor 5.1-channel surround.  
If you’re using only one surround back  
b
a
Front  
speaker L  
Front  
speaker, connect it to the SURROUND  
speaker R  
BACK or FRONT HIGH L terminals.  
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.  
• By default, speakers for 7.1-channel surround are  
configured to use: front right/front left/center/  
surround right/surround left/surround back right/  
surround back left/subwoofer.  
c
Center speaker  
Screw-type speaker terminals  
Strip 1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm) of insulation from the  
ends of the speaker cables, and twist the bare wires  
tightly, as shown.  
Red  
Green  
White  
1/2" to 5/8" (12 to 15 mm)  
Banana Plugs (North American models)  
• If you are using banana plugs, tighten the speaker  
terminal before inserting the banana plug.  
• Do not insert the speaker code directly into the  
center hole of the speaker terminal.  
Gray  
Tan  
Brown  
Blue  
Powered  
subwoofer  
f
Powered  
subwoofer  
f
Surround  
speaker R  
e
Surround back or  
Front high speaker R  
H J  
Surround back or  
Front high speaker L  
G I  
Surround  
speaker L  
d
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other words, connect positive (+) terminals only to positive (+)  
terminals, and negative (–) terminals only to negative (–) terminals. If you get them the wrong way around, the  
sound will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.  
En-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connections  
Speaker Connection Precautions  
Bi-amping the Front Speakers  
Important:  
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure to  
remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’ tweeter  
(high) and woofer (low) terminals.  
Using Dipole Speakers  
• You can connect speakers with an impedance of  
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of  
the connected speakers is 4 ohms or more, but less  
than 6 ohms, be sure to set the minimum speaker  
impedance to “4ohms” (page 59). If you use  
speakers with a lower impedance, and use the  
amplifier at high volume levels for a long period of  
time, the built-in protection circuit may be activated.  
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may  
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.  
• Be careful not to short the positive and negative  
wires. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.  
• Make sure the metal core of the wire does not have  
contact with the AV receiver’s rear panel. Doing so  
may damage the AV receiver.  
TV/screen  
• Bi-amping can be used only with speakers that support  
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.  
Bi-amping provides improved bass and treble  
performance.  
a
a
When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to  
drive up to a 5.1 speaker system in the main room.  
Perform bi-amping connections by using FRONT  
terminals and SURROUND BACK or FRONT HIGH  
terminals as shown below.  
Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections  
and turned on the AV receiver, you must set the  
speaker setting to enable bi-amping (page 59).  
b
b
You can use dipole speakers for the surround and  
surround back speakers. Dipole speakers output the  
same sound in two directions.  
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on  
them to indicate how they should be positioned. The  
surround dipole speakers (a) should be positioned so  
that their arrows point toward the TV/screen, while  
the surround back dipole speakers (b) should be  
positioned so that their arrows point toward each  
other, as shown.  
• Don’t connect more than one cable to each speaker  
terminal. Doing so may damage the AV receiver.  
• Don’t connect one speaker to several terminals.  
Tweeter (high)  
Woofer (low)  
Front right  
Front left  
En-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connections  
Use this jack to connect to the set top box/digital  
video recorder, etc.  
D
E
G
Connecting the TV/AV components  
Use this jack to connect to the game consoles,  
etc.  
Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your speakers and AV components. To display the setup  
menu on the TV screen, connecting the TV to HDMI OUT MAIN is required.  
Use this port to connect to a LAN port on a router  
so the AV receiver can be connected to your  
home network.  
F
J
G
H
I
E
D
C
B
A
Use jack and terminal here to connect the  
supplied FM antenna and AM loop antenna.  
H
I
Use this jack to make connections using an  
analog audio cable.  
With this connection, you can also enjoy analog  
audio from external components while you are in  
Zone 2/3.  
Use this jack to make connections using a  
component video cable.  
J
K
Use this jack to connect to the camcorder/MHL-  
enabled mobile device, etc.  
Tip  
If you select the input selector button, the signal from  
the component connected to the assigned jack is  
played.  
Connections  
• To listen to the audio of a component connected via HDMI  
through your TV’s speakers, enable “HDMI Through”  
(page 70) and set the AV receiver to standby mode.  
• In the case of Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, if no sound is  
output despite following the above-mentioned procedure,  
set your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s HDMI audio settings to  
PCM.  
• Connect a turntable (MM) that has a built-in phono preamp  
to TV/CD IN, or connect it to PHONO IN with the phono  
preamp turned off. If your turntable (MM) doesn’t have a  
phono preamp, connect it to PHONO IN. If your turntable  
has a moving coil (MC) type cartridge, you’ll need a  
commercially available MC head amp or MC transformer to  
connect to PHONO IN. See your turntable’s manual for  
details.  
Use this jack to connect to the HDMI input of the  
TV. If your TV doesn’t support Audio Return  
A
*1  
Channel (ARC) , you need to connect an optical  
digital cable together with the HDMI cable to jack  
F.  
Another TV can be connected to the HDMI OUT  
SUB jack.  
Input selector  
buttons  
B C D E  
K
*1  
ARC is the function that carries the audio signal  
• Before making any AV connections, read the  
manuals supplied with your AV components.  
• Push plugs in all the way to make good connections  
(loose connections can cause noise or  
malfunctions).  
from the TV to jack A. With ARC, a single HDMI  
cable can connect the TV and the AV receiver.  
Use this jack to connect to your Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player, etc.  
B
C
If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the AV  
receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, connecting  
the ground wire may produce an audible hum. If this  
happens, disconnect it.  
Use this jack to connect to the Satellite/cable set-  
top box, etc.  
• To prevent interference, keep audio and video  
cables away from power cords and speaker cables.  
En-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link)  
p
Internet radio  
Modem  
With its support for MHL (Mobile High-Definition Link),  
the AUX (Front) input allows you to deliver high-  
definition video from a connected mobile device.  
The AV receiver allows interoperability of the CEC  
(Consumer Electronics Control) specified in the HDMI  
standard, which is known as RIHD. Various linked  
operations can be performed by connecting the AV  
receiver to an RIHD-compatible TV, player, or  
recorder.  
Router  
WAN  
LAN  
K
Default setting is set to off, so it is required to change  
the setting to on.  
MHL-enabled  
mobile device, etc.  
Perform this setting after the initial setup.  
Computer or media server  
Do not connect the AV receiver’s USB port to a USB  
port on your computer. Music on your computer  
cannot be played through the AV receiver in this way.  
Connecting to the Network (Optional)  
About RIHD-compatible components  
The following diagram shows how you can connect  
the AV receiver to your home network. In this  
example, it’s connected to a LAN port on a router,  
which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.  
Network connection by wireless LAN is possible. See  
“Performing Wireless LAN Setup” for connections  
(page 27).  
The following components are p-compatible  
(As of January 2013).  
TV  
• Sharp TV  
Players/Recorders  
• Onkyo and Integra p-compatible players  
• Toshiba players and recorders  
• Sharp players and recorders (only when used  
together with Sharp TV)  
The default of the assignment for the input selector buttons and jacks are as shown below. These settings can  
be changed. (The assignment for the composite video jacks, analog audio jacks, and HDMI Front jack cannot be  
changed.)  
*
Models other than those mentioned above may have some  
interoperability if compatible with CEC, which is part of the  
HDMI Standard, but operation cannot be guaranteed.  
Input selector buttons HDMI jacks  
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN COAXIAL Composite video and  
Note  
jacks  
and OPTICAL jacks  
analog audio jacks  
• For proper linked operations, do not connect more  
p-compatible components than the quantities  
specified below, to the HDMI input terminal.  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD players: up to three.  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD recorders/Digital Video Recorders: up  
to three.  
Cable/Satellite Set-top boxes: up to four.  
• Do not connect the AV receiver to another AV receiver/AV  
amplifier via HDMI.  
• Proper linked operations are not guaranteed when more  
p-compatible components than the above-  
mentioned quantities are connected.  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
STB/DVR  
GAME  
HDMI IN 1  
HDMI IN 2  
HDMI IN 3  
HDMI IN 4  
DIGITAL IN  
COAXIAL 1  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN  
BD/DVD  
COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL IN  
IN COAXIAL 2  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN  
CBL/SAT  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN  
STB/DVR  
VIDEO/AUDIO IN  
GAME  
PC  
HDMI IN 5  
AUDIO IN PC  
AUX  
HDMI Front  
TV/CD  
PHONO  
DIGITAL IN OPTICAL AUDIO IN TV/CD  
AUDIO IN PHONO  
En-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Connections  
• On the TV, when you select anything other than the HDMI  
jack to which the AV receiver is connected, the input on the  
AV receiver will be switched to “TV/CD”.  
• The AV receiver will automatically power on in conjunction  
when it determines it to be necessary. Even if the AV  
receiver is connected to an pcompatible TV or  
player/recorder, it will not power on if it is not necessary. It  
may not power on in conjunction when the TV is set to  
Operations that can be performed with  
RIHD connection  
Confirm the settings  
1. Turn on the power for all connected components.  
2. Turn off the power of the TV, and confirm that the  
power of the connected components is turned off  
automatically with the link operation.  
3. Turn on the power of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player/recorder.  
For p-compatible TV  
The following linked operations are enabled by  
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible  
TV.  
• The AV receiver will enter standby mode when the  
TV is set to standby.  
• Linked functions with the AV receiver may not work  
depending on the component model connected. In such  
cases, operate the AV receiver directly.  
4. Start playback on the Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player/recorder, and verify the following:  
• The AV receiver automatically turns on, and  
selects the input to which the Blu-ray Disc/DVD  
player/recorder is connected.  
• The TV automatically turns on, and selects the  
input to which the AV receiver is connected.  
5. Following the operating instructions of the TV,  
select “Use the TV speakers” from the menu  
screen of the TV, and confirm that the audio is  
output from the speakers of the TV, and not from  
the speakers connected to the AV receiver.  
6. Select “Use the speakers connected from the AV  
receiver” from the menu screen of the TV, and  
confirm that the audio is output from the speakers  
connected to the AV receiver, and not from the TV  
speakers.  
• You can set on the menu screen of the TV to either  
output the audio from the speakers connected to the  
AV receiver, or from the speakers of the TV.  
• It is possible to output the audio coming from the  
tuner or auxiliary input of your TV to the speakers of  
the AV receiver. (A connection such as an optical  
digital cable or similar is required in addition to the  
HDMI cable.)  
• Input to the AV receiver can be selected with the  
remote controller of the TV.  
• Operations such as volume adjustment or similar for  
the AV receiver can be performed from the remote  
controller of the TV.  
Connection Tips  
The video and audio signal flow  
Connect the AV receiver between the AV  
components and the TV. The signal from the AV  
components is carried through the AV receiver. You  
can enjoy the audio of the TV through the AV  
receiver.  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
For p-compatible players/recorders  
The following linked operations are enabled by  
connecting the AV receiver to an p-compatible  
player/recorder.  
Video, audio  
AV receiver  
Note  
• Audio from DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD may not output  
from the TV speakers. You will be able to output the audio  
from the TV speakers by setting the audio output of the  
DVD player to 2ch PCM. (It may not be possible depending  
on the player models.)  
• Even if you set to output audio on the TV speakers, audio  
will be output from the speakers connected to the AV  
receiver when you adjust the volume or switch the input on  
the AV receiver. To output audio from the TV speakers, re-  
do the corresponding operations on the TV.  
• In case of an pconnection with uand uaudio  
control compatible components, do not connect the u  
cable at the same time.  
Audio  
Video, audio  
• When playback is started on the player/recorder, AV  
receiver will switch to the HDMI input of the  
player/recorder that is playing back.  
TV, projector, etc.  
• Operation of the player/recorder is possible using  
the remote controller supplied with the AV receiver.  
Video components can be connected by using any  
one of the following video connection formats:  
composite video, component video, or HDMI, the  
latter offering the best picture quality.  
Video input signals flow through the AV receiver as  
shown, with composite video and component video  
sources all being upconverted for the HDMI output(s).  
*
Depending on the model used, not all operations may be  
available.  
Note  
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector at this  
time, otherwise appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics  
Control) operation will not be guaranteed.  
En-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Connections  
*2  
This is possible when “Audio Return Channel” is set to  
Auto” (page 71), the TV/CD input selector is  
selected, and your TV is ARC capable.  
Signal Selection Example  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
Tip  
Composite  
Component  
HDMI  
Composite  
Component  
HDMI  
• When a signal is input via HDMI and the corresponding  
input selector is selected, the HDMI indicator lights. In the  
case of an optical or coaxial connection, the DIGITAL  
indicator lights. In the case of an analog connection, neither  
of the HDMI and DIGITAL indicators light.  
IN  
IN  
AV receiver  
AV receiver  
Component  
MONITOR OUT  
Component  
Composite  
HDMI  
Composite  
HDMI  
AV Cables and Jacks  
TV, projector, etc.  
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends  
that video signals pass through the system without  
upconversion (e.g., component video input passing  
through to component video output).  
• To by-pass the upconversion, set the “Picture  
Mode” setting to “Bypass” (page 66).  
HDMI  
The composite video and component video outputs  
pass through their respective input signals as they are.  
HDMI connections can carry digital video and audio.  
Note  
• In order for the AV receiver to upconvert component input  
to HDMI output, the source output must be set to 480i/576i.  
When signal is input at resolution of 480p/576p and more,  
error message will be displayed.  
Component video  
Audio components can be connected by using any of  
the following audio connection formats: analog,  
optical, coaxial, or HDMI.  
When choosing a connection format, bear in mind  
that the AV receiver does not convert digital input  
signals for analog line outputs and vice versa.  
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and  
color difference signals (PB, PR), providing the best  
picture quality (some TV manufacturers label their  
component video sockets slightly differently).  
Signal Selection  
If signals are present at more than one input, the  
inputs will be selected automatically in the following  
order of priority: HDMI, component video, composite  
video.  
However, for component video only, regardless of  
whether a component video signal is actually present,  
if a component video input is assigned to the input  
selector, that component video input will be selected.  
And if no component video input is assigned to the  
input selector, this will be interpreted as no  
component video signal being present.  
In the Signal Selection Example shown below, video  
signals are present at both the HDMI and composite  
video inputs. However, the HDMI signal is  
automatically selected as the source and the video is  
output by the HDMI outputs.  
Green  
Blue  
Y
C
B/PB  
If signals are present at more than one input, the  
inputs will be selected automatically in the following  
order of priority: HDMI, digital, analog.  
C
R/PR  
Red  
Audio Signal Flow Chart  
Composite video  
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, DVDs,  
and other video equipment.  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player, etc.  
Analog  
Optical  
Coaxial  
*1  
HDMI  
IN  
Yellow  
*1  
*1  
AV receiver  
Optical digital audio  
Optical digital connections allow you to enjoy digital  
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The  
audio quality is the same as coaxial.  
OUT  
HDMI  
*1  
*2  
*1  
TV, projector, etc.  
*1  
Depends on the “Audio TV Out (Main)” or “Audio TV  
Out (Sub)” setting (pages 70, 71).  
En-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Connections  
Coaxial digital audio  
Connecting the Antennas  
Coaxial digital connections allow you to enjoy digital  
*1  
sound such as PCM , Dolby Digital or DTS. The  
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor FM antenna and AM loop antenna.  
audio quality is the same as optical.  
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without any antenna connected, so you must connect the  
antenna to use the tuner.  
Orange  
Analog audio (RCA)  
Analog audio connections (RCA) carry analog audio.  
(North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
(European,Australian  
and Asian models)  
White  
Red  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Push.  
Insert wire.  
Release.  
*1  
For PCM signals, the supported sampling rates are  
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz. With HDMI connections, 176.4  
and 192 kHz are also supported.  
Assembling the AM loop antenna  
Caution  
Note  
• Be careful not to injure  
yourself when using  
thumbtacks.  
• The AV receiver does not support SCART plugs.  
• The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type  
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and close  
when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.  
Thumbtacks, etc.  
Caution  
• To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical plug  
straight when inserting and removing.  
AM loop antenna (supplied)  
Indoor FM antenna (supplied)  
Note  
• Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll need to tune into a radio station and position the antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
• Keep the AM loop antenna as far away as possible from your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power cords.  
Tip  
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available outdoor FM antenna  
instead.  
• If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commercially available  
outdoor AM antenna.  
En-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Connecting Onkyo RI Components  
Using Headphones  
Make sure that each Onkyo component is  
Connect a pair of stereo headphones with a  
standard plug (1/4 inch or ø 6.3 mm) to the  
PHONES jack.  
1
1
connected with an analog audio cable  
(connection I in the hookup examples)  
(page 15).  
While the headphones plug is inserted in the  
PHONES jack, =indicator lights.  
Make the uconnection (see the illustration).  
2
3
Note  
If you’re using an RI Dock, or cassette tape  
deck, change the Input Display (page 50).  
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your  
headphones.  
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES  
jack, the speakers are turned off. (The Zone 2/3  
speakers are not turned off.)  
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian  
and Asian models).  
With u(Remote Interactive), you can use the  
R
L
following special functions:  
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
e.g., cassette tape deck  
System On/Auto Power On  
When you start playback on a component connected  
via u, while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV  
receiver will automatically turn on and select that  
component as the input source.  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
RI Dock  
Direct Change  
When playback is started on a component connected  
via u, the AV receiver automatically selects that  
component as the input source.  
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to  
control your other u-capable Onkyo components,  
pointing the remote controller at the AV receiver’s  
remote control sensor instead of the component. You  
must enter the appropriate remote control code first  
(page 77).  
Note  
• Use only ucables for uconnections. ucables are  
supplied with Onkyo components.  
Remote Control  
• Some components have two ujacks. You can connect  
either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is for  
connecting additional u-capable components.  
• Connect only Onkyo components to ujacks. Connecting  
other manufacturer’s components may cause a  
malfunction.  
• Some components may not support all ufunctions. Refer  
to the manuals supplied with your Onkyo components.  
• While Zone 2/3 is on, the System On/Auto Power On and  
Direct Change ufunctions do not work.  
En-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Turning On & Basic Operations  
the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver  
into a different branch circuit.  
Turning Off  
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied with  
the AV receiver. The supplied power cord is designed  
exclusively for use with the AV receiver and should not be  
used with any other equipment.  
• Never disconnect the power cord from the AV receiver  
while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet. Doing  
so may cause an electric shock. Always disconnect the  
power cord from the wall outlet first, and then the AV  
receiver.  
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
1
or  
Turning On & Basic  
Operations  
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on  
the remote controller.  
The AV receiver will enter standby mode. To  
prevent any loud surprises when you turn on the  
AV receiver, always turn down the volume before  
you turn it off.  
Turning On  
Tip  
Turning On/Off the AV  
Receiver  
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
1
• The HYBRID STANDBY indicator may light depending on  
the status of settings (page 22).  
• For details on power management settings, see “Auto  
Standby” (page 71).  
• If the HDMI Through setting is not set in standby mode, an  
MHL-enabled mobile device cannot be charged even if it is  
connected.  
or  
Press RECEIVER followed by 8RECEIVER on  
the remote controller.  
Connecting the Power Cord  
The AV receiver comes on and its display lights.  
(European and Taiwanese models)  
1
Smooth Operation in a Few Easy Steps  
(Initial Setup)  
Connect the supplied power cord to the AV  
receiver’s AC INLET.  
To ensure smooth operation, here’s a few easy steps  
to help you configure the AV receiver before you use  
it for the very first time. These settings only need to  
be made once. See “Initial Setup” for details  
(page 22).  
To AC wall outlet  
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.  
2
Note  
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your  
speakers and AV components.  
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power  
surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment on  
En-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Use q/won the AV receiver or remote  
Firmware Update Notification  
Initial Setup  
1
controller to select one of the following  
options, and then press ENTER.  
`Yes:  
When a new version of the firmware is available, the  
notification window “Firmware Update Available”  
pops up. This notification only appears when the AV  
receiver is connected to the Internet (pages 16,  
27). To perform the firmware update, follow the  
instructions on screen.  
This section explains the settings that we recommend  
you to make before using the AV receiver for the very  
first time. A setup wizard is launched upon first-time  
use to let you perform those settings.  
Continues to “Audyssey MultEQ: Auto  
Setup”.  
`No:  
Tip  
Skips the settings and terminates the initial  
setup. The setup wizard goes to  
“Terminating the Initial Setup” (page 23).  
You can always restart the initial setup by  
selecting “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware  
Setup” menu (page 73).  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
Use q/wand ENTER on the AV receiver or remote  
controller to select one of the options.  
`Update Now:  
Selecting the Language for the On-  
screen Setup Menus  
Starts the firmware update.  
Refer to “Firmware Update” (page 90).  
`Remind me Later:  
This step determines the language used for the on-  
screen setup menus. See “Language” in “OSD  
Setup” (page 69).  
The update notification will pop up again the  
next time you turn the AV receiver on.  
`Never Remind me:  
Audyssey MultEQ: Auto Setup  
Tip  
Disables the automatic update notification.  
This step performs the automatic speaker setup.  
• Pressing HOME will close the setup wizard. To restart the  
initial setup, select “Initial Setup” in the “Hardware Setup”  
menu (page 73).  
Tip  
Use q/wto select one of the following options,  
• The update notification window can be enabled or disabled  
in “Update Notice” (page 73).  
1
and then press ENTER.  
`Do it Now:  
After selecting the language for on-screen setup  
menus, a welcome screen is displayed.  
The automatic speaker setup is performed  
following instructions on screen. Refer to  
step 2 of “Using the Automatic Speaker  
Setup” (page 24). When this setting is  
complete, the setup wizard continues to  
Source Connection”.  
About the HYBRID STANDBY indicator  
Initial Setup  
By way of optimized circuitry, this function reduces  
power consumption when the AV receiver is in  
standby mode. The HYBRID STANDBY indicator will  
light in either of the following conditions:  
–“HDMI Through” is enabled (the HDMI indicator is  
off).  
Welcome to initial setup. Have you connected all the speakers and devices?  
Before starting, please connect speakers and sources.  
Now, would you like to start initial setup?  
1st Step : Audyssey MultEQ: Auto Setup  
2nd Step : Source Connection  
3rd Step : Remote Mode Setup  
4th Step : Network Connection  
`Do it Later:  
Yes  
No  
Skips this setting.  
Press ENTER and continue to “Source  
Connection”.  
HOME Exit  
–“Network Standby” is enabled (the NET indicator  
is off).  
Note  
• If Zones are turned on or, if a mobile device connected to  
the Front Input (MHL) is charging, the HYBRID STANDBY  
indicator won’t light.  
En-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Follow the instructions on screen to perform  
the network checking.  
The checking is complete when the message  
Successfully connected.” appears at the  
middle of the screen. Press ENTER to terminate  
the initial setup.  
Source Connection  
Remote Mode Setup  
2
3
This step checks the connection of source  
components.  
With this step, you can enter remote control codes for  
the components you want to operate.  
Use q/wto select one of the following options,  
Use q/wto select one of the following options,  
1
1
and then press ENTER.  
`Yes, Continue:  
and then press ENTER.  
`Yes:  
Performs the remote control code input.  
Refer to step 5 of “Looking up for Remote  
Control Codes” (page 76).  
`No, Skip:  
Tip  
• If you have selected “Wireless”, you need to perform  
the wireless LAN setup. See “Performing Wireless  
LAN Setup” (page 27). This completes the initial  
setup.  
Performs the checkings.  
`No, Skip:  
Skips this step and continues to “Remote  
Mode Setup”.  
If an error message appears, select one of the  
following options and press ENTER.  
`Retry:  
Performs the checking again.  
`No, Do it Later:  
Skips this step and continues to “Network  
Connection”.  
Select the input selector for which you want to  
2
check the connection and press ENTER.  
The picture and sound of the corresponding  
source should appear on screen with a  
verification prompt.  
When you’re finished, select one of the  
following options and press ENTER.  
2
`Yes, Done:  
Skips this step and terminates the initial  
setup. The setup wizard goes to  
“Terminating the Initial Setup”.  
The setup wizard continues to “Network  
Connection”.  
`No, not yet:  
When prompted, use q/wto select one of the  
3
following options and then press ENTER.  
`Yes:  
You can enter other remote control codes.  
Confirms that the source is properly  
displayed.  
`No:  
Terminating the Initial Setup  
Displays an error report. Follow the  
troubleshooting instructions and recheck the  
source.  
This step ends the initial setup process.  
Network Connection  
This step checks your network connection.  
Press ENTER.  
To restart the initial setup, select “Initial Setup”  
1
Use q/wto select one of the following options,  
4
Use q/wto select one of the following options,  
1
in the “Hardware Setup” menu (page 73).  
and then press ENTER.  
`Yes:  
and then press ENTER.  
`Yes:  
Returns to step 2.  
Performs the checkings.  
`No, Done Checking:  
The setup wizard continues to “Remote  
Mode Setup”.  
`No, Skip:  
Skips this step and terminates the initial  
setup.  
En-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Measurement procedure  
Note  
Using the Automatic Speaker Setup  
• Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise and  
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) can disrupt the room  
measurements. Close windows, televisions, radios, air  
conditioners, fluorescent lights, home appliances, light  
dimmers, or other devices. Turn off the cell phone (even if  
it is not in use) or place it away from all audio electronics.  
• The microphone picks up test tones played through each  
speaker as Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup runs.  
To create a listening environment in your home  
theater that all listeners will enjoy, Audyssey MultEQ  
takes measurements at up to six positions within the  
listening area. Position the microphone at ear height  
of a seated listener with the microphone tip pointed  
directly at the ceiling using a tripod. Do not hold the  
microphone in your hand during measurements as  
this will produce inaccurate results.  
With the supplied calibrated microphone,  
Audyssey MultEQ automatically determines the  
number of speakers connected, their size for  
purposes of bass management, optimum crossover  
frequencies to the subwoofer (if present), and  
distances from the primary listening position.  
®
Audyssey MultEQ then removes the distortion caused  
by room acoustics by capturing room acoustical  
problems over the listening area in both the frequency  
and time domain. The result is clear, well-balanced  
sound for everyone. Audyssey MultEQ can be used  
• Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
cannot be performed while a pair of headphones is  
connected.  
First measurement position  
Also referred to as the Main Listening Position, this  
refers to the most central position where one would  
normally sit within the listening environment.  
Audyssey MultEQ uses the measurements from this  
position to calculate speaker distance, level, and the  
optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.  
®
with Audyssey Dynamic EQ and  
®
Audyssey Dynamic Volume (page 64).  
Before using this function, connect and position all of  
your speakers.  
Audyssey MultEQ offers two ways of measuring: the  
Audyssey Quick Start” and “Audyssey MultEQ  
Full Calibration”.  
• “Audyssey Quick Start” uses the measurement  
from one position to perform the speaker setting  
only.  
Second-sixth measurement positions  
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the  
places where the other listeners will sit). You can  
measure up to six positions.  
• “Audyssey MultEQ Full Calibration” uses the  
measurement from six positions to correct room  
response in addition to the speaker setting.  
The more positions are used in measuring, the better  
the listening environment will become. We  
recommend using a measurement from six positions  
to create the best listening environment.  
The Quick Start takes 2 minutes and Full Calibration  
takes about 15 minutes.  
TV  
d e f  
c a b  
: Listening area  
a to f: Listening position  
Total measurement time varies depending on the  
number of speakers.  
En-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Turn on the AV receiver and the connected TV.  
On the TV, select the input to which the AV  
receiver is connected.  
Adjust the subwoofer volume level to 75 dB,  
and then press ENTER.  
Test tones are played through the subwoofer.  
Use the volume control on the subwoofer.  
Use q/wto select an option, and then press  
1
2
4
9
ENTER.  
MultEQ: Auto Setup  
AUDYSSEY  
Set the speaker setup microphone at the Main  
Listening Position a, and connect it to the  
SETUP MIC jack.  
-- Review Speaker Configuration --  
Subwoofer  
Front  
Center  
Yes  
100Hz  
40Hz  
Note  
• If your subwoofer does not have a volume control,  
disregard the displayed level and press ENTER to  
proceed to the next step.  
Surround  
100Hz  
None  
120Hz  
2ch  
Front High  
Surround Back  
Surround Back Ch  
SETUP MIC jack  
• If you set the subwoofer’s volume control to its  
maximum and the level displayed is lower than 75 dB,  
leave the subwoofer’s volume control at its maximum  
and press ENTER to proceed to the next step.  
Save  
Cancel  
The options are:  
`Save:  
Use q/wto select “Audyssey Quick Start” or  
“Audyssey MultEQ Full Calibration”, and then  
press ENTER.  
5
6
Save the calculated settings and exit  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup.  
Speaker setup microphone  
Press ENTER.  
`Cancel:  
The speaker setting menu appears.  
®
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Note  
and Speaker Setup.  
Speaker Setup starts.  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN. If your TV is  
connected to other video outputs, use the AV  
receiver’s display when changing settings.  
Test tones are played through each speaker as  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup runs. This process takes a few minutes.  
Please refrain from talking during  
measurements and do not stand between  
speakers and the microphone.  
Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone  
during Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup, unless you want to cancel the  
setup.  
Tip  
• You can view the calculated settings for the speaker  
configuration, speaker distances, and speaker levels  
by using e/r.  
When you’ve finished making the settings,  
press ENTER.  
3
Use q/wto select a target, and use e/rto  
change the setting.  
10  
MultEQ: Auto Setup  
AUDYSSEY  
After the results of Audyssey MultEQ have been  
saved, the menu will display the “Audyssey”  
(page 64), “Dynamic EQ” (page 64),  
“Dynamic Volume” (page 64) settings.  
Speakers Type (Front)  
Powered Zone 2  
Surround Back/Front High  
Subwoofer  
Normal  
No  
Surround Back  
Yes  
If you select “Audyssey Quick Start”, you will go  
to step 9.  
Perform the “2. Speaker Setup” according to your  
speaker configuration:  
Note  
Speakers Type (Front) (page 59)  
Powered Zone 2 (page 59)  
Surround Back/Front High (page 60)  
Subwoofer (page 60)  
next position, and then press ENTER.  
Audyssey MultEQ performs more  
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for  
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.  
• These settings are applied to all input selectors.  
7
8
measurements. This takes a few minutes.  
Press ENTER.  
If you use a powered subwoofer(s), go to step 4.  
If not, go to step 5.  
11  
12  
When prompted, repeat step 7.  
Disconnect the speaker setup microphone.  
En-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Error Messages  
Note  
The setup of the speaker can be done manually  
(page 59).  
The setup of the volume level of each speaker also  
can be done manually (pages 60, 61).  
• You can cancel Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup at any point in this procedure simply by  
disconnecting the setup microphone.  
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup.  
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted automatically  
when Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup starts.  
• Changes to the room after Audyssey MultEQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup requires you run  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
again, as room EQ characteristics may have changed.  
While Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup is in progress, one of the error  
messages below may appear.  
MultEQ: Auto Setup  
Note  
AUDYSSEY  
Ambient noise is too high.  
• Please note that THX recommends any THX main  
speakers be set to 80Hz(THX)”. If you set up your  
speakers using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any THX  
speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover (page 59).  
• Sometimes due to the electrical complexities of subwoofers  
and the interaction with the room, THX recommends setting  
the level and the distance of the subwoofer manually.  
Sometimes due to interaction with the room, you may  
notice irregular results when setting the level and/or  
distance of the main speakers. If this happens, THX  
recommends setting them manually.  
Retry  
Cancel  
Error message  
The options are:  
`Retry:  
Try again.  
`Cancel:  
Using a Powered Subwoofer  
Cancel Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup.  
If you’re using a powered subwoofer and it outputs  
very low-frequency sound at a low volume level, it  
may not be detected by Audyssey MultEQ Room  
Correction and Speaker Setup.  
• Ambient noise is too high.  
The background noise is too loud. Remove the  
source of the noise and try again.  
• Speaker Matching Error!  
The number of speakers detected was different  
from that of the first measurement. Check the  
speaker connection.  
If the “Subwoofer” appears on the “Review Speaker  
Configuration” screen as “No”, increase the  
subwoofer’s volume to the half-way point, set it to its  
highest crossover frequency, and then try running  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup again. Note that if the volume is set too high  
and the sound distorts, detection issues may occur,  
so use an appropriate volume level. If the subwoofer  
has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or Direct.  
Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for  
details.  
• Writing Error!  
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving  
again. If this message appears after 2 or 3  
attempts, contact your Onkyo dealer.  
• Speaker Detect Error  
This message appears if a speaker is not detected.  
No” means that no speaker was detected.  
Tip  
• See “Speaker Configuration” for appropriate settings  
(page 12).  
En-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Turning On & Basic Operations  
PIN code method  
Use q/wto select “Network Connection”, and  
e/rto select “Wireless”, and then press  
ENTER (page 72).  
Performing Wireless LAN Setup  
5
6
1. Use q/wto select “PIN Code” and then press  
ENTER.  
A wireless LAN (WLAN) is a local area network that  
relies on wireless communication.  
To achieve a wireless network connection, you will  
need the following component:  
An 8-digit PIN code is displayed. The PIN  
code is displayed scrolling on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
The “Wireless Setup” menu is displayed on  
screen.  
Tip  
2. Input the provided code in your Access Point.  
For information on the registration process,  
please refer to the instruction manual  
provided with your Access Point device.  
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is  
selected in “Network Connection” in initial setup  
(page 23).  
Access point  
Also known as the base station, it links your AV  
receiver (wireless client) with a PC or network.  
Access points fall into two categories: the bridge  
type that only performs data relay in a local area  
network, or the router type that has a built-in router  
functionality.  
Press q/wto select (North American models)  
Press ENTER to confirm.  
“Push Button Configuration (Other  
7
Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi  
indicator flashes. After the connection to your  
Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights  
and the connection status is displayed on the  
screen.  
This completes the wireless LAN setup.  
You can review your setup with the “Status”  
option on the “Wireless Setup” menu.  
*1  
Routers)” /(excluding North American  
models) “Push Button Configuration (Select  
from Router)”, and press ENTER.  
The method to make settings by “Push Button  
Configuration” is displayed, providing the  
following two options:  
To achieve a wireless network connection, it is  
necessary to perform the wireless LAN setup. The  
setup can be done either automatically or manually.  
You use your AV receiver as a wireless client  
(wireless terminal) and connect it to a PC or to the  
Internet.  
Tip  
*1  
(North American models) To connect to Linksys  
Note  
E/EA Router, select “Push Button Configuration  
(Linksys E/EA Router)” and make settings  
following the instructions on the screen.  
• If Wi-Fi indicator doesn’t light, the connection to your  
Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this  
setting again (page 85).  
Automatic wireless LAN setup  
Push Button method  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
1
1. Use q/wto select “Push Button” and then  
press ENTER.  
Use e/ror q/wto select “Setup”, and then  
2
2. Press the WPS button on your Access Point  
device.  
press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select “Hardware Setup”, and then  
3
Tip  
press ENTER.  
• How long the WPS button should be pressed differs  
depending on the type of Access Point device. Refer  
to the instruction manual provided with your Access  
Point device for operations.  
Use q/wto select “Network”, and then press  
4
ENTER.  
En-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Turning On & Basic Operations  
Select “OK” and press ENTER.  
Connection to your Access Point starts and Wi-Fi  
indicator flashes. After the connection to your  
Access Point is completed, Wi-Fi indicator lights  
and the connection status is displayed on the  
screen.  
Manual wireless LAN setup  
Use q/wto select the Access Point you wish to  
connect to, and then press ENTER.  
Depending on your encryption settings, the  
security of your Access Point will provide one of  
the following patterns:  
7
8
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
1
Use e/ror q/wto select “Setup”, and then  
2
press ENTER.  
WEP method  
This completes the wireless LAN setup.  
You can review your setup with the “Status”  
option on the “Wireless Setup” menu.  
Use q/wto select “Hardware Setup”, and then  
1. Use q/wto select “Default Key ID” and then  
3
press ENTER.  
press ENTER.  
2. Use q/wto choose an ID between 1 and 4,  
and then press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select “Network”, and then press  
4
Note  
ENTER.  
• If Wi-Fi indicator doesn’t light, the connection to your  
Access Point is not done successfully. Configure this  
setting again (page 85).  
3. Use q/wto select “Password” and then press  
ENTER.  
Use q/wto select “Network Connection”, and  
5
e/rto select “Wireless”, and then press  
4. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the  
password and confirm with “OK”.  
ENTER (page 72).  
The “Wireless Setup” menu is displayed on  
screen.  
WPA/WPA2 method  
1. Use q/wto select “Password” and then press  
Tip  
ENTER.  
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is  
selected in “Network Connection” in initial setup  
(page 23).  
2. Use the keyboard on screen to enter the  
password and confirm with “OK”.  
Use q/wto select “Search Wireless Network”  
6
No encryption  
and then press ENTER.  
A list of available Access Points is displayed.  
If your Access Point device is not secured by  
encryption, there is no need to input any secret  
key.  
Tip  
• If Access Point you wish to connect to is not displayed  
in the list of available Access Points, the setting also  
can be made by entering “SSID”, “Security”, and  
Password” manually after selecting “Direct Input”.  
Tip  
• When you select the Access Point you wish to connect to  
from the list of available Access Points, “SSID” and  
Security” are automatically displayed. These settings can  
be changed manually.  
En-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback  
• “Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder”  
(page 36)  
Select the input on the AV receiver to play the  
AV components.  
2
• “Remote Playback” (page 37)  
• “Listening to AM/FM Radio” (page 38)  
• “Playing Audio and Video from Separate Sources”  
(page 40)  
• “Controlling Other Components” (page 76)  
• “Using the Onkyo Dock” (page 80)  
Press the input selector button to which the AV  
components to be played is connected.  
Press the TV/CD button to play the audio of the  
TV. Switching the input on the TV is also  
required. Select the input to which the AV  
receiver is connected by using the TV remote  
controller.  
Playback  
* For the CEC compatible TV and the AV components  
connected with HDMI connections, switching the input  
is automatically performed. Switch the input manually  
for other AV components.  
1
2
Select the desired listening mode.  
You can enjoy various types of listening mode.  
The listening mode is switched by pressing  
Listening mode button on the AV receiver or the  
remote controller.  
4
4
This section describes the basic operation such as  
playback, listening mode, and other useful functions.  
Reading this manual from the beginning to this  
section helps you to understand the basic  
connection/setup/operation.  
Adjust the volume.  
You can enjoy the surround sound.  
Screen Saver  
3
If there is no video signal on the current input source  
and no operation for a specific time (three minutes by  
default), a screen saver automatically comes on.  
Tip  
• When listening to an HDMI component through the AV  
receiver, set the HDMI component so that its video can be  
seen on the TV screen (on the TV, select the input of the  
HDMI component connected to the AV receiver). If the TV  
power is off or the TV is set to another input source, this  
may result in no sound from the AV receiver or the sound  
may be cut off.  
1 2  
3
4
Tip  
• The time until the screen saver activates itself can  
be changed in the “Screen Saver” setting  
(page 69).  
• The screen will return to its previous state if the AV  
receiver is operated.  
See also:  
(Actual location of buttons depends on the country.)  
• “Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-enabled Device”  
(page 31)  
Turn on the AV receiver, the TV and the AV  
1
• “Playing a USB Device” (page 32)  
• “Listening to TuneIn” (page 32)  
• “Registering Other Internet Radio” (page 34)  
• “Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)”  
(page 34)  
components.  
controller, press the RECEIVER button first.  
En-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playback  
TOP MENU  
This button displays the top menu for each media or  
service.  
REPEAT  
a
b
o
Controlling Contents of USB or  
Network Devices  
Press this button repeatedly to cycle through the repeat  
modes.  
(page 31)  
q/wand ENTER  
Tip  
These buttons navigate through the menus.  
• See “Controlling Other Components” about the operation of  
other components (page 76).  
The AV receiver supports Album art display, and displaying  
image file format of JPEG, PNG, and BMP is possible. The  
image file format cannot be displayed in either of the  
following cases:  
Total number of horizontal and vertical pixels is more than  
2048 x 2048.  
Image data size (JPEG/PNG) is more than 4 MB.  
Press USB or NET first.  
e/r  
This button cycles through pages.  
c
d
1
h
This button starts playback.  
7
This button selects the beginning of the current song.  
Pressing this button twice selects the previous song.  
e
f
g
5
Note  
This button fast-reverses the current song.  
• The buttons you can use will differ depending on the  
devices and media used for playback.  
3
This button pauses playback.  
• When you select the NET input selector on the AV receiver  
for the first time, “DISCLAIMER” screen is displayed on TV.  
Please read the contents thoroughly before using network  
service. Select “Agree” if you agree with the content. If you  
disagree, network service is not available on the AV  
receiver (page 89).  
SEARCH  
a
b
i
You can toggle between the playback screen and the  
list screen during playback.  
DISPLAY  
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
This button switches between song information during  
playback.  
Press this button while the list screen is displayed to  
return to the playback screen.  
c
d
e
f
g
MENU  
This button displays the menu of Internet radio  
services.  
RETURN  
This button returns to the previous menu.  
j
k
4
This button fast-forwards the current song.  
l
m
n
6
This button selects the next song.  
2
This button stops playback.  
RANDOM  
This button performs random playback.  
En-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
Pairing the AV receiver with a Bluetooth-  
enabled device  
Understanding Icons on the Display  
Playing an Audio from Bluetooth-  
enabled Device  
This section describes icons that appear on the AV  
receiver’s display during media playback.  
Pairing is an operation where Bluetooth-enabled  
devices register with each other beforehand. Use the  
procedure below to pair the AV receiver with your  
Bluetooth-enabled device. Once a pairing operation is  
performed, it does not need to be performed again.  
About the Bluetooth Wireless Technology  
Icon  
Description  
Bluetooth wireless technology is a short-range  
wireless technology that enables wireless data  
communication between digital devices. Bluetooth  
wireless technology operates within a range of about  
15 meters (49 feet). You do not need to use a cable  
for connection, nor is it necessary for the devices to  
face one another, such is the case with infrared  
technology.  
Folder  
Track  
Place the Bluetooth-enabled device within  
1 meter (3.3 feet) from the AV receiver.  
1
Playback  
Select “BLUETOOTH” in “Input” in Quick  
2
Pause  
Setup, and press ENTER (page 52).  
BLUETOOTH indicator flashes and the AV  
receiver is put to pairing mode.  
Now Pairing” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display.  
Tip  
Fast Forward  
Fast Reverse  
Artist  
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI outputs.  
• If your Bluetooth-enabled device supports A2DP protocol,  
its audio file will play through the AV receiver.  
• Connection is not guaranteed for all Bluetooth-enabled  
devices.  
Tip  
• The same operation can be done by pressing  
BLUETOOTH button on the AV receiver.  
• When connecting a Bluetooth-enabled device paired  
with the AV receiver to the AV receiver, BLUETOOTH  
input selector is automatically selected.  
• If you connect the AV receiver to another Bluetooth-  
enabled device, hold down BLUETOOTH button until  
BLUETOOTH indicator flashes or make settings in  
Status” of “Bluetooth” for pairing (page 73).  
• Some Bluetooth-enabled device may need to re-  
establish pairing for each connection.  
Album  
Operating on the Remote Controller  
Repeat One Track  
Repeat Folder (USB Device)  
Repeat  
The Bluetooth-enabled device can be operated by the  
supplied remote controller.  
Tip  
• To operate your Bluetooth-enabled device by the remote  
controller, the Bluetooth-enabled device must support  
profile: AVRCP.  
• Operation by the remote controller is not guaranteed for all  
Bluetooth-enabled devices.  
Shuffle  
Note  
• “BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected, if you’ve selected  
NET or USB as input selector in Multi Zone.  
En-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback  
• When disconnecting on your Bluetooth-enabled device,  
BLUETOOTH indicator on the AV receiver will go off.  
• If there is no sound output even after the pairing is done  
successfully, consult the instruction manual of the  
Bluetooth-enabled device, and then select the model name  
of the AV receiver as the audio output device.  
• While connected to a Bluetooth-enabled device, the AV  
receiver cannot be detected and a connection cannot be  
established from another Bluetooth-enabled device.  
• If you cannot connect with a paired Bluetooth-enabled  
device, perform the pairing operation between the AV  
receiver and the Bluetooth-enabled device again.  
During this period (about 2 minutes), you can  
operate the Bluetooth-enabled device to pair  
with the AV receiver.  
Note  
3
4
• While the message “Connecting...” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, do not disconnect the USB cable  
supplied with the USB device from the USB port.  
Note  
• When establishing a connection with the AV receiver,  
select the profile (A2DP, AVRCP) at the Bluetooth-  
enabled device. If the Bluetooth-enabled device does  
not support the AVRCP profile, you cannot perform  
playback or other operations with the AV receiver.  
Listening to TuneIn  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (pages 16, 27).  
Tip  
Tip  
• For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the  
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device.  
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI outputs.  
Note  
• Due to the characteristic of Bluetooth wireless technology,  
the sound played on the AV receiver may slightly delay from  
the sound played on the Bluetooth-enabled device.  
Once the AV receiver is detected and the  
model name of the AV receiver appears on the  
display of your Bluetooth-enabled device,  
select the model name.  
When a Bluetooth connection is established  
successfully, BLUETOOTH indicator will light.  
TuneIn is a new radio service which offers the music,  
sports and news all over the world.  
Over 70,000 radio stations and 2 million on-demand  
programs are registered, and you can easily enjoy  
them by selecting stations or programs of your  
choice. TuneIn is preprogrammed on the AV receiver.  
Playing a USB Device  
Tip  
Tip  
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI outputs.  
Press NET.  
• The model name appeared on the display of your  
Bluetooth-enabled device is “Onkyo TX-NR727”.  
1
The network service screen appears, and the  
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver  
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired  
LAN connection is selected, verify that the  
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV  
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,  
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.  
This section explains how to play music files from a  
USB device (e.g., USB flash drives and MP3 players).  
See also:  
*
If passkey is required on the display of the  
5
6
Bluetooth-enabled device, enter “0000”.  
The AV receiver only supports numerical  
passkey up to 4 digits.  
* Passkey may be called “Passcode”, “PIN code”, “PIN  
number” or “Password”.  
• “Network/USB Features” (page 94).  
Press USB to select the “USB” input.  
1
2
Plug your USB device into the AV receiver’s  
USB port.  
Tip  
Play back the desired music on the Bluetooth-  
enabled device.  
The audio is output from the AV receiver.  
• The same operation can be done by selecting  
Network Service” in the Home menu.  
The USB indicator lights. It will flash if the AV  
receiver cannot read the USB device.  
Use q/w/e/rto select “TuneIn” and then  
2
Press ENTER.  
press ENTER.  
Tip  
3
A list of the device’s contents appears. To open a  
folder, use q/wto select it, and then press  
ENTER.  
• The AV receiver may not work as normal depending on the  
circumstance even though the AV receiver is placed within  
the 15 meters range. In such cases, get the Bluetooth-  
enabled device closer to the AV receiver and retry the  
operation.  
Use q/wto select a music file, and press  
4
ENTER or 1to start playback.  
En-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playback  
Category/Area, etc. Store your favorite stations or  
Setting an TuneIn account  
Use q/wto select a station or a program, and  
then press ENTER.  
3
programs in this folder.  
To create a user account for TuneIn, open a browser  
window such as Internet Explorer , and connect to  
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press  
MENU button on the remote controller.  
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Presets”, and  
press ENTER.  
Playback starts.  
®
tunein.com website. With a TuneIn account, you can  
quickly search and browse for stations and programs  
at tunein.com website and save as your favorites  
which will automatically appear in your AV receiver  
My Presets account. If you have a TuneIn account,  
select “Login” and then “I have a TuneIn account”  
on the top list. Enter your user name and password to  
login.  
tunein  
Tip  
My Music  
0 : 11  
Great Artist  
My Favorite  
If no radio stations or programs are stored in “My Presets”,  
My Presets” folder will not be displayed.  
Go to Menu  
Tip  
Either of the following menus can be selected by  
pressing the MENU button on the remote controller or  
pressing ENTER button to select “Go to Menu”.  
`Add to My Presets  
• Select “Login with a registration code”, and associate a  
device from my page on TuneIn website by using a  
registration code displayed on the screen. This allows you  
to login without entering a user name and a password.  
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored  
in “My Presets”.  
`Remove from My Presets  
Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to  
My Favorites/My Presets  
In this menu, stations or programs stored in “My  
Presets” can be deleted.  
`Report a problem  
This menu is used to report problems on TuneIn  
service or resolve the problems in a wizard style.  
`View Schedule  
In this menu, program listings of stations or  
programs can be displayed.  
`Clear recents  
There are two ways you can register specific Internet  
radio stations (programs) from the TuneIn.  
• Adding to My Favorites  
The selected program will be added to “My  
Favorites” on the network service screen, which  
appears when pressing NET.  
1. Select radio stations or programs, and press  
MENU button on the remote controller.  
In this menu, all the stations and programs  
stored in “Recents” can be deleted.  
`Add to My Favorites  
2. Use q/wto select “Add to My Favorites”, and  
press ENTER.  
3. Use q/w/e/rto select “OK”, and press ENTER.  
In this menu, stations or programs can be stored  
in “My Favorites”.  
Tip  
• You can rename the stations saved in “My Favorites”  
(page 34).  
• Adding TuneIn radio stations or programs to My  
Presets  
Select "TuneIn", and press ENTER button to display  
a folder of “My Presets” on the screen that displays  
En-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback  
Click “Save” to save the Internet radio station.  
The Internet radio station is then added to “My  
Favorites”. To play the registered station, press  
NET, and then select “My Favorites” on the  
network service screen. A list of registered  
Internet radio stations appears. Select the one  
that you saved and press ENTER.  
Registering Other Internet Radio  
Changing the Icon Layout on the  
Network Service Screen  
5
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (pages 16, 27).  
Tip  
Tip  
• You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI  
OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting.  
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI outputs.  
The layout of icons can be customized by switching  
their positions on the network service screen.  
Internet radio URLs in the following formats are  
supported: PLS, M3U, and podcast (RSS). However,  
depending on the type of data or audio format used  
by the Internet radio station, you may not be able to  
listen to some stations.  
To listen to other Internet radio stations, you must  
register your station in “My Favorites” of the network  
service screen, as described below.  
Tip  
• If you want to add a new station directly from “My  
Favorites”, select an empty slot in the list and press MENU.  
Then, select “Create New Station” and press ENTER.  
Pressing ENTER again will display the keyboard screen.  
Use that keyboard to enter the station’s name and URL  
respectively, and then press ENTER.  
Press NET.  
The network service screen appears.  
1
Tip  
• The same operation can be done by selecting  
Network Service” in the Home menu.  
• If you want to delete a station saved in “My Favorites”,  
press MENU with the station selected or while the station is  
playing. Then, use q/wto select “Delete from My  
Favorites” and press ENTER. You can also delete stations  
from the Web Setup.  
Press MODE/D (blue) on the remote controller.  
2
Note  
• Services available may vary depending on the region. See  
the separate instructions for more information.  
• Certain network service or contents available through this  
device may not be accessible in case the service provider  
terminates its service.  
Use q/w/e/rto select an icon to move, and  
3
then press ENTER.  
• If you want to rename a station, select the desired station  
and press MENU. Then, use q/wto select “Rename this  
station” and press ENTER.  
Use q/w/e/rto select another icon as the  
4
destination, and then press ENTER.  
The icons switch positions and the message  
Completed!” appears.  
• You can save up to 40 Internet radio stations.  
Select “Network” on the Setup menu to verify  
your IP address (page 72).  
1
Take a note of the IP address.  
Playing Music Files on a Server (DLNA)  
On your computer, start your web browser.  
2
3
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (pages 16, 27).  
Enter the AV receiver’s IP address in the  
browser’s Internet address (URL) field.  
Tip  
®
If you are using Internet Explorer , you can also  
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI outputs.  
enter the URL by selecting “Open...” on the “File”  
Information on the AV receiver is then shown on  
your Internet browser (Web Setup).  
This section explains how to play music files on a  
computer or media server through the AV receiver  
(Server Playback).  
Click on the “My Favorites” tab, and enter the  
Internet radio station’s name and URL.  
4
En-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playback  
Windows Media Player Setup  
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
A dialog box appears.  
Use q/w/e/rto select “DLNA”, and press  
2
3
3
4
ENTER.  
Windows Media Player 11 Setup  
Use q/wto select a server, and then press  
This section explains how to configure Windows  
Media Player 11 so that the AV receiver can play the  
music files stored on your computer.  
Tip  
ENTER.  
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on  
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will  
display a list of the playback devices connected to the  
network. You can skip step 3.  
The menu is displayed according to the server  
functions.  
Start Windows Media Player 11.  
Note  
1
2
• The search function does not work with media servers  
which do not support this function.  
• Photos and movies stored on a media server cannot  
be accessed from the AV receiver.  
• Depending on the sharing settings in the media server,  
the AV receiver may not able to access the content.  
See the instruction manual of the media server.  
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary  
slightly depending on the network location.  
On the “Library” menu, select “Media  
Sharing”.  
The “Media Sharing” dialog box appears.  
Select the “Share my media” check box, and  
then click “OK”.  
3
On the “Media streaming options”, select the  
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to  
“Allowed”.  
4
5
A list of the supported devices appears.  
Use q/wto select an item, and then press  
5
Select the AV receiver in the list, and then  
click “Allow”.  
4
ENTER or 1to start playback.  
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.  
This completes the Windows Media Player 12  
configuration.  
You can now play the music files in your  
Windows Media Player 12 library.  
The corresponding icon will be checked.  
dlna  
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.  
This completes the Windows Media Player 11  
configuration.  
5
My favorite song 1  
0 :11 / 3:00  
Artist name  
My favorite album  
You can now play the music files in your  
Windows Media Player 11 library through the AV  
receiver.  
Playing music files on a server (DLNA)  
Start your computer or media server.  
1
2
Tip  
Note  
• Windows Media Player 11 can be downloaded for free  
from the Microsoft web site.  
Press NET.  
• Depending on the media server, 5/4/3may not  
The network service screen appears, and the  
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver  
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired  
LAN connection is selected, verify that the  
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV  
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,  
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.  
work.  
• If the message “No Item.” appears, this means that no  
information can be retrieved from the server. In this  
case, check your server, network, and AV receiver  
connections.  
Windows Media Player 12 Setup  
This section explains how to configure Windows  
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the  
music files stored on your personal computer.  
Start Windows Media Player 12.  
1
Tip  
• The same operation can be done by selecting  
Network Service” in the Home menu.  
En-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback  
Playing music files on a shared folder  
Creating a shared folder  
Playing Music Files on a Shared Folder  
In order to enjoy Home Media, you must first create a  
shared folder on your computer.  
Right-click the folder that you want to share.  
This section explains how to play music files on a  
computer or NAS (Network Attached Storage)  
through the AV receiver.  
1
2
3
Select “Properties”.  
Press NET.  
1
The network service screen appears, and the  
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, the AV receiver  
is not connected to the network correctly. If wired  
LAN connection is selected, verify that the  
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV  
receiver. If wireless LAN connection is selected,  
verify that the Wi-Fi indicator lights.  
On the “Sharing” tab, select “Advanced  
Sharing”.  
Windows 8/Windows 7 Setup  
Check the check box of “Share this folder”  
and then click “OK”.  
Setting the sharing options  
4
Select “Choose homegroup and sharing  
options” on the Control Panel.  
Under “Network File and Folder Sharing”,  
select “Share”.  
1
5
Tip  
Select “Everyone” from the pull-down menu,  
click “Add”, and then click “Share”.  
Tip  
6
• If this option is not available, verify that “View by:” is set  
to “Category”.  
• The same operation can be done by selecting  
Network Service” in the Home menu.  
Tip  
Select “Change advanced sharing settings”.  
2
3
• With this setting, everyone is allowed to access the  
folder. If you want to assign a user name and  
password to the folder, make the corresponding  
settings for “Permissions” in “Advanced Sharing” of the  
“Sharing” tab.  
Use q/w/e/rto select “Home Media”, and  
2
press ENTER.  
Under “Home or Work”, verify that the  
following items are checked:  
Use q/wto select a server, and then press  
3
“Turn on network discovery”, “Turn on file and  
printer sharing”, “Turn on sharing so anyone with  
network access can read and write files in the  
Public folders”, and “Turn off password protected  
sharing”.  
ENTER.  
Tip  
• Verify that “Workgroup” is properly set.  
Note  
• The server name of your computer can be viewed on  
the computer properties screen.  
• When using NAS (Network Attached Storage), refer to  
the instruction manual provided with your NAS unit.  
Use q/wto select the desired shared folder  
4
Select “Save changes” and click “OK” on the  
confirmation screen.  
4
and then press ENTER.  
When asked for a user name and password,  
enter the necessary login information.  
Tip  
5
• The login information will be remembered for the next  
time you log in.  
• The login information is that of the user account set  
when creating a shared folder.  
Use q/wto select a music file and then press  
6
ENTER or 1.  
The playback of the selected file starts.  
En-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playback  
Click “OK” to close the dialog box.  
This completes the Windows Media Player 12  
configuration.  
You can now play the music files in your  
Windows Media Player 12 library.  
Adjusting the Volume.  
Remote Playback  
5
5
You can adjust the volume by adjusting the  
volume bar in the “Remote playback” window.  
The default maximum volume level is 82 (0dB). If  
you wish to change this, enter the value from the  
Web Setup in your browser. Refer to step 3 of  
“Registering Other Internet Radio” for details  
(page 34).  
The volume value of the remote window and the  
volume value of the AV receiver may not always  
match.  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (pages 16, 27).  
Tip  
• The on-screen information appears only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI outputs.  
Tip  
• On the “Stream” menu, confirm that “Allow remote  
control of my Player...” is checked.  
Remote playback is supported by Windows Media  
Player 12.  
Remote Playback means you can play the music files  
stored on a media server or personal computer with  
the AV receiver by operating the controller device in  
the home network.  
Using Remote Playback  
Adjustments you make to the volume in the AV  
receiver will not be reflected in the “Remote  
playback” window.  
Turn on the AV receiver.  
1
2
Start Windows Media Player 12.  
To enable remote playback, you must first  
configure Windows Media Player 12.  
Windows Media Player 12 Setup  
Note  
This section explains how to configure Windows  
Media Player 12 so that the AV receiver can play the  
music files stored on your personal computer.  
• Remote playback cannot be used in any of the following  
cases:  
Network services are being used.  
On Windows Media Player 12, right-click on a  
music file.  
3
Contents are being played from a USB device.  
Agree” is not selected on the “DISCLAIMER” screen  
displayed on the TV when you select the NET input  
selector on the AV receiver for the first time.  
The right-click menu appears.  
Start Windows Media Player 12.  
1
2
Tip  
• For selecting another media server, select the desired  
media server from the “Other Libraries” menu on  
Windows Media Player 12.  
On the “Stream” menu, select “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
A dialog box appears.  
Select the AV receiver in “Remote playback”.  
4
Tip  
The “Play to” window appears and playback on  
the AV receiver starts. Operations during remote  
playback can be made from the “Play to” window  
of Windows 8/Windows 7 on your personal  
computer.  
• If the media streaming is already activated, clicking on  
“More streaming options...” in the “Stream” menu will  
display a list of the playback devices connected to the  
network. You can skip step 3.  
Move your cursor and click on “Turn on media  
streaming”.  
A list of media server appears. Wording may vary  
slightly depending on the network location.  
3
A playback screen will be displayed on the  
connected TV.  
Tip  
• If the operating system of your personal computer is  
Windows 8, click “Play to” and select the AV receiver.  
On the “Media streaming options”, select the  
AV receiver and confirm that it is set to  
“Allowed”.  
4
En-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
Tuning into stations by frequency  
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by  
entering the appropriate frequency.  
Press TUNING q/w.  
Listening to AM/FM Radio  
2
Searching stops when a station is found.  
This section describes the procedure of using the  
buttons on the front panel, unless otherwise specified.  
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator  
lights. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the  
FM STEREO indicator lights as shown.  
On the remote controller, press TUNER  
repeatedly to select “AM” or “FM”, followed by  
D.TUN.  
1
Using the Tuner  
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio  
stations. You can store your favorite stations as  
presets for quick selection.  
TUNED  
AUTO  
You can also change the frequency steps  
(page 69).  
(Actual display depends on the country.)  
FM STEREO  
Within 8 seconds, use the number buttons to  
Press TUNER to select either “AM” or “FM”.  
2
1
enter the frequency of the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM), press 8, 7, 5  
or 8, 7, 5, 0.  
If you have entered the wrong number, you can  
retry after 8 seconds.  
In this example, FM has been selected.  
Each time you press TUNER, the radio band  
changes between AM and FM.  
Tip  
• Tuning into weak FM stereo stations  
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may  
be impossible to get good reception. In this case,  
switch to manual tuning mode and listen to the station  
in mono.  
Band  
Frequency  
Presetting AM/FM Stations  
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your  
favorite AM/FM radio stations as presets.  
Manual tuning mode  
In manual tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.  
(Actual display depends on the country.)  
Tuning into Radio Stations  
Auto tuning mode  
Tune into the AM/FM station that you want to  
store as a preset.  
1
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO  
indicator goes off on the AV receiver’s  
display.  
1
See the previous section.  
Press MEMORY.  
The preset number flashes.  
2
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO  
Press and hold TUNING q/w.  
1
2
indicator lights on the AV receiver’s display.  
The frequency stops changing when you release  
the button.  
Press the buttons repeatedly to change the  
frequency one step at a time.  
(Actual display depends on the country.)  
While the preset number is flashing (about 8  
3
seconds), use PRESET e/rto select a preset  
from 1 through 40.  
En-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Playback  
What is RDS?  
Displaying Radio Text (RT)  
Press MEMORY again to store the station or  
channel.  
The station or channel is stored and the preset  
number stops flashing.  
Repeat this procedure for all of your favorite  
AM/FM radio stations.  
4
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method  
of transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was  
developed by the European Broadcasting Union  
(EBU) and is available in most European countries.  
Many FM stations use it these days. In addition to  
displaying text information, RDS can also help you  
find radio stations by type (e.g., news, sport, rock,  
etc.).  
Press RT/PTY/TP once.  
The RT information scrolls across the AV  
receiver’s display.  
1
Note  
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV  
receiver waits for the RT information.  
• If the message “No Text Data” appears, no RT  
information is available.  
Selecting Presets  
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS  
information:  
PS (Program Service)  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS  
information, the station’s name will be displayed.  
Pressing DISPLAY will display the frequency for 3  
seconds.  
To select a preset, use PRESET e/ron the AV  
1
receiver, or the remote controller’s CH +/–.  
Tip  
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)  
You can search for radio stations by type.  
• You can also use the remote controller’s number  
buttons to select a preset directly.  
Press RT/PTY/TP twice.  
The current program type appears on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
1
RT (Radio Text)  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting  
text information, the text will be shown on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
PTY (Program Type)  
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations by  
type.  
TP (Traffic Program)  
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that  
broadcast traffic information (page 40).  
Deleting Presets  
Use PRESET e/rto select the type of  
2
Select the preset that you want to delete.  
See the previous section.  
program you want.  
See the table shown later in this chapter.  
1
While holding down MEMORY, press TUNING  
MODE.  
To start the search, press ENTER.  
2
3
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station of  
the type you specified, at which point it stops  
briefly before continuing with the search.  
The preset is deleted and its number disappears  
from the AV receiver’s display.  
When a station you want to listen to is found,  
press ENTER.  
If no stations are found, the message “Not  
Found” appears.  
4
Using RDS (excluding North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
Note  
• RDS works only in areas where RDS broadcasts are  
available.  
When tuned into an RDS station, the RDS indicator  
lights.  
When the station is broadcasting text information, the  
text can be displayed.  
• In some cases, the text characters displayed on the AV  
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the  
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be  
displayed when unsupported characters are received. This  
is not a malfunction.  
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data may be  
displayed intermittently or not at all.  
En-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback  
Listening to Traffic News (TP)  
RDS program types (PTY)  
Playing Audio and Video from Separate  
Sources  
Type  
Display  
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic  
news.  
None  
None  
You can listen to the audio of one input source while  
watching the video of another. This function takes  
advantage of the fact that when an audio-only input  
source (PHONO, TV/CD, PC, TUNER) is selected,  
the video input source remains unchanged. The  
following procedure shows how to listen to a CD  
player’s audio source connected to TV/CD IN while  
watching a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player’s video source  
connected to BD/DVD.  
News reports  
Current affairs  
Information  
Sport  
News  
Press RT/PTY/TP three times.  
Affairs  
1
If the current radio station is broadcasting TP  
(Traffic Program), “[TP]” will appear on the AV  
receiver’s display. If “TP” without square brackets  
appears, this means that the station is not  
broadcasting TP.  
Info  
Sport  
Education  
Educate  
Drama  
Culture  
Science  
Varied  
Pop M  
Rock M  
Easy M  
Light M  
Classics  
Other M  
Weather  
Finance  
Children  
Social  
Drama  
Culture  
To locate a station that is broadcasting TP,  
press ENTER.  
Science and technology  
Varied  
2
Tip  
The AV receiver searches until it finds a station  
that’s broadcasting TP.  
If no stations are found, the message “Not  
Found” appears.  
Pop music  
Rock music  
Middle of the road music  
Light classics  
Serious classics  
Other music  
Weather  
To use an input selector as audio-exclusive, you must  
assign all video inputs to “- - - - -” (page 58).  
Press BD/DVD.  
1
2
Press TV/CD.  
The audio output changes to the CD source, but  
the video of previously-selected BD/DVD is  
retained.  
Finance  
Children’s programmes  
Social affairs  
Religion  
Start playback on your Blu-ray Disc/DVD and  
CD players.  
3
Religion  
Phone In  
Travel  
You can now enjoy watching your Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD with the sound of your CD player.  
Phone in  
Travel  
Leisure  
Leisure  
Jazz  
Jazz music  
Country music  
National music  
Oldies music  
Folk music  
Documentary  
Alarm test  
Country  
Nation M  
Oldies  
Folk M  
Document  
TEST  
Alarm  
Alarm!  
En-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Playback  
PURE AUDIO button and indicator  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
Using the Listening Modes  
About Listening Modes  
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.  
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s display  
and analog video circuitry are turned off. Only video  
signals input through HDMI input can be output from  
the HDMI output. The indicator lights when this mode  
is selected. Pressing this button again will select the  
previous listening mode.  
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your  
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall,  
with high fidelity and stunning surround sound.  
Selecting Listening Modes  
Listening Mode Buttons  
Press RECEIVER first.  
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME,THX  
Note  
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes can only be  
selected if your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player is connected to the  
AV receiver with a digital audio connection (coaxial, optical,  
or HDMI).  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
The listening modes you can select depends on the format  
of the input signal. To check the format, see “Displaying  
Source Information” (page 49).  
• While a pair of headphones is connected, you can select  
the following listening modes: Pure Audio (European,  
Australian and Asian models), Mono, Direct, and Stereo.  
PURE AUDIO  
MOVIE/TV, MUSIC, GAME,THX  
MOVIE/TV button  
This button selects the listening modes intended for  
use with movies and TV.  
MUSIC button  
This button selects the listening modes intended for  
use with music.  
GAME button  
This button selects the listening modes intended for  
use with video games.  
MUSIC  
MOVIE/TV  
GAME  
THX  
THX button  
This button selects the THX listening modes.  
En-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Playback  
Input Source  
Onkyo-Original DSP Listening Modes  
The following audio formats are supported by the listening modes.  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Speaker  
Source Layout  
This is mono (monophonic) sound.  
A
Orchestra  
Suitable for classical or operatic music,  
this mode emphasizes the surround  
channels in order to widen the stereo  
image, and simulates the natural  
reverberation of a large hall.  
A CN  
This is stereo (stereophonic) sound. Two independent audio signal channels  
are reproduced through two speakers.  
S
S
O r c h e s t r a  
D
This is 5.1-channel surround sound. This surround system has five main  
channels of sound and a sixth subwoofer channel (called the point-one  
channel).  
D
F
G
Unplugged  
and jazz, this mode emphasizes the  
front stereo image, giving the impression  
of being right in front of the stage.  
H
This is 7.1-channel surround sound. This is a further sound enhancement to  
5.1-channel sound with two additional speakers that provide greater sound  
envelopment and more accurate positioning of sounds.  
F
U n p l u g g e d  
This is DTS-ES surround sound. This surround system can produce a discrete  
or a matrix-encoded sixth channel from existing DTS 5.1 encoded material.  
G
Studio-Mix  
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening  
to music in this mode creates a lively  
sound field with a powerful acoustic  
concert.  
S t u d i o M i x  
This is Dolby Digital EX surround sound. This provides a center back surround  
channel from 5.1-channel sources.  
H
Speaker Layout  
TV Logic  
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV  
shows produced in a TV studio,  
surround effects to the entire sound, and  
clarity to voices.  
The illustration shows which speakers are activated in each channel. See  
“Speaker Configuration” for the speaker setup (page 59).  
T V L o g i c  
Z
X
C
Game-RPG  
G a me R PG  
Game-Action  
In this mode, the sound has a dramatic  
feel with a similar atmosphere to  
Orchestra mode.  
In this mode, sound localization is  
distinct with emphasis on bass.  
G a me – A c t i o n  
Game-Rock  
In this mode, sound pressure is  
emphasized to heighten live feel.  
G a me – R o c k  
B
V
Game-Sports  
Suitable for audio source with much  
reverberation.  
G a me S p o r t s  
All Ch Stereo  
Ideal for background music, this mode  
fills the entire listening area with stereo  
sound from the front, surround, and  
surround back speakers.  
XCN  
A l  
l
C h S t e r e o  
Full Mono  
In this mode, all speakers output the  
same sound in mono, so the sound you  
hear is the same regardless of where  
you are within the listening room.  
F u l  
l
M o n o  
En-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Listening Mode  
DSD*4  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
T-D (Theater-  
Dimensional)  
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual  
surround sound even with only two or  
three speakers. This works by  
controlling how sounds reach the  
listener’s left and right ears. Good  
results may not be possible if there’s too  
much reverb, so we recommend that  
you use this mode in an environment  
with little or no natural reverb.  
In this mode, audio from the input source  
is output without surround-sound  
processing. The speaker configuration  
(presence of speakers), crossover  
frequency, speaker distance, A/V Sync  
and much of the processing set via the  
audio setup are enabled. See “On-  
screen Setup” for more details  
A ZXC  
D
D XCN  
D S D  
T D  
Dolby Digital  
F
D o l b y  
D
G
H
Dolby Digital Plus*5  
D XCN  
F XCN  
*3  
D o l b y  
D
+
(page 52).  
Dolby TrueHD  
Listening Modes  
D o l b y T r u e HD  
DTS  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
D XCN  
D T S  
Pure Audio*1*2  
In this mode, the display and video  
circuitry are turned off, minimizing  
possible noise sources for the ultimate in  
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the  
analog video circuitry is turned off, only  
video signals input through HDMI IN can  
be output from the HDMI output.)  
A ZXC  
DTS-HD High  
Resolution Audio  
D XCN  
F XCN  
*3  
S N  
P u r e A A u d i o  
*3  
D
F
G
H
D T S HD HR  
DTS-HD Master  
Audio  
D T S HD MS T R  
Direct  
In this mode, audio from the input source  
is output without surround-sound  
DTS Express  
D XCN  
D XCN  
D i r e c t  
processing. The speaker configuration  
(presence of speakers) and speaker  
distance settings are enabled, but much  
of the processing set via the audio setup  
is disabled. See “On-screen Setup” for  
more details (page 52).  
D T S E x p r e s s  
DTS 96/24*6  
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24  
sources. This is high-resolution DTS  
with a 96 kHz sampling rate and 24-bit  
resolution, providing superior fidelity.  
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS  
96/24 logo.  
D T S 9 6 / 2 4  
Stereo  
Sound is output from the front left and  
right speakers and subwoofer.  
N
S t e r e o  
DTS-ES Discrete*7  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES  
Discrete soundtracks, which use a  
discrete surround back channel for true  
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven  
totally separate audio channels provide  
better spatial imaging and 360-degree  
sound localization, perfect for sounds  
that pan across the surround channels.  
Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-ES  
logo, especially those with a DTS-ES  
Discrete soundtrack.  
G V  
Mono  
Use this mode when watching an old  
movie with a mono soundtrack, or use it  
with the foreign language soundtracks  
recorded in the left and right channels of  
some movies. It can also be used with  
DVDs or other sources containing  
multiplexed audio, such as karaoke  
DVDs.  
E S D i s c r e t e  
M o n o  
Multichannel  
multichannel sources.  
D XCN  
F
M u l  
t
i c h  
En-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
DTS-ES Matrix*7  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix  
soundtracks, which use a matrix-  
encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that  
bear the DTS-ES logo, especially those  
with a DTS-ES Matrix soundtrack.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIz  
Height  
Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height is designed  
to more effectively use existing program  
material when height channel speaker  
outputs are present. Dolby Pro Logic  
IIz Height can be used to upmix a  
variety of sources from movies and  
upmix game content.  
G V  
S B  
D
E S M a t r i x  
F
P L  
z
H e i g h t  
G
H
Dolby Pro Logic IIx*8 Dolby Pro Logic IIx expands any 2-  
channel source for 7.1-channel  
Dolby Pro Logic II  
playback. It provides a very natural and  
seamless surround-sound experience  
that fully envelops the listener. As well  
as music and movies, video games can  
also benefit from the dramatic spatial  
effects and vivid imaging.  
Dolby EX  
These modes expand 5.1-channel  
sources for 6.1/7.1-channel playback.  
They’re especially suited to Dolby EX  
soundtracks that include a matrix-  
encoded surround back channel. The  
additional channel adds an extra  
dimension and provides an enveloping  
surround sound experience, perfect for  
rotating and fly-by sound effects.  
D V  
P L  
P L  
P L  
P L  
P L  
P L  
M o v i e  
M u s i c  
G a m e  
H
D o l b y E X  
D o l b y  
D
E X  
If you’re not using any surround back  
speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II will be  
used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.  
• Dolby PLIIx Movie  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby  
Surround (Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV,  
DVD, VHS).  
S XCN  
D V  
x
x
x
M o v i e  
M u s i c  
G a m e  
DTS Neo:6  
This mode expands any 2-channel  
source for up to 7.1-channel playback. It  
uses seven full-bandwidth channels of  
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded  
material, providing a very natural and  
seamless surround sound experience  
that fully envelops the listener.  
• Dolby PLIIx Music  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby  
Surround (Pro Logic) music source  
(e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS,  
DVD).  
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema  
Use this mode with any stereo movie  
(e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).  
S XCN  
D V  
N e o : 6 C i n e m a  
N e o : 6 M u s i c  
• Dolby PLIIx Game  
• DTS Neo:6 Music  
Use this mode with video games,  
especially those that bear the Dolby  
Pro Logic II logo.  
Use this mode with any stereo music  
source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette, TV,  
VHS, DVD).  
• Dolby PLIIx Movie  
• Dolby PLIIx Music  
These modes use the Dolby Pro Logic  
IIx modes to expand 5.1-channel  
sources for 7.1-channel playback.  
• DTS Neo:6  
N e o : 6  
This mode uses DTS Neo:6 to expand  
5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback.  
En-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Listening Mode  
THX  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Audyssey DSX*9  
• Audyssey DSX  
Founded by George Lucas, THX  
develops stringent standards that  
ensure movies are reproduced in movie  
theaters and home theaters just as the  
director intended. THX Modes carefully  
optimize the tonal and spatial  
characteristics of the soundtrack for  
reproduction in the home-theater  
environment. They can be used with 2-  
channel matrixed and multichannel  
sources. Surround back speaker output  
depends on the source material and the  
selected listening mode.  
D B  
Audyssey DSX® is a scalable system  
that adds new speakers to improve  
surround impression. Starting with a  
5.1 system Audyssey DSX first adds  
Wide channels for the biggest impact  
on envelopment. Research in human  
hearing has proven that information  
from the Wide channels is much more  
critical in the presentation of a realistic  
soundstage than the Back Surround  
channels found in traditional 7.1  
systems. Audyssey DSX then creates  
a pair of Height channels to reproduce  
the next most important acoustical and  
perceptual cues. In addition to these  
new Wide and Height channels,  
Audyssey DSX applies Surround  
Envelopment Processing to enhance  
the blend between the front and  
surround channels.  
F
A u d y s s e y D S X  
G
H
• THX Cinema  
D CN  
F
T H X C i n e m a  
T HXMu s i c  
T H X G a m e s  
soundtracks for playback in a home  
theater environment. In this mode, THX  
Loudness Plus is configured for cinema  
levels and Re-EQ, Timbre Matching,  
and Adaptive Decorrelation are active.  
• THX Music  
THX Music mode is tailored for listening  
to music, which is typically mastered at  
significantly higher levels than movies.  
In this mode, THX Loudness Plus is  
configured for music playback and only  
Timbre Matching is active.  
G
H
• Dolby Pro Logic II Movie +  
Audyssey DSX  
• Dolby Pro Logic II Music +  
Audyssey DSX  
• Dolby Pro Logic II Game +  
Audyssey DSX  
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II  
and Audyssey DSX modes can be  
used.  
S B  
P L  
P L  
P L  
M o v i e D S X  
M u s i c D S X  
G a m e D S X  
• THX Games  
THX Games mode is meant for  
spatially accurate playback of game  
audio, which is often mixed similarly to  
movies but in a smaller environment.  
THX Loudness Plus is configured for  
game audio levels, with Timbre  
Matching active.  
The PLII and Audyssey DSX  
indicators light on the AV receiver’s  
display.  
En-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Movie + THX  
Cinema  
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Music + THX  
Music  
• Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx Game + THX  
Games  
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic  
II/IIx*8 and THX Cinema/Music/Games  
modes can be used.  
• THX Select2 Cinema  
S CN  
D V  
T HXS2 C i n e m a  
T H X S 2 M u s i c  
T H X S 2 G a m e s  
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1  
movie using 8 speakers giving you the  
best possible movie watching  
experience. In this mode, THX ASA  
processing blends the side surround  
providing the optimal mix of ambient  
and directional surround sounds.  
• THX Select2 Music  
For the replay of multichannel music,  
the THX Select2 Music should be  
selected. In this mode, THX ASA  
channels of all 5.1 encoded music  
sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital,  
DVD-Audio, etc. to provide a wide and  
stable rear soundstage.  
The PLII/PLIIx and THX indicators light  
on the AV receiver’s display.  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie + THX  
Cinema  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music + THX  
Music  
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
and THX Cinema/Music modes can be  
used.  
The PLIIx and THX indicators light on  
the AV receiver’s display.  
D V  
H
• THX Select2 Games  
For the replay of stereo and  
multichannel game audio, the THX  
Select2 Games mode should be  
selected. In this mode, THX ASA  
processing is applied to the surround  
channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded  
game sources such as analog, PCM,  
DTS, and Dolby Digital. This accurately  
places all game audio surround  
information creating a full 360 degree  
playback environment. THX Select2  
Games is unique as it gives you a  
smooth transition of audio in all points  
of the surround field.  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX  
Cinema  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX  
Music  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height + THX  
Games  
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic IIz  
Height and THX Cinema/Music/Games  
modes can be used.  
S B  
D
F
G
H
The PLIIz and THX indicators light on  
the AV receiver’s display.  
• DTS Neo:6 Cinema + THX Cinema  
DTS Neo:6 Music + THX Music  
S CN  
• Dolby Pro Logic II Game + THX  
Select2 Games  
S V  
• DTS Neo:6 + THX Cinema  
• DTS Neo:6 + THX Music  
• DTS Neo:6 + THX Games  
The combination of DTS Neo:6 and  
THX Cinema/Music/Games modes can  
be used. The Neo:6 and THX  
indicators light on the AV receiver’s  
display.  
D V  
H
The combination of Dolby Pro Logic II  
Game and THX Select2 Games modes  
can be used. The PLII and THX  
indicators light on the AV receiver’s  
display.  
En-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback  
Listening Mode  
Description  
Input  
Source Layout  
Speaker  
• THX Surround EX  
D V  
T H X S u r r E X  
This mode expands 5.1-channel  
sources for 6.1/7.1- channel playback.  
It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital EX  
sources. THX Surround EX, also  
known as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is  
a joint development between Dolby  
Laboratories and THX Ltd.  
H
Note  
*1  
(North American and Taiwanese models) This listening mode is not available.  
Pure Audio cannot be selected when Zone 2/3 is active.  
*2  
Besides, if you activate Zone 2/3 while Pure Audio is selected, the listening mode will  
automatically switch to Direct.  
Based on the audio channel signal contained in the source, the corresponding speakers  
will output the sound.  
The AV receiver can input the DSD signal from HDMI IN. Depending on the player,  
setting the output on the player side to PCM might bring better sound.  
For the Blu-ray Discs, Dolby Digital is used in a 3.1/5.1-channel speaker system.  
DTS is used depending on the configuration of the AV receiver.  
If there are no surround back speakers, DTS is used.  
*3  
*4  
*5  
*6  
*7  
*8  
*9  
If there are no surround back speakers, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
This listening mode can be selected only when all the following conditions are satisfied:  
Center speaker is connected.  
Front high speakers is connected.  
En-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Playback  
be sure to go to the THX Audio Setup screen and  
choose the setting that closely corresponds to the  
back speaker spacing (page 61). This will re-  
optimize the surround sound field.  
ASA is used in four modes: THX Select2 Cinema,  
THX Select2 Music, THX Select2 Games and Dolby  
Pro Logic II + THX Select2 Games.  
Dialogue Normalization  
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the  
THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically  
added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX  
Surround EX).  
Dialogue Normalization (DialogNorm) is a feature of  
Dolby Digital, which is used to keep the programs at  
the same average listening level so the user does not  
have to change the volume control between Dolby  
Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby TrueHD  
Timbre Matching  
The human ear changes our perception of a sound  
depending on the direction from which the sound is  
coming. In a movie theater, there is an array of  
surround speakers so that the surround information is  
all around you. In a home theater, you may only have  
two speakers located to the side of your head. In this  
case, the Timbre Matching feature filters the  
information going to the surround speakers so that  
they more closely match the tonal characteristics of  
the sound coming from the front speakers. This  
ensures seamless panning between the front and  
surround speakers.  
programs. When playing back software which has  
been encoded in Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and  
Dolby TrueHD, sometimes you may see a brief  
message in the front panel display which will read  
DialogNorm: X dB” (X being a numeric value). The  
display is showing how the program level relates with  
THX calibration level. If you want to play the program  
at calibrated theatrical levels, you may wish to adjust  
the volume. For example, if you see the following  
message: “DialogNorm: + 4 dB” in the front panel  
display, to keep the overall output level at THX  
calibrated loudness, just turn down the volume control  
by 4 dB. However, unlike a movie theater where the  
playback loudness is preset, you can choose your  
preferred volume setting for best enjoyment.  
The listening mode may not be selected depending  
on the input signal. The signal input from the  
external AV components can be displayed by the  
function on the next page.  
Adaptive Decorrelation  
In a movie theater, a large number of surround  
speakers help create an enveloping surround sound  
experience. If a home theater only has two sidewall  
surround speakers, the surround speakers may  
sound similar to headphones lacking spaciousness  
and envelopment. Surround sounds will also collapse  
toward the closet speaker as you move away from the  
middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation  
slightly changes one surround channel’s time and  
phase relationship with respect to the other surround  
experience as in a movie theater using only two  
speakers.  
THX Cinema Processing  
THX is an exclusive set of standards and  
technologies established by the world-renowned film  
production company Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from  
George Lucas’ personal desire to make your  
experience of the film soundtrack in both movie  
theaters and in your home theater as faithful as  
possible to what the director intended.  
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special environments  
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played  
back in movie theaters with similar equipment and  
conditions. Most of those soundtracks are remixed  
using flat response loudspeakers similar to those  
used in the small home theater environment before  
being transferred onto Blu-ray Discs, DVD, etc.  
THX engineers developed patented technologies to  
accurately translate the sound from the movie theater  
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and  
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)  
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which  
processes the audio on the two side and two back  
surround speakers for the optional surround sound  
experience. When you set up your home theater  
system using eight speaker outputs (Left, Center,  
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,  
Surround Back Left, Surround Left, and Subwoofer),  
En-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Playback  
Displaying Source Information  
Using the Sleep Timer  
Setting the Display Brightness  
You can display various information about the current  
input source as follows.  
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver to  
turn off automatically after a specified period.  
You can adjust the brightness of the AV receiver’s  
display, and switch the MASTER VOLUME indicator  
off and on in conjunction.  
Press RECEIVER once followed by DISPLAY  
repeatedly to cycle through the available  
information.  
Press RECEIVER once followed by SLEEP  
1
1
repeatedly to select the required sleep time.  
The sleep time can be set from 90 to 10 minutes  
in 10 minute steps.  
Press RECEIVER once followed by DIMMER  
repeatedly to cycle through the following  
patterns:  
1
Tip  
• Normal brightness + indicator off.  
• Dim brightness + indicator off.  
• Dimmer brightness + indicator off.  
• Normal brightness + indicator on (default).  
The SLEEP indicator lights on the AV receiver’s  
display when the sleep timer has been set. The  
specified sleep time appears for about 5  
seconds, then the previous display reappears.  
• Alternatively, you can use DISPLAY on the AV  
receiver.  
The following information can be typically displayed.  
Tip  
Tip  
Input source &  
volume*1  
• If you need to cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP  
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator goes off.  
• To check the time remaining until the AV receiver  
sleeps, press SLEEP. Note that if you press again on  
SLEEP as the time being displayed is 10 minutes or  
less, the sleep timer will go off.  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
Alternatively, you can use DIMMER on the AV  
receiver.  
Listening mode  
Signal format*2  
Sampling  
frequency*2  
Input signal  
resolution  
Output resolution  
*1  
When AM or FM radio is used, the band, preset number,  
and frequency are displayed.  
If the input signal is digital, the signal format is displayed.  
*2  
Information is displayed for about three seconds, then  
the previously displayed information reappears.  
En-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Playback  
Changing the Input Display  
Using the Whole House Mode  
The Whole House Mode is useful when you want to  
add extra background music to your home party; this  
allows you to enjoy the same stereo music as the  
main room in separate rooms (Zone 2/3).  
The Whole House Mode selects the same input  
source for Multi Zone as the main room’s.  
See also:  
When you connect an u-capable Onkyo  
component, you must configure the input display so  
that ucan work properly.  
This setting can be done only from the front panel.  
Press TV/CD or GAME.  
1
TV/CD” or “GAME” appears on the AV receiver’s  
• “2. Speaker Setup” (page 59)  
display.  
• “Multi Zone” (page 74)  
2
3 seconds) to change the input display.  
Repeat this step to select the desired input  
display.  
While holding down ZONE 2, press ZONE 3 on  
1
To cancel the Whole House Mode, change the  
input source for the main room or select a  
listening mode (page 41).  
TV/CD:  
TV/CD DOCK  
TAPE  
Note  
GAME:  
GAME DOCK  
• The Whole House Mode only supports analog audio  
and audio from NET or USB input selector.  
• To adjust the volume of Multi Zone, switch the AV  
receiver to Multi Zone control. See “Adjusting the  
Volume for Zone 2” (page 75) for the volume  
adjustment of Multi Zone.  
Note  
• “DOCK” can be selected for the “TV/CD” or “GAME”  
input selector, but not at the same time.  
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using  
the remote controller for the first time (page 77).  
• The Whole House Mode is not available in either of the  
following cases:  
The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”  
(page 70) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set  
to “On” (page 71) and you’re listening through  
your TV speakers.  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 69) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
–a pair of headphones is connected.  
Muting the AV Receiver  
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV  
receiver.  
Press RECEIVER followed by MUTING.  
The output is muted and the MUTING indicator  
1
flashes on the AV receiver’s display.  
Tip  
• To unmute, press MUTING again or adjust the volume.  
• Muting is automatically cancelled when the AV  
receiver is set to standby.  
En-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Playback  
a short while after the AV receiver is turned on.  
components connected through HDMI, you can  
easily switch between inputs as their previews are  
displayed on a single screen.  
Using the Home Menu  
Please wait until it becomes operable.  
Press ENTER to display the network service  
screen. If you want to use the Internet radio  
services, use q/w/e/rto select the desired  
service. Pressing ENTER again switches to that  
selection. If you want to play music files on a  
computer or media server, use q/w/e/rto  
select “DLNA” and then press ENTER. If you  
want to play music files on a computer or NAS  
(Network Attached Storage), use q/w/e/rto  
select “Home Media” and then press ENTER.  
The Home menu provides quick access to frequently  
used menus.  
Press ENTER to display the main preview  
(currently selected HDMI input) and the  
additional previews (other HDMI inputs). Using  
q/wor e/rto select a preview thumbnail and  
pressing ENTER will switch the AV receiver to  
that input source.  
Tip  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
The Home menu will be superimposed on the TV  
screen.  
1
Tip  
• If no video signals are present, the thumbnails will be  
filled in black.  
• You can specify the number of preview thumbnails as  
well as their positioning on screen (page 71).  
Tip  
USB  
• Alternatively, you can use HOME on the AV receiver.  
`With this selection, you can play contents of  
portable players and USB storage devices  
connected to the AV receiver’s USB port  
(page 32). Note that this selection will be  
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver  
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes  
operable.  
Note  
• This function cannot be selected when:  
HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or  
No signal is present on the current input source.  
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be  
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of  
InstaPrevue.  
Press ENTER to select a drive or browse the  
contents of the media connected, followed by  
q/wto select the desired folder or track.  
Pressing ENTER as a track is selected will start  
playback.  
Use e/ror q/wand ENTER to make the  
Firmware Update  
2
desired selection.  
Press HOME to close the menu.  
`With this selection, you can update the firmware  
of the AV receiver. Note that this selection will be  
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver  
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes  
operable.  
Setup  
`With this selection, you can access the common  
settings of the on-screen Setup menu.  
Press ENTER to display the Setup menu  
(page 56).  
Press ENTER to start the procedure  
(page 90).  
Network Service  
Tip  
You need to connect the AV receiver to your home  
network (pages 16, 27).  
• You can also access frequently used settings from Quick  
Setup (page 52).  
`With this selection, you can use various Internet  
radio services or play the contents stored in media  
connected to your home network (pages 32 to  
36). Note that this selection will be grayed out for  
InstaPrevue  
`With this selection, you can preview audio/video  
streams coming from HDMI inputs (HDMI  
IN 1/2/3/4/AUX INPUT). Even with multiple  
En-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
In addition, previews of the video streams coming  
Using the Quick Setup  
from HDMI inputs (HDMI IN 1/2/3/4/AUX INPUT)  
*2  
are displayed.  
Use q/wto select an input source and view the  
related information. Pressing ENTER switches to  
the selected input source.  
Advanced Operations  
On-screen Setup  
RECEIVER  
Audio (page 53)  
`You can change the following settings: “Bass”,  
Treble”, “Phase Matching Bass”, “Subwoofer  
Level”, “Center Level”, “Audyssey”,  
ENTER,  
*3  
*3  
Dynamic EQ ”, “Dynamic Volume ”, “Late  
Night”, “Music Optimizer”, “Re-EQ” and “Re-  
EQ(THX)”.  
q/w/e/r  
Q SETUP  
RETURN  
*4  
This section describes the procedure for using the  
remote controller unless otherwise specified.  
`You can change the following settings: “Wide  
*5  
Mode” and “Picture Mode ”.  
Press RECEIVER followed by Q SETUP.  
The Quick Setup will be superimposed on the TV  
screen.  
1
2
With the AV receiver connected to a TV, there are two  
ways of changing the settings on-screen: using the  
Quick Setup or the Setup Menu (HOME).  
See also:  
• “Picture Adjust” (page 66)  
*6  
Information  
Quick Setup  
`You can view the information of the following  
items: “Audio”, “Video” and “Tuner”.  
The Quick Setup provides quick access to frequently  
used settings. You can change settings and view the  
current information.  
B D / DV D  
I n p u t  
A u d i o  
V i d e o  
I n f o r m a t i o n  
L i s t e n i n g M o d e  
*7  
Listening Mode  
`You can select the listening modes that are  
grouped in the following categories: “MOVIE/TV”,  
MUSIC”, “GAME”, and “THX”.  
Setup menu (HOME)  
The Setup menu (HOME) provides a convenient way  
to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings  
are organized into 9 categories.  
Use q/wto select the category and e/rto  
select the listening mode. Press ENTER to  
switch to the selected listening mode.  
Use q/wand ENTER to make the desired  
selection.  
Tip  
Press Q SETUP to close the menu.  
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.  
Note  
• The on-screen menus appear only on a TV that is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
*1  
BLUETOOTH” cannot be selected, if you’ve selected  
NET or USB as input selector in Multi Zone.  
• The video preview is not displayed when:  
HDMI IN 5/6/7 is the current HDMI input source, or  
– No signal is present on the current input source.  
• The video of the currently-selected input is displayed on  
the main screen, not on a preview thumbnail.  
*1  
Input  
*2  
`You can select input sources and view the  
following information: the name of input selectors,  
input assignments, the name of the device paired  
with the AV receiver via Bluetooth, radio  
information, and ARC function setting.  
En-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced Operations  
*3  
*4  
*5  
Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be  
selected when any of the THX listening modes is  
selected, with “Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve  
THX Settings” set to “Yes” (page 62).  
• When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, “Video”  
cannot be selected (page 57).  
Phase Matching Bass  
Using the Audio Settings of Quick  
Setup  
Phase Matching Bass  
`Off  
`On  
You can change various audio settings from the  
Quick Setup (page 52).  
• This setting cannot be used with the NET, USB and  
BLUETOOTH input selectors.  
From the warm low notes produced by a cello to the  
deep frequencies of electronic music, a good audio  
system should be able to deliver plenty of bass  
resonance.  
While traditional enhancement systems effectively  
boost low-frequency sound, they are often prone to  
the effects of phase shifting, which can overwhelm  
mid-range frequencies and muddy the sound. Our  
Phase-Matching Bass Boost technology effectively  
preserves mid-range clarity-allowing vocals and  
strings to shine-while maintaining a smooth, powerful  
bass response at all volume levels.  
Note  
• These settings are not available in either of the following  
cases:  
The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”  
(page 70) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to  
On” (page 71) and you’re listening through your TV  
speakers.  
Only when you have selected “Custom” in the “Picture  
Mode” (page 66), pressing ENTER allows you to  
adjust the following items via the Quick Setup:  
Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Hue” and “Saturation”. Press  
RETURN to return to the “Picture Mode” setting.  
Depending on the input source and listening mode, not  
all channels shown here output the sound.  
• This setting is not available in either of the following  
cases:  
– The Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”  
(page 70) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to  
On” (page 71) and you’re listening through your TV  
speakers.  
*6  
*7  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 69) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
Tone Control  
Bass  
Note  
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.  
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds  
output from the front speakers.  
– “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 69) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
• The Phase Matching Bass is disabled when the Direct,  
Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian models), or  
THX listening mode is selected.  
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting is fixed  
to “Off”.  
Explanatory Notes  
Treble  
`–10dB to 0dB to +10dB in 2 dB steps.  
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds  
output from the front speakers.  
Phase Matching Bass  
a
b
`Off  
Operating on the AV receiver  
`On  
You can adjust the bass and treble for the front  
speakers, except when the Direct, Pure Audio  
(European, Australian and Asian models) or THX  
listening mode is selected.  
Press TONE repeatedly to select “PM Bass”.  
1
2
aSetting target  
bSetting options (default setting underlined)  
Use – and + to change the setting.  
Operating on the AV receiver  
Press TONE repeatedly to select either “Bass”  
or “Treble”.  
1
Use – and + to adjust.  
2
Operating  
procedure  
(page 52)  
En-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Advanced Operations  
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.  
• “Dynamic EQ” and “Dynamic Volume” cannot be selected  
when any of the THX listening modes is selected, with  
Loudness Plus” set to “On” or “Preserve THX Settings”  
set to “Yes” (page 62).  
• With Dolby TrueHD sources, the Late Night function cannot  
be used when “TrueHD Loudness Management” is set to  
Off”.  
Speaker Levels  
Subwoofer Level  
`–15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.  
Music Optimizer  
Center Level  
Late Night  
Music Optimizer  
`Off  
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.  
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while  
listening to an input source.  
Late Night  
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources,  
These temporary adjustments are cancelled when the  
AV receiver is set to standby. To save the setting you  
made here, go to “Level Calibration” (page 61)  
before setting the AV receiver to standby.  
The Music Optimizer function enhances the sound  
quality of compressed music files. When set to “On”,  
the M.Opt indicator lights on the AV receiver’s  
display.  
the options are:  
`Off  
`Low:  
Small reduction in dynamic range.  
`High:  
Note  
Tip  
• You cannot use these function while the AV receiver is  
muted.  
(North American and Taiwanese models) Alternatively,  
you can use MUSIC OPTIMIZER on the AV receiver.  
Large reduction in dynamic range.  
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones  
is connected.  
• Speakers that are set to “No” or “None” in  
“Speaker Configuration” (page 59) cannot be adjusted.  
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options are:  
`Auto:  
Note  
• The Music Optimizer function only works with PCM digital  
audio input signals with a sampling rate below 48 kHz and  
analog audio input signals.  
The Late Night function is set to “On” or “Off”  
automatically.  
When NET or USB input selector is selected, this function  
even works with digital audio input signals with a sampling  
rate below 48 kHz (except DSD signals and Dolby TrueHD  
signals) regardless of the PCM digital audio input signals  
with a sampling rate below 48 kHz.  
• The Music Optimizer is disabled when the Direct or Pure  
Audio (European, Australian and Asian models)  
listening mode is selected.  
`Off  
`On  
®
Audyssey  
Turn this setting on to reduce the dynamic range of  
Dolby Digital material so that you can still hear quiet  
parts even when listening at low volume levels—ideal  
for watching movies late at night when you don’t want  
to disturb anyone.  
Audyssey  
See “Audyssey” in “4. Source Setup” (page 64).  
Dynamic EQ  
See “Dynamic EQ” in “4. Source Setup” (page 64).  
• The setting is stored individually for each input selector.  
Note  
Dynamic Volume  
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the  
material that you are playing and the intention of the original  
sound designer, and with some material there will be little  
or no effect when you select the different options.  
• The Late Night function can be used only when the input  
source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or Dolby  
TrueHD.  
• The Late Night function is set to “Off” when the AV receiver  
is set to standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources, it will be set  
to “Auto”.  
See “Dynamic Volume” in “4. Source Setup”  
(page 64).  
Note  
• These technologies can be used when all the following  
conditions are met:  
Room Correction and Speaker Setup is completed. Note  
that “Audyssey” requires the “Audyssey MultEQ Full  
Calibration” method.  
Any listening mode other than Direct or Pure Audio  
(European, Australian and Asian models) is selected.  
–A pair of headphones is not connected.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 52)  
En-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
Re-EQ (Re-Equalization)  
Movie soundtracks were designed for playback in  
large movie theaters using professional equipment. If  
the movies were not remixed for the home theater,  
the tonal balance of the soundtracks can be  
excessively bright and harsh when played back over  
home audio equipment. In those instances, Re-  
Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for  
listening to a movie soundtrack in a smaller home  
environment.  
Re-EQ  
`Off  
`On  
This function can be used with the following listening  
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby  
TrueHD, Multichannel, DTS, DTS-HD High  
Resolution Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS  
Express, DSD, Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIz Height,  
Dolby PLIIx Movie, DTS Neo:6 Cinema and 5.1-  
channel source + Neo:6.  
Re-EQ(THX)  
`Off  
`On  
This function can be used with the following listening  
modes: THX Cinema, THX Surround EX, and  
THX Select2 Cinema.  
Note  
• These settings cannot be used while a pair of headphones  
is connected.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 52)  
En-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Operations  
Main menu item  
Sub menu item  
Using the Setup Menu (HOME)  
Setup Menu Items  
6. Miscellaneous  
(page 69)  
Volume Setup  
OSD Setup  
Tuner  
Main menu item  
Sub menu item  
Monitor Out  
Remote  
indicator  
7. Hardware Setup  
(page 69)  
1. Input/Output Assign  
(page 57)  
HDMI  
HDMI Input  
Auto Standby  
Network  
Component Video Input  
Digital Audio Input  
Speaker Settings  
Speaker Configuration  
Speaker Distance  
Level Calibration  
Equalizer Settings  
THX Audio Setup  
Multiplex/Mono  
Dolby  
RECEIVER  
Initial Setup  
Remote ID  
Remote Mode Setup  
2. Speaker Setup  
(page 59)  
8. Remote Controller  
Setup  
(page 73)  
ENTER,  
q/w/e/r  
9. Lock Setup  
(page 73)  
Setup  
RETURN  
3. Audio Adjust  
(page 62)  
HOME  
DTS  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
1
2
Audyssey DSX  
Theater-Dimensional  
LFE Level  
press ENTER.  
4. Source Setup  
(page 64)  
Audyssey  
Use q/wto select a main menu item, and then  
3
4
5
IntelliVolume  
press ENTER.  
A/V Sync  
Use q/wto select a sub menu item, and then  
Name Edit  
press ENTER.  
Picture Adjust  
Audio Selector  
Use q/wto select a setting target, and use e/r  
to change the setting.  
5. Listening Mode Preset BD/DVD  
Press HOME to close the menu.  
(page 68)  
CBL/SAT  
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu.  
STB/DVR  
GAME  
PC  
Note  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV receiver  
by using HOME, the cursor buttons, and ENTER.  
• During Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup, messages, etc., that are displayed on the TV screen  
will appear on the AV receiver’s display.  
AUX  
TUNER  
TV/CD  
PHONO  
NET  
USB  
BLUETOOTH  
En-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
Explanatory Notes  
Note  
1. Input/Output Assign  
Monitor Out  
• The “HDMI Through” setting is only available for the HDMI  
OUT MAIN jack (page 70).  
2. Speaker Setup  
a
b
Resolution  
`Through:  
Select this to pass video through the AV receiver  
at the same resolution and with no conversion.  
`Auto:  
On the “Monitor Out” settings, you can select  
whether or not to have the video sources’ images  
output through the HDMI output.  
If you connect your TV to HDMI output, “Monitor Out”  
setting is automatically set and composite video and  
Speaker Configuration  
Subwoofer  
`Yes  
c
d
`No  
*
Select this to have the AV receiver automatically  
convert video at resolutions supported by your  
TV.  
component video sources are upconverted and  
output.  
aMain Menu  
bSub Menu  
Composite video,  
component video  
*1  
`480p (480p/576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p :  
Select the desired output resolution.  
`4K:  
cSetting target  
HDMI  
HDMI  
dSetting options (default setting underlined)  
IN  
Select this for an output resolution four times  
that of 1080p. Depending on the resolution  
supported by your TV, it will result in either 3840  
× 2160 or 4096 × 2160 pixels.  
OUT  
Composite video,  
component video  
You can specify the output resolution for HDMI OUT  
MAIN and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture  
resolution as necessary to match the resolution  
supported by your TV.  
Note  
• See “The video and audio signal flow” (page 17) for  
charts showing how the “Monitor Out” and “Resolution”  
settings affect the video signal flow through the AV  
receiver.  
Sub Menu  
Main Menu  
Tip  
• You can see the picture by pressing ENTER to check the  
Resolution” setting for HDMI OUT MAIN (excluding NET,  
USB and BLUETOOTH input source).  
Monitor Out  
`Main:  
Note  
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT  
• With some TVs, video signals are processed in the same  
way as “Through” when this setting is set to “4K”.  
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Sub”, this setting is  
fixed to “Through”.  
• If the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, this setting is  
fixed to “Auto”.  
MAIN.  
`Sub:  
Select this if your TV is connected to HDMI OUT  
SUB.  
`Both:  
• For optimum video performance, THX recommends using  
the HDMI output and setting the video resolution to  
Through”.  
Select this if your TVs are connected to HDMI  
OUT MAIN and HDMI OUT SUB. Video signals  
are output from both HDMI outputs at the  
resolution supported by both TVs.  
*1  
When signal is 1080p input at 24 frames per second, it  
will be 1080p output at 24 frames per second.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Advanced Operations  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, TV/CD,  
PHONO  
`HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3, HDMI4, HDMI5, HDMI6,  
HDMI7:  
Select the input to which the component has  
been connected.  
`- - - - -:  
Output composite video and component video  
sources from the HDMI output. The video output  
signal from the HDMI output is the one  
configured in “Component Video Input”.  
Each HDMI input cannot be assigned to two input  
selectors or more. When HDMI1 - HDMI7 have  
already been assigned, you must first set any  
unused input selectors to “- - - - -” or you will be  
unable to assign HDMI1 - HDMI7 to other input  
selectors.  
HDMI Input  
Component Video Input  
If you connect a video component to an HDMI input,  
you must assign that input to an input selector. For  
example, if you connect your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player  
to HDMI IN 2, you must assign “HDMI2” to the  
BD/DVD” input selector.  
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with  
an HDMI cable, composite video and component  
video sources can be upconverted and output by the  
HDMI output. You can set this for each input selector  
by selecting the “- - - - -” option. See “The video and  
audio signal flow” for more information on video  
signal flow and upconversion (page 17).  
If you connect a video component to a component  
video input, you must assign that input to an input  
selector. For example, if you connect your Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD player to COMPONENT VIDEO IN, you  
must assign “IN1” to the “BD/DVD” input selector.  
Here are the default assignments.  
Input selector  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
STB/DVR  
GAME  
Default assignment  
- - - - -  
*
IN1  
- - - - -  
- - - - -  
PC  
- - - - -  
Composite video,  
component video  
AUX  
- - - - - (Fixed)  
- - - - -  
HDMI  
HDMI  
TV/CD  
IN  
PHONO  
- - - - -  
Note  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, TV/CD,  
PHONO  
`IN1:  
Select the input to which the component has  
been connected.  
`- - - - -:  
• If no video component is connected to the HDMI input (even  
if the HDMI input is assigned), the AV receiver selects the  
video source based on the setting of “Component Video  
Input”.  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as  
explained here, the same HDMI IN will be set as a priority  
in the “Digital Audio Input”. In this case, if you want to use  
the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate  
selection in the “Audio Selector” setting (page 67).  
• Do not assign an HDMI IN to the TV/CD selector while  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 69), otherwise  
appropriate CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) operation  
will not be guaranteed.  
• If you assign “- - - - -” to an input selector that is currently  
selected in “HDMI Through” (page 70), the “HDMI  
Through” setting will be automatically switched to “Off”.  
• “AUX” is used only for input from the front panel.  
• In order for the AV receiver to upconvert component input  
to HDMI output, the source output must be set to 480i/576i.  
When signal is input at resolution of 480p/576p and more,  
error message will be displayed.  
OUT  
Composite video,  
component video  
Here are the default assignments.  
Output composite video sources from the HDMI  
output.  
Input selector  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
STB/DVR  
GAME  
Default assignment  
HDMI1  
HDMI2  
Note  
HDMI3  
• When composite video and component video sources are  
upconverted for HDMI OUT SUB, only signals with a  
resolution of 480i/576i are output and the resolution  
remains the same. If your TV doesn’t support this  
resolution, there will be no picture (page 89).  
• “AUX” is fixed to the “- - - - -” option.  
HDMI4  
PC  
HDMI5  
AUX  
Front/MHL (Fixed)  
- - - - -  
TV/CD  
PHONO  
- - - - -  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Operations  
Speakers Type (Front)  
`Normal:  
Select this if you’ve connected your front  
speakers normally.  
`Bi-Amp:  
Digital Audio Input  
2. Speaker Setup  
If you connect a component to a digital audio input,  
you must assign that input to an input selector. For  
example, if you connect your CD player to the  
COAXIAL IN 1, you must assign “COAXIAL1” to the  
TV/CD” input selector.  
Here you can check the settings made by  
®
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup function, or set them manually, which is useful  
if you change one of the connected speakers after  
using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup function (page 24).  
Select this if you’ve bi-amped your front  
speakers.  
Here are the default assignments.  
Powered Zone 2  
`No  
`Yes:  
Input selector  
BD/DVD  
CBL/SAT  
STB/DVR  
GAME  
Default assignment  
COAXIAL1  
COAXIAL2  
- - - - -  
Note  
• These settings are not available in either of the following  
cases:  
–a pair of headphones is connected.  
The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”  
(page 70) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to  
On” (page 71) and you’re listening through your TV  
speakers.  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 69) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
Zone 2 speakers can be used (Powered Zone 2  
enabled).  
- - - - -  
Note  
PC  
- - - - -  
If the “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to “Bi-Amp”,  
Powered Zone 2 cannot be used.  
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and  
Zone 2 is turned on, the surround back and front high  
speakers cannot be used.  
AUX  
- - - - - (Fixed)  
OPTICAL  
- - - - -  
TV/CD  
PHONO  
Speaker Settings  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, TV/CD,  
PHONO  
`COAXIAL1, COAXIAL2, OPTICAL:  
Select the input to which the component has  
been connected.  
Speaker Configuration  
If you change these settings, you must run  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup again (page 24).  
This setting is set automatically by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup function (page 24).  
`- - - - -:  
If you bi-amp the front speakers, you must change the  
Speakers Type (Front)” setting. For details on  
speaker wire connection, see “Bi-amping the Front  
Speakers” (page 14).  
Select if the component is connected to an  
analog audio input.  
With these settings, you can specify which speakers  
are connected and a crossover frequency for each  
speaker. Specify “Full Band” for speakers that can  
output low frequency bass sounds adequately, for  
example, speakers with a good sized woofer. For  
smaller speakers, specify a crossover frequency.  
Sounds below the crossover frequency will be output  
by the subwoofer instead of the speaker. Refer to  
your speaker’s manuals to determine the optimum  
crossover frequencies. If you set up your speakers  
using Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and  
Speaker Setup, please make sure manually that any  
THX speakers are set to “80Hz(THX)” crossover.  
Note  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in  
HDMI Input” (page 58), the same HDMI IN will be set  
as a priority in this assignment. In this case, if you want to  
use the coaxial or optical audio input, make the appropriate  
selection in the “Audio Selector” (page 67).  
• Supported sampling rates for PCM signals (stereo/mono)  
from a digital input (optical and coaxial) are  
Note  
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to drive up  
to 5.1 speakers in the main room.  
• Before you change these settings, turn down the volume.  
Speaker Impedance  
`4ohms:  
Select if the impedance of any speaker is  
4 ohms or more but less than 6.  
`6ohms:  
32/44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz/16, 20, 24 bit.  
• “AUX” is fixed to the “- - - - -” option.  
Select if the impedances of all speakers are  
between 6 and 16 ohms.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Advanced Operations  
*5  
If anything else than “None” is selected in “Surround  
Back”, this setting is automatically set to “None”.  
Subwoofer  
`Yes  
Note  
• When the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No” or the “Front”  
setting to anything other than “Full Band”, this setting is  
fixed to “- - -”.  
• This setting is set to “On” automatically when the  
Subwoofer” and “Front” settings are set for the first time  
to “Yes” and “Full Band” respectively.  
`No  
Surround Back Ch  
`1ch:  
Select if only one surround back speaker L is  
connected.  
`2ch:  
Front  
`Full Band  
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,  
200Hz  
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “Off(THX)”.  
Select if two (left and right) surround back  
speakers are connected.  
Note  
Speaker Distance  
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, the “Front” setting  
is fixed at “Full Band”.  
Note  
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”, this setting  
cannot be selected.  
*1  
*1  
This setting is set automatically by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup function (page 24).  
Center , Surround  
`Full Band  
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,  
200Hz  
LPF of LFE  
(Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel)  
`80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz  
`Off:  
Low-Pass Filter is not applied.  
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff  
frequency of the LFE channel’s low-pass filter  
(LPF), which can be used to filter out unwanted  
hum. The LPF only applies to sources that use the  
LFE channel.  
Here you can specify the distance from each speaker  
to the listening position so that the sound from each  
speaker arrives at the listener’s ears as the sound  
designer intended.  
`None  
*1*2*3*5  
Front High  
`Full Band  
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,  
200Hz  
Unit  
`feet:  
`None  
Distances can be set in feet. Range: 1.0ft to  
30.0ft in 1.0 foot steps.  
`meters:  
Distances can be set in meters. Range: 0.30m  
to 9.00m in 0.30 meter steps.  
(The default setting varies from country to country.)  
*1*2*3*4  
Surround Back  
`Full Band  
`40Hz to 80Hz(THX) to 100Hz, 120Hz, 150Hz,  
200Hz  
Note  
• If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select “80Hz”.  
Double Bass  
`None  
Left, Front High Left, Center, Front High Right,  
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,  
Surround Back Left, Surround Left, Subwoofer  
`Specify the distance from each speaker to your  
listening position.  
Note  
This setting is NOT set automatically by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup function (page 24).  
®
*1  
Full Band” can be selected only when “Full Band” is  
selected in the “Front” setting.  
If the “Surround” setting is set to “None”, this setting  
*2  
cannot be selected.  
If the “Speakers Type (Front)” setting is set to  
`On  
*3  
Note  
Bi-Amp”, or the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to  
Yes” together with Zone 2 turned on, this setting cannot  
be selected.  
Turn this setting on to boost bass output by feeding  
bass sounds from the front left, right, and center  
channels to the subwoofer. Default setting: “- - - -”  
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in  
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (page 59).  
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and  
Zone 2 is turned on, the surround back and front high  
speakers cannot be used.  
*4  
If anything else than “None” is selected in “Front High”,  
this setting is automatically set to “None”.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                           
Advanced Operations  
Level Calibration  
Equalizer Settings  
THX Audio Setup  
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of  
speakers individually with a 5-band equalizer. The  
volume of each speaker can be set.  
Surr Back Speaker Spacing  
`<1ft (<0.3m)  
`1ft-4ft (0.3m-1.2m)  
`>4ft (>1.2m)  
You can specify the distance between your surround  
back speakers.  
This setting is set automatically by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup function (page 24).  
®
Manual Equalizer  
`On:  
Here you can adjust the level of each speaker with  
the built-in test tone so that the volume of each  
speaker is the same at the listening position.  
You can adjust the equalizer for each speaker  
manually. Continue with the following procedure:  
Note  
Press wto select “Channel”, and then use  
• Cannot be set if:  
*1  
1
Left, Front High Left, Center , Front High Right,  
Surround Back” is set to “None” (page 60).  
Surround Back Ch” is set to “1ch” (page 60).  
Powered Zone 2” is set to “Yes” (page 59) and  
Zone 2 turned on (page 75).  
e/rto select a speaker.  
Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right,  
Surround Back Left, Surround Left  
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.  
Use q/wto select a frequency, and then use  
2
the e/rto adjust the level at that frequency.  
The volume at each frequency can be adjusted  
from –6dB to 0dB to +6dB in 1 dB steps.  
*1  
Subwoofer  
THX Ultra2/Select2 Subwoofer  
`No  
`Yes  
`–15dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps.  
Tip  
Note  
• You can select: “63Hz”, “250Hz”, “1kHz”, “4kHz”, or  
16kHz”. And for the subwoofer, “25Hz”, “40Hz”,  
63Hz”, “100Hz”, or “160Hz”.  
• Low frequencies (e.g., 63 Hz) affect bass sounds; high  
frequencies (e.g., 16 kHz) affect treble sounds.  
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set this  
setting to “Yes”.  
• These settings cannot be calibrated when the AV receiver  
is muted.  
• Speakers that you set to “No” or “None” in  
“Speaker Configuration” cannot be selected (page 59).  
• When the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and  
Zone 2 is turned on, the surround back and front high  
speakers cannot be used.  
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX, which  
is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you normally listen  
at volume settings below this, be careful because the test  
tone will be much louder.  
Note  
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot  
be selected (page 60).  
Use qto select “Channel”, and then use e/r  
3
to select another speaker.  
BGC  
`Off  
`On  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each speaker.  
You cannot select speakers that you set to “No”  
or “None” in the “Speaker Configuration”  
(page 59).  
If your listening room layout (for practical or aesthetic  
reasons) locates most of the listeners close to the  
rear wall, the resulting bass level can be sufficiently  
reinforced by the boundary that the overall sound  
becomes “boomy”. THX Select2 Plus receivers  
contain a Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC)  
feature to improve bass balance.  
*1  
For the center speaker and subwoofer, the level settings  
(page 54).  
`Off:  
Tone off, response flat.  
Tip  
• If you’re using a handheld sound level meter, adjust the  
level of each speaker so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the  
listening position, measured with C-weighting and slow  
reading.  
Note  
• When the Direct or Pure Audio (European, Australian,  
and Asian models) listening mode is selected, the  
equalizer settings have no effect.  
• If “Audyssey” is enabled, it prevails over this setting  
(page 64).  
Note  
• This setting is only available if “THX Ultra2/Select2  
Subwoofer” is set to “Yes”.  
• If the “Subwoofer” setting is set to “No”, this setting cannot  
be selected (page 60).  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Advanced Operations  
Loudness Plus  
`Off  
Dolby  
3. Audio Adjust  
PL IIx Music (2ch Input)  
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo  
sources.  
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these  
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro  
`On  
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can  
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.  
When the “Loudness Plus” setting is set to “On”, it is  
possible to enjoy even subtle nuances of audio  
expression at low volume. This is only available when  
the THX listening mode is selected.  
Multiplex/Mono  
Multiplex  
Preserve THX Settings  
`Yes  
`No  
If this setting is set to “Yes”, Dynamic EQ and  
Dynamic Volume have no effect in THX listening  
mode.  
Input Channel  
`Main  
`Sub  
`Main/Sub  
This setting determines which channel of a stereo  
multiplex source is output. Use it to select audio  
channels or languages with multiplex sources,  
multilingual TV broadcasts, and so on.  
Panorama  
`On  
`Off  
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the  
front stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
Music listening mode.  
Note  
Dimension  
`–3 to 0 to +3  
• This setting is fixed at “Yes” if “Loudness Plus” is set to  
On”.  
With this setting, you can move the sound field  
forward or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic  
IIx Music listening mode. Higher settings move the  
sound field backward. Lower settings move it forward.  
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much  
surround sound, move the sound field forward to  
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image  
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround  
sound, move it backward.  
Mono  
Input Channel  
`Left + Right  
`Left  
`Right  
This setting specifies the channel to be used for  
playing any 2-channel digital source such as Dolby  
Digital, or 2-channel analog/PCM source in the Mono  
listening mode.  
THX Loudness Plus  
THX Loudness Plus is a new volume control  
technology featured in THX Ultra2 Plus™ and THX  
Select2 Plus™ Certified receivers. With THX  
Loudness Plus, home theater audiences can now  
experience the rich details in a surround mix at any  
volume level. A consequence of turning the volume  
below Reference Level is that certain sound elements  
can be lost or perceived differently by the listener.  
THX Loudness Plus compensates for the tonal and  
spatial shifts that occur when the volume is reduced  
by intelligently adjusting ambient surround channel  
levels and frequency response. This enables users  
experience the true impact of soundtracks regardless  
of the volume setting. THX Loudness Plus is  
automatically applied when listening in any THX  
listening mode. The new THX Cinema, THX Music,  
and THX Games modes are tailored to apply the  
proper THX Loudness Plus settings for each type of  
content.  
Center Width  
`0 to 3 to 7  
Output Speaker  
`Center:  
Mono audio is output by the center speaker.  
`Left / Right:  
Mono audio is output by the front left and right  
speakers.  
This setting determines which speakers output mono  
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.  
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the  
sound from the center speaker when using the Dolby  
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re  
using a center speaker, the center channel sound is  
output from only the center speaker. (If you’re not  
using a center speaker, the center channel sound will  
be distributed to the front left and right speakers to  
create a phantom center.) This setting controls the  
front left, right, and center mix, allowing you to adjust  
the weight of the center channel sound.  
Note  
• If the “Center” setting is set to “None” (page 60), this  
setting cannot be selected.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Operations  
PL IIz Height Gain  
TrueHD Loudness Management  
Theater-Dimensional  
`Low  
`Off  
Listening Angle  
`Mid  
`On  
`Wide:  
`High  
This setting specifies whether or not to apply the Late  
Night processing on a Dolby TrueHD source.  
Select if the listening angle is greater than 30  
degrees.  
`Narrow:  
The Height Gain Control in Dolby Pro Logic IIz  
enables the listener to select how much gain is  
applied to the front high speakers. There are three  
settings, “Low”, “Mid” and “High”, and the front high  
speakers are accentuated in that order. While “Mid” is  
the default listening setting, the listener may adjust  
the Height Gain Control to their personal preference.  
Note  
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Late Night function for  
Dolby TrueHD sources is automatically fixed to “Off”.  
• When this setting is set to “Off”, the Dialogue Normalization  
information is not available for Dolby TrueHD sources.  
Select if the listening angle is less than 30  
degrees.  
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-  
Dimensional listening mode by specifying the angle of  
the front left and right speakers relative to the  
listening position. Ideally, the front left and right  
speakers should be equidistant from the listening  
position and at an angle close to one of the two  
available settings.  
DTS  
Note  
• If the “Front High” settings is set to “None” (page 60),  
this setting cannot be selected.  
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2  
is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.  
Neo:6 Music  
Center Image  
`0 to 2 to 5  
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-  
channel surround sound from 2-channel stereo  
sources. With this setting, you can specify by how  
much the front left and right channel output is  
attenuated in order to create the center channel.  
Changing the value from “0” to “5” will spread the  
sound of the center channel to left and right  
(outwards).  
Dolby EX  
`Auto:  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
If the source signal contains a Dolby EX flag, the  
Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening mode is  
used.  
Listening angle: 30°  
`Manual:  
You can select any available listening mode.  
This setting determines how Dolby EX encoded  
signals are handled. This setting is unavailable if no  
surround back speakers are connected. This setting  
is effective with Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and  
Dolby TrueHD only.  
Note  
• For best results, we recommend setting “Narrow” to 20°  
and “Wide” to 40°.  
®
Audyssey DSX  
LFE Level  
Soundstage  
`–3dB to Reference to +3dB  
With this setting, you can adjust the sound stage when  
using Audyssey DSX.  
Note  
*1  
*2  
Dolby Digital , DTS , Multich PCM, Dolby  
*3  
• If the “Surround Back” setting is set to “None”  
(page 60), this setting cannot be selected.  
• If the “Powered Zone 2” setting is set to “Yes” and Zone 2  
is turned on, this setting cannot be selected.  
• If the “Front High” setting is enabled (page 60), this  
setting is fixed to “Manual”.  
TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio, DSD  
`QdB, –20dB, –10dB, or 0dB  
Note  
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE  
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for each  
input sources.  
• This listening mode can be selected only when all the  
following conditions are satisfied:  
The center speaker is connected.  
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud  
when using one of these sources, change the setting  
to –20 dB or –QdB.  
The front high speakers are connected.  
Powered Zone 2 is not in use.  
*1  
Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus sources  
Operating  
procedure  
En-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(page 56)  
     
Advanced Operations  
*2  
*3  
DTS and DTS-HD High Resolution sources  
DSD (Super Audio CD) sources  
Dynamic EQ  
`Off  
`On:  
at reference level when the master volume control is  
set to the 0 dB position. At that level you can hear the  
mix as the mixers heard it.  
®
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard  
film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the  
reference response and surround envelopment when  
the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film  
reference level is not always used in music or other  
non-film content. Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference  
Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level  
reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be  
selected when the mix level of the content is not  
within the standard.  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ becomes active.  
The Dynamic EQ indicator will light.  
4. Source Setup  
Items can be set individually for each input selector.  
Press the input selector buttons to select an input  
source.  
With Audyssey Dynamic EQ, you can enjoy great  
sound even when listening at low volume levels.  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of  
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by  
taking into account human perception and room  
acoustics. It does so by selecting the correct  
frequency response and surround volume levels  
moment-by-moment so that the content sounds the  
way it was created at any volume level — not just at  
reference level.  
®
Audyssey  
The tone for each speaker is set automatically by  
Audyssey MultEQ Room Correction and Speaker  
Setup. To enable the following settings, you must first  
perform the Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
(page 24).  
®
Note  
• If “Dynamic EQ” setting is set to “Off”, this technology  
cannot be used.  
• These technologies cannot be used when a pair of  
headphones is connected.  
Reference Level  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset  
Dynamic Volume  
`0dB:  
`Off  
`Light:  
Audyssey  
`Off  
`Movie:  
Select this setting for movie material.  
The Audyssey indicator will light.  
`Music:  
This should be selected for movie contents.  
`5dB:  
Select this setting for content that has a very  
wide dynamic range, such as classical music.  
`10dB:  
Select this setting for jazz or other music that  
has a wider dynamic range. This setting should  
also be selected for TV content as that is usually  
mixed at 10 dB below film reference.  
`15dB:  
Activates Light Compression Mode.  
`Medium:  
Activates Medium Compression Mode.  
`Heavy:  
Activates Heavy Compression Mode. This  
setting affects volume the most. It quiets the  
loud parts, such as explosions, and boosts the  
quiet parts so they can be heard.  
Select this setting for music material.  
The Audyssey indicator will light.  
Note  
• When “Audyssey Quick Start” has been used for  
measurement, “Audyssey” cannot be selected.  
• Audyssey equalizing does not work with DSD sources.  
Note  
Select this setting for pop/rock music or other  
program material that is mixed at very high  
listening levels and has a compressed dynamic  
range.  
• If you want to use Audyssey Dynamic EQ or  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® with THX listening modes, set  
the “Loudness Plus” setting to “Off” and set “Preserve  
THX Settings” to “No” (page 62).  
Movies are mixed in rooms calibrated for film  
reference. To achieve the same reference level in a  
home theater system each speaker level must be  
adjusted so that –30 dBFS band-limited (500 Hz to  
2000 Hz) pink noise produces 75 dB sound pressure  
level at the listening position. A home theater system  
automatically calibrated by Audyssey MultEQ will play  
• If you make Dynamic Volume active, “Dynamic EQ” is set  
to “On”. The Dynamic Vol indicator will light.  
• When “Dynamic EQ” is set to “Off”, “Dynamic Volume” is  
automatically switched to “Off”.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Advanced Operations  
®
HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On” (page 69) and  
you’re listening through your TV speakers.  
• A/V Sync is disabled when the Pure Audio (European,  
Australian and Asian models) or Direct listening mode is  
used with an analog input source.  
About Audyssey Dynamic EQ  
IntelliVolume  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of  
deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by  
taking into account human perception and room  
acoustics. Dynamic EQ selects the correct frequency  
response and surround levels moment-by-moment at  
any user-selected volume setting. The result is bass  
response, tonal balance and surround impression  
that remain constant despite changes in volume.  
Dynamic EQ combines information from incoming  
source levels with actual output sound levels in the  
room, a prerequisite for delivering a loudness  
IntelliVolume  
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB in 1 dB steps  
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for  
each input selector individually. This is useful if one of  
your source components is louder or quieter than the  
others.  
• This setting cannot be used with the NET, USB and  
BLUETOOTH input selectors.  
Name Edit  
Use e/rto set the level.  
You can enter a custom name for each individual  
input selector and radio preset for easy identification.  
When entered, the custom name will appear on the  
display.  
The custom name is edited using the keyboard  
If a component is noticeably louder than the others,  
use eto reduce its input level. If it’s noticeably  
quieter, use rto increase its input level.  
correction solution. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in  
®
tandem with Audyssey MultEQ to provide well-  
Note  
balanced sound for every listener at any volume level.  
• IntelliVolume does not work for Zone 2/3.  
®
Name  
About Audyssey Dynamic Volume  
A/V Sync  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume solves the problem of  
large variations in volume level between television  
programs, commercials, and between the soft and  
loud passages of movies. Dynamic Volume looks at  
the preferred volume setting by the user and then  
monitors how the volume of program material is being  
perceived by listeners in real time to decide whether  
an adjustment is needed. Whenever necessary,  
Dynamic Volume makes the necessary rapid or  
gradual adjustments to maintain the desired playback  
volume level while optimizing the dynamic range.  
Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into  
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then  
1
A/V Sync  
press ENTER.  
Repeat this step to enter up to 10 characters.  
`0msec to 800msec in 10 msec steps  
When using progressive scanning on your Blu-ray  
Disc/DVD player, you may find that the picture and  
sound are out of sync. With this setting, you can  
correct this by delaying the audio signals.  
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting the  
delay when the video source is output to HDMI OUT  
MAIN.  
To store a name when you’re done, be sure to  
2
select “OK” by using q/w/e/r, and then press  
ENTER.  
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is  
adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response,  
tonal balance, surround impression and dialog clarity  
remain the same whether watching movies, flipping  
between television channels or changing from stereo  
to surround sound content.  
The range of values you can adjust will depend on  
whether your TV or display supports HDMI Lip Sync  
and if the “Lip Sync” setting is set to “On” or not  
(page 71).  
Note  
• This setting is not available in either of the following cases:  
The “Audio TV Out (Main)” setting is set to “On”  
(page 70) or “Audio TV Out (Sub)” setting is set to  
On” (page 71) and you’re listening through your TV  
speakers.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Operations  
mode. See “Monitor Out” for details on the  
Picture Adjust  
Name input area  
monitor output setting (page 57).  
Using Picture Adjust, you can adjust the picture  
quality and reduce any noise appearing on the  
screen.  
Press ENTER to view the TV picture while setting  
when the video source is output to HDMI OUT MAIN.  
To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.  
4 - 4. Name Edit  
Name  
BD/DVD  
*1  
Picture Mode  
`Custom:  
All settings can be performed manually.  
`Cinema:  
Select when the picture source is a movie or  
a
n
b
o
c
p
d
q
e
r
f
g
t
h
u
i
j
k
x
l
m
z
s
v
9
w
0
y
^
1
,
2
.
3
/
4
;
5
:
6
@
7
[
8
]
\
Space  
Shift  
Back Space  
OK  
alike.  
`Game:  
*1*6  
Wide Mode  
+10  
Shift  
CLR  
All Erase  
This setting determines the aspect ratio.  
Select when the video source is a game  
console.  
`Standard:  
`4:3:  
A
N
!
B
O
˝
C
P
#
D
Q
$
E
R
F
S
&
`
G
T
H
I
J
K
L
M
U
(
V
)
W
_
X
=
Y
˜
Z
|
%
Does not adjust picture quality (changes  
resolution).  
<
>
?
+
{
}
Space  
Shift  
Back Space  
OK  
`Bypass:  
+10  
Shift  
CLR  
All Erase  
Does not adjust picture quality (does not change  
resolution).  
*1  
*2  
`Full:  
a
b
c d  
e
With “Picture Mode”, you can change the following  
settings to be suitable for the movie or game screen  
by one operation: “Game Mode”, “Film Mode”, “Edge  
Enhancement”, “Noise Reduction”, “Brightness”,  
Contrast”, “Hue”, “Saturation” or “Color  
Temperature”.  
a Toggles between lower and upper case  
*1  
characters.  
b Moves the cursor left or right in the Name input  
area.  
c Moves the cursor backward and deletes one  
`Zoom:  
*2  
character.  
*2*3*4  
Game Mode  
d Enters a space character.  
`Off  
`On  
e Confirms your entry.  
If video signal delay occurs during playback on a video  
component (i.e., game console), select the  
corresponding input source and set the “Game Mode”  
setting to “On”. The delay will decrease but in return  
the picture quality will become poor.  
Tip  
• To name a radio preset, use TUNER to select AM or FM,  
and then select the preset (page 38).  
• To restore a name to its default, erase all characters with  
CLR, select “OK” and then press ENTER.  
`Wide Zoom:  
*1  
This can also be performed by using +10 on the remote  
controller.  
*2  
Press CLR on the remote controller to delete all the  
characters you have input.  
Note  
According to the input signals and monitor  
output setting, the AV receiver automatically  
selects the “4:3”, “Full”, “Zoom” or “Wide Zoom”  
• This setting cannot be used for the NET, USB and  
BLUETOOTH input selectors.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Advanced Operations  
*2*4  
*1*2*4  
Hue  
Film Mode  
Audio Selector  
`Video:  
`–50 to 0 to +50  
Film Mode” detection is not applied and the  
input signal is handled as a video source.  
Audio Selector  
`ARC:  
With this setting, you can adjust the color hue  
between “–50” and “+50”.  
`Auto:  
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent  
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.  
With this selection, the TV’s audio can be  
automatically selected as a priority among other  
assignments.  
*1*2*4  
*1  
Detects whether the input signal is a video or a  
movie. If it is a movie, the appropriate  
conversion is applied.  
`–50 to 0 to +50  
With this setting, you can adjust saturation. “–50” is  
the weakest color. “+50” is the strongest color.  
The AV receiver will adjust to the picture source,  
automatically converting it to the appropriate  
progressive signal and reproducing the natural quality  
of the original picture.  
*2*4  
`HDMI:  
Color Temperature  
`Warm  
This can be selected when HDMI IN has been  
assigned as an input source. If both HDMI  
(HDMI IN) and digital audio inputs (COAXIAL IN  
or OPTICAL IN) have been assigned, HDMI  
input is automatically selected as a priority.  
`COAXIAL:  
`Normal  
`Cool  
*2*4*5  
Edge Enhancement  
`Off  
`Low  
`Mid  
With this setting, you can adjust the color  
temperature.  
Note  
This can be selected when COAXIAL IN has  
been assigned as an input source. If both  
coaxial and HDMI inputs have been assigned,  
coaxial input is automatically selected as a  
priority.  
`High  
• “Picture Adjustcannot be used when:  
The NET, USB or BLUETOOTH input selector is  
selected, or  
Monitor Out” is set to “Sub”.  
This procedure can also be performed on the remote  
With this setting, you can make the picture appear  
sharper.  
*2*4*5  
Noise Reduction  
`Off  
`Low  
`Mid  
*1  
`OPTICAL:  
controller by using the Quick Setup (page 52).  
When the “Picture Mode” setting is set to anything other  
than “Custom”, this setting cannot be used.  
If the “Resolution” setting is set to “4K” (page 57),  
this setting is fixed at “Off”.  
Press CLR if you want to reset to the default value.  
If the “Game Mode” setting is set to “On”, this setting is  
fixed at “Off”.  
This can be selected when OPTICAL IN has  
been assigned as an input source. If both optical  
and HDMI inputs have been assigned, optical  
input is automatically selected as a priority.  
`Analog:  
The AV receiver always outputs analog signals.  
You can set priorities of audio output when there are  
both digital and analog inputs.  
*2  
*3  
`High  
With this setting, you can reduce noise appearing on  
the screen. Select the desired level.  
*4  
*5  
*1*2*4  
Brightness  
`–50 to 0 to +50  
With this setting, you can adjust the picture  
brightness. “–50” is the darkest. “+50” is the brightest.  
*6  
When a 3D video source is input, “Wide Mode” is fixed to  
Full”.  
Note  
• This setting can be made only for an input source that is  
assigned to HDMI IN, COAXIAL IN, or OPTICAL IN.  
• This setting cannot be used with the NET, USB and  
BLUETOOTH input selectors.  
• When using the Whole House Mode, “Audio Selector” is  
fixed to “Analog”.  
*1*2*4  
Contrast  
`–50 to 0 to +50  
With this setting, you can adjust contrast. “–50” is the  
least. +50” is the greatest.  
*1  
You can select “ARC” if you select the TV/CD input  
selector. But you cannot if you’ve selected “Off” in the  
Audio Return Channel” setting (page 71).  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced Operations  
Setting the Incoming Digital Signal (Fixed  
Mode)  
• For the “BLUETOOTH” input selector, only “Digital” is  
available.  
5. Listening Mode Preset  
You can assign a default listening mode to each input  
source that will be selected automatically when you  
select each input source. For example, you can set  
the default listening mode to be used with Dolby  
Digital input signals. You can select other listening  
modes during playback, but the mode specified here  
will be resumed once the AV receiver has been set to  
standby.  
Analog/PCM/Digital  
Fixed Mode  
`Off:  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD,  
turntable, radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc.) or  
PCM digital (CD, DVD, etc.) audio signal is played.  
The format is detected automatically. If no digital  
input signal is present, the corresponding analog  
input is used instead.  
`PCM:  
Note  
Only 2-channel PCM format input signals will be  
heard. If the input signal is not PCM, the PCM  
indicator will flash and noise may also be  
produced.  
• For the “AUX” input selector, only “PCM” is available.  
Mono/Multiplex Source  
Use q/wto select the input source that you  
1
want to set, and then press ENTER.  
The following menu appears.  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when a mono digital audio signal is played  
`DTS:  
Only DTS (but not DTS-HD) format input signals  
will be heard. If the input signal is not DTS, the  
dts indicator will flash and there will be no  
sound.  
5-1. Listening Mode Preset  
BD/DVD  
2ch Source  
Analog/PCM  
Mono/Multiplex Source  
2ch Source  
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD  
DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD  
Other Multich Source  
Last Valid e r  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when 2-channel (2/0) stereo digital sources,  
such as Dolby Digital or DTS, are played.  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
When “HDMI”, “COAXIAL” or “OPTICAL” is selected  
in the “Audio Selector” setting, you can then specify  
the signal type in “Fixed Mode”.  
Dolby D/Dolby D Plus/TrueHD  
Default listening mode for analog and PCM sources.  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when Dolby Digital or Dolby Digital Plus  
format digital audio signals are played (DVD, etc.).  
Specifies the default listening mode for Dolby  
TrueHD sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD (input  
via HDMI).  
Normally, the AV receiver detects the signal format  
automatically. However, if you experience either of  
the following issues when playing PCM or DTS  
material, you can manually set the signal format to  
PCM or DTS.  
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are  
cut off, try setting the format to PCM.  
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or  
reversing a DTS CD, try setting the format to DTS.  
Use q/wto select the signal format that you  
want to set, and then use e/rto select a  
listening mode.  
2
Only listening modes that can be used with each  
input signal format can be selected (pages 41  
to 48).  
DTS/DTS-ES/DTS-HD  
With this setting, you can specify the listening mode  
used when DTS or DTS-HD High Resolution format  
digital audio signals are played (DVD, LD, CD,  
etc.). Specifies the default listening mode for DTS-  
HD Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray or HD  
DVD (input via HDMI).  
The “Last Valid” option means that the listening  
mode selected last will be used.  
The “Straight Decode” option means that  
straight decoding listening mode (Dolby Digital,  
DTS, etc.) is selected.  
Note  
• The setting will be reset to “Off” when you change the  
setting in “Audio Selector”.  
Note  
Other Multich Source  
• For the “TUNER” input selector, only “Analog” will be  
available.  
• For the “NET” or “USB” input selector, “Digital” and  
TrueHD“ will be available.  
Specifies the default listening mode for  
multichannel PCM sources from HDMI IN such as  
DVD-Audio, and DSD multichannel sources such  
as Super Audio CD.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Operations  
Headphone Level  
`–12dB to 0dB to +12dB  
With this setting, you can specify the headphone  
volume relative to the main volume. This is useful if  
there’s a volume difference between your speakers  
and your headphones.  
6. Miscellaneous  
Volume Setup  
7. Hardware Setup  
Tuner  
Volume Display  
`Absolute:  
AM/FM Frequency Step (North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
Displayed range is Min, 1 to 99, Max.  
`Relative (THX):  
`10kHz/200kHz:  
`9kHz/50kHz:  
OSD Setup  
Select the frequency step according to your  
area.  
Displayed range is QdB, –81dB to +18dB.  
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level  
is displayed.  
On Screen Display  
`On  
`Off  
This preference determines whether operation details  
are displayed on-screen when an AV receiver  
function is adjusted.  
AM Frequency Step (European, Australian and  
Asian models)  
`10kHz:  
`9kHz:  
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative  
value 0 dB.  
Note  
Select the frequency step according to your  
area.  
For AM/FM tuning to work properly, you must specify  
the AM/FM frequency step used in your area.  
• If the absolute value is set to 82, “82Ref” will appear on the  
display and the THX indicator will flash.  
Even when “On” is selected, operation details may  
not be output if the input source is connected to an  
HDMI IN.  
Muting Level  
`QdB (fully muted), –50dB to –10dB in 10 dB  
Language  
Note  
steps.  
(North American models)  
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,  
Nederlands, Svenska  
This setting determines how much the output is muted  
when the muting function is used (page 50).  
• When this setting is changed, all radio presets will be  
deleted.  
Maximum Volume  
`Off, 50 to 99 (Absolute display)  
`Off, –32dB to +17dB (Relative display)  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.  
To disable this setting, select “Off”.  
(European, Australian and Asian models)  
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,  
Nederlands, Svenska, Русский язык, 中文  
HDMI  
HDMI CEC (RIHD)  
`Off  
`On  
Turn this setting on to allow p-compatible  
components connected via HDMI to be controlled by  
the AV receiver (page 16).  
(Taiwanese models)  
`English, Deutsch, Français, Español, Italiano,  
Nederlands, Svenska, 中文  
This setting determines the language used for the on-  
screen menus.  
Power On Volume  
`Last, Min, 1 to 99 or Max (Absolute display)  
`Last, QdB, –81dB to +18dB (Relative display)  
With this preference, you can specify the volume  
setting to be used each time the AV receiver is turned  
on.  
To use the same volume level that was used when  
the AV receiver was turned off, select “Last”.  
The “Power On Volume” setting cannot be set higher  
than the “Maximum Volume” setting.  
Screen Saver  
`3min, 5min, 10min  
`Off  
With this setting, you can set the time until the screen  
saver activates itself. Once active, the screen saver  
will go off and the screen will return to its previous  
state if the AV receiver is operated in any way.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced Operations  
HDMI Through  
`Off  
`BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME, PC, AUX,  
TV/CD, PHONO:  
Selects the input source for which the HDMI  
Through function is enabled.  
`Last:  
Audio TV Out (Main)  
`Off  
`On  
This preference determines whether the incoming  
audio signal is output from HDMI OUT MAIN. You  
may want to turn this preference on if your TV is  
connected to HDMI OUT MAIN and you want to listen  
to the audio from a connected component through  
your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should be set to  
Off”.  
Note  
• When the setting is set to “On” and the menu is closed, the  
names of connected p-compatible components and  
RIHD On” are displayed on the AV receiver.  
Search…(name)RIHD On”  
When the AV receiver cannot receive the name of the  
component, it is displayed as “Player*” or “Recorder*”, etc.  
(“*” shows up and indicates the number of components,  
when two or more are received).  
The HDMI Through function is activated on the  
input source selected at the time of setting the  
AV receiver to standby mode.  
• When an p-compatible component is connected to  
the AV receiver via an HDMI cable, the name of the  
connected component is displayed on the AV receiver  
display. For example, while you are watching TV  
broadcasting, if you operate a Blu-ray Disc/DVD player  
(being powered on) with the remote control of the AV  
receiver, the name of the Blu-ray Disc/DVD player will be  
displayed on the AV receiver.  
• Set it to Offwhen a connected piece of equipment is not  
compatible or it is unclear whether the equipment is  
compatible or not.  
• If operation is not normal when set to On, change the  
setting to Off.  
When enabling the HDMI Through function,  
regardless of whether the AV receiver is on or in  
standby, both audio and video streams from an HDMI  
input will be output to the TV or other components via  
HDMI connection. The HDMI indicator will be dimly-lit  
in standby mode. Note that the indicator may not light  
under certain conditions (page 22).  
This setting is fixed to “Auto” automatically when the  
above “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”,  
resulting in automatic input source selection.  
Note  
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,  
the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.  
In this case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display by pressing DISPLAY.  
• When “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set to “On”, this setting is  
fixed to “Auto”.  
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Monitor Out” is set to  
Sub” (page 57).  
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output  
even when this setting is set to “On”.  
Note  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for  
details.  
• When the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”, the  
power consumption on standby mode slightly increases.  
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter  
standby mode as usual.)  
• When “Audio TV Out (Main)” or HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set  
to Onand you’re listening through your TV’s speakers,  
turning up the AV receiver’s volume control will make the  
sound be output from the AV receiver’s front left and right  
speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing  
sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or  
turn down the AV receiver’s volume.  
• Only an input source assigned to an HDMI IN via  
HDMI Input” setting is enabled (page 58).  
• The power consumption in standby mode will increase  
during the HDMI Through function; however in the following  
cases, the power consumption can be saved:  
The TV is in standby mode.  
You are watching a TV program.  
• Refer to the connected component’s instruction manual for  
details.  
• Depending on the connected component, the correct input  
source may not be selected with the setting fixed to “Auto”.  
• This setting is set to “Off” automatically when the “HDMI  
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “Off”.  
• The pcontrol does not support HDMI OUT SUB.  
Use HDMI OUT MAIN instead.  
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set  
to “On” and the audio is output from the TV.  
• When the source equipment is connected with the u  
connection, it may malfunction if “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” is set  
to “On”.  
• If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the  
TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting  
is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV,  
(When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the audio cannot be  
output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and  
HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers  
connected to the AV receiver.  
• This function is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN jack.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Operations  
Audio TV Out (Sub)  
Audio Return Channel  
InstaPrevue  
`Off  
`On  
`Off  
`Auto:  
These settings apply to “InstaPrevue” of the Home  
menu (page 51) and specify the preview display of  
HDMI video streams.  
The audio signal from your TV tuner can be sent  
to HDMI OUT MAIN of the AV receiver.  
The audio return channel (ARC) function allows an  
ARC capable TV to send the audio stream to HDMI  
OUT MAIN of the AV receiver. To use this function,  
you must select the TV/CD input selector and your TV  
must be ARC capable. The ARC indicator will light  
when the audio signal is detected. Default setting:  
- - - -”  
This preference determines whether the incoming  
audio signal is output from HDMI OUT SUB. You may  
want to turn this preference on if your TV is  
connected to HDMI OUT SUB and you want to listen  
to the audio from a connected component through  
your TV’s speakers. Normally, this should be set to  
Off”.  
Sub Window  
`Multi:  
Displays preview thumbnails all at once.  
Displays preview thumbnails one-by-one.  
With this setting, you can set the number of preview  
thumbnails displayed.  
Note  
• If “On” is selected and the audio can be output from the TV,  
the AV receiver will output no sound through its speakers.  
In this case, “TV Speaker” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display by pressing DISPLAY.  
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Monitor Out” is set to  
Main” (page 57).  
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both” (page 57), and this  
setting is enabled, set audio output of source component to  
2ch PCM.  
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be output  
even when this setting is set to “On”.  
Position  
Note  
(with “Sub Window” set to “Multi”)  
`Top, Bottom, Left, Right  
(with “Sub Window” set to “Single”)  
`Upper Left, Upper Right, Lower Left, Lower  
Right  
• This setting is fixed to “- - - -” when the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)”  
setting is set to “Off”.  
• This setting is set to “Auto” automatically when the “HDMI  
CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On” for the first time.  
• If you set “Audio Return Channel” to “Auto”, the “Audio  
Selector” settings of the TV/CD input selector will be  
automatically switched to “ARC” (page 67).  
With this setting, you can set the position of preview  
thumbnails on the TV screen.  
Tip  
Note  
• After changing the settings of the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)”,  
HDMI Through” or “Audio Return Channel”, turn off the  
power on all connected pieces of equipment and then turn  
them on again. Refer to the user’s manuals for all  
connected pieces of equipment.  
• When “Audio TV Out (Sub)” is set to Onand you’re  
listening through your TV’s speakers, turning up the AV  
receiver’s volume control will make the sound be output  
from the AV receiver’s front left and right speakers. To stop  
the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the  
settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV  
receiver’s volume.  
• Listening mode cannot be changed when this setting is set  
to “On” and the audio is output from the TV.  
• When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both” (page 57) and only  
Audio TV Out (Sub)” is set to “On”, the audio is not output  
from the TV connected to HDMI OUT SUB except in the  
case the audio input is via HDMI.  
• If the audio signal from the player is not supported by the  
TV, the audio is not output from the TV even if this setting  
is enabled. When the audio cannot be output from the TV,  
(When “Monitor Out” is set to “Both”, the audio cannot be  
output form the TV connected to both HDMI OUT MAIN and  
HDMI OUT SUB) the audio is output from the speakers  
connected to the AV receiver.  
• Depending on video signals, the picture may not be  
properly rendered on the preview thumbnails of  
InstaPrevue.  
Auto Standby  
Lip Sync  
`Off  
`On  
Auto Standby  
`Off  
`On  
When “Auto Standby” is set to “On”, the ASb  
indicator lights and the AV receiver will automatically  
enter standby mode if there is no operation for 30  
minutes with no audio and no video signal input.  
Auto Standby” will appear on the AV receiver’s  
display and OSD 30 seconds before the Auto  
Standby comes on.  
This function allows the AV receiver to automatically  
correct any delay between the video and the audio,  
based on the data from the connected monitor.  
Note  
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible TV  
supports HDMI Lip Sync.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Advanced Operations  
Default setting: On (European, Australian and  
Asian models), Off (North American and  
Taiwanese models)  
MAC Address  
This is the AV receiver’s MAC (Media Access  
Control) address. This address cannot be changed.  
Network  
This section explains how to configure the AV  
receiver’s network settings manually.  
Note  
DHCP  
`Enable  
`Disable  
After modifying the network settings, you must  
confirm the changes by executing “Save”.  
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, you don’t  
need to change any of these settings, as the AV  
receiver is set to use DHCP to configure itself  
automatically by default (i.e., DHCP is set to  
Enable”). If, however, your router’s DHCP server is  
disabled (you’re for example using static IP), you’ll  
need to configure these settings yourself, in which  
case, a knowledge of Ethernet networking is  
essential.  
• Set to “On, the Auto Standby function may activate itself  
during playback with some sources.  
• The Auto Standby function does not work when Zone 2/3 is  
on.  
This setting determines whether or not the AV  
receiver uses DHCP to automatically configure its IP  
Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server  
settings.  
HDMI Through  
`Off  
`On  
Note  
This setting enables or disables the Auto Standby  
during HDMI Through by detecting the audio/video  
input signal.  
When this setting is set to “On”, the AV receiver will  
automatically enter standby mode if there is no audio  
and no video signal input during HDMI Through for 30  
minutes. (The Auto Standby function does not work when  
Zone 2/3 is on.)  
• If you select “Disable”, you must configure the “IP  
Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Gateway”, and “DNS Server”  
settings yourself.  
What’s DHCP?  
IP Address  
`Class A:  
10.0.0.0” to “10.255.255.255”  
`Class B:  
172.16.0.0” to “172.31.255.255”  
`Class C:  
192.168.0.0” to “192.168.255.255”  
Enter a static IP address provided by your Internet  
Service Provider (ISP).  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used  
by routers, computers, the AV receiver, and other  
devices to automatically configure themselves on a  
network.  
What’s DNS?  
When this setting is set to “Off”, the status of HDMI  
Through is continued regardless of audio/video input  
signal.  
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain  
names into IP addresses. For example, when you  
enter a domain name such as www.onkyousa.com in  
your Web browser, before accessing the site, your  
browser uses DNS to translate this into an IP  
address, in this case 63.148.251.142.  
Tip  
• Entering standby mode is possible by setting “HDMI CEC  
(RIHD)” to “On” and using CEC-compatible component  
regardless of the above-mentioned setting.  
See “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” in “7. Hardware Setup” for linked  
operation (page 69).  
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.  
Subnet Mask  
Enter the subnet mask address provided by your ISP  
(typically 255.255.255.0).  
Network Connection  
`Wired  
`Wireless  
This setting determines whether you connect the AV  
receiver to network by wired LAN or wireless LAN. If  
you connect by wireless LAN, select “Wireless”. See  
“Performing Wireless LAN Setup” for setting  
(page 27).  
• When the HDMI Through is enabled, the power  
consumption slightly increases.  
Gateway  
Enter the gateway address provided by your ISP.  
Note  
• This setting is fixed to “Off” when “Auto Standby” is set to  
Off”.  
DNS Server  
Enter the DNS server address provided by your ISP.  
Proxy URL  
To use a Web proxy, enter its URL here.  
Tip  
• The same setting is available even if “Wireless” is selected  
in “Network Connection” in initial setup (page 23).  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Operations  
• For details on the Bluetooth connection, refer to the  
instruction manual of the Bluetooth-enabled device.  
• The pairing can be done by holding down BLUETOOTH  
button on the AV receiver until BLUETOOTH indicator  
flashes.  
Proxy Port  
If you’re using a Web proxy, enter a proxy port  
number here.  
8. Remote Controller Setup  
Remote ID  
Network Standby  
`On  
`Off  
This setting enables or disables control over the  
network.  
When enabled, the NET indicator will be dimly-lit  
while the AV receiver is in standby mode. Note that  
the indicator may not light under certain conditions  
(page 22).  
Remote ID  
`1, 2, or 3  
When several Onkyo components are used in the  
same room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To  
differentiate the AV receiver from other components,  
you can change its remote ID from “1”, to “2” or “3”.  
Note  
• This setting cannot be selected if you’ve selected NET or  
USB as input selector in Multi Zone.  
Initial Setup  
If you skipped the initial setup wizard, for example on  
first-time use, you can reaccess it from here.  
See “Initial Setup” (page 22).  
Note  
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure to  
change the remote controller to the same ID (see below),  
controller.  
Note  
Note  
• When set to “On”, the power consumption slightly  
increases in standby mode.  
• This setting cannot be selected if the “Monitor Out” setting  
is set to “Sub”.  
Changing the remote controller’s ID  
Update Notice  
`Enable  
`Disable  
While holding down RECEIVER, press and  
hold down Q SETUP until the remote indicator  
lights (about 3 seconds).  
1
When this setting is enabled, you will be notified if a  
firmware update via network of high importance is  
available.  
Use the number buttons to enter ID 1, 2, or 3.  
The remote indicator flashes twice.  
2
Note  
• Selecting “Never Remind me” on the notification window  
will switch this setting to “Disable” (page 22).  
• For details on the update notification, see “Firmware  
Update Notification” (page 22).  
Remote Mode Setup  
See “Looking up for Remote Control Codes”  
(page 76).  
Bluetooth  
This setting enables the AV receiver to pair with  
Bluetooth-enabled device.  
9. Lock Setup  
With this preference, you can protect your settings by  
locking the setup menus.  
Status  
Press ENTER button to display “Now Pairing” and  
start pairing.  
Setup  
`Locked  
`Unlocked  
When “Locked” is selected, the setup menus will be  
locked and you cannot change any setting.  
Tip  
• If pairing setting is not set, “Ready” appears on-screen  
display. The name of the device paired with the AV receiver  
is displayed if pairing setting is set.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Advanced Operations  
Multi Zone  
In addition to the main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in the other room, or as we call Multi Zone. And, you can select a different source for each room.  
Making Multi Zone Connections  
Connecting Your Zone 2 Speakers Directly to the AV receiver  
Connecting the Zone Speakers to an Additional Amplifier  
This setup allows you to select different sources for Main room and Zone 2. This is  
called Powered Zone, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV receiver.  
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main listening room and 2-channel  
stereo playback in Zone 2/3.  
To use this setup, you must activate the Powered Zone 2 setting (page 59).  
Main room  
Main room  
TV  
TV  
AV receiver  
AV receiver  
Zone 2  
Zone 3  
Zone 2  
IN  
IN  
R
L
R
L
R
L
Receiver/  
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
integrated amp  
Note  
• The volume of Zone 2/3 must be set on the Zone 2/3 amplifier.  
Note  
• With this setup, the volume of Zone 2 is controlled by the AV receiver.  
• When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room is reduced to 5.1 channels.  
En-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Operations  
Muting Zone 2  
Controlling Multi Zone Components  
8RECEIVER  
Operating on the remote controller  
Operating on the AV receiver  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
Input selector buttons  
Press ZONE2 followed by MUTING.  
1
ZONE 2 ZONE 3  
MASTER VOLUME  
MUTING  
ZONE2  
ZONE3  
VOLq/w  
Tip  
• To unmute, press ZONE2 followed by MUTING again.  
Zone can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.  
Press ZONE2 or ZONE3, then point the remote  
controller at the AV receiver and press  
8RECEIVER.  
1
Note  
• Only analog, NET or USB input source is output from the  
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 LINE OUT jacks and ZONE 2 L/R  
terminals.  
You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations for your  
main room and Zone 2/3. The same AM/FM radio station  
will be heard in each room. Namely, if you have selected an  
FM station for the main room, that station will also be output  
in Zone 2/3.  
• You cannot select different input selector NET or USB for  
your main room and Zone 2/3. Namely, if you have selected  
USB input selector for Zone 2/3, USB input selector will be  
selected in main room even if NET has been selected for  
main room.  
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on  
the AV receiver’s display.  
8ON/STANDBY  
Tip  
To select an input source for Zone 2/3, press  
ZONE2 or ZONE3, followed by an INPUT  
SELECTOR button.  
2
3
• The Whole House Mode function shares the input source of  
main room with Multi Zone (page 50).  
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE2 or ZONE3,  
followed by 8RECEIVER.  
To turn on Zone 2/3 and select an input source,  
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 followed by an input  
selector button within 8 seconds.  
1
The zone is turned off.  
Zone 2/3 turns on, the Z2 or Z3 indicator lights on  
the AV receiver’s display.  
Adjusting the Volume for Zone 2  
BLUETOOTH cannot be selected as input selector in Multi  
Zone. If you play audio from Bluetooth-enabled device in  
Multi Zone, select “Z2 Sel: Source” or “Z3 Sel: Source”,  
and BLUETOOTH as input selector in Main room.  
• When Zone 2/3 is activated and its input selector is  
selected, the power consumption of standby mode slightly  
increases.  
• While Zone 2/3 is on, ufunctions will not work.  
• When setting the AV receiver to standby mode while Zone  
2/3 is active, the Z2 or Z3 indicator is dimly lit.  
• Activating Zones in the main room when the listening mode  
is set to Pure Audio (European, Australian and Asian  
models) will automatically switch it to Direct.  
• “AUX” cannot be selected as input sources for Zone 2/3.  
• When “AUX” is the input source of Main room and Zone 2/3  
is set to share the same source, no sound will be output  
from Zone 2/3.  
To select the same source as the main room’s,  
press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 twice. “Z2 Sel:  
Source” or “Z3 Sel: Source” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display.  
Operating on the remote controller  
Press ZONE2.  
1
To turn off Zone 2/3, press ZONE 2 or ZONE 3  
Use VOL q/w.  
2
2
followed by 8ON/STANDBY within 8 seconds.  
The zone is turned off.  
Operating on the AV receiver  
Operating on the remote controller  
To control Zone 2/3, you must press ZONE2 or  
ZONE3 on the remote controller first.  
Press ZONE 2 (the Z2 indicator on the AV  
receiver’s display flashes).  
1
Use MASTER VOLUME control within 8  
seconds.  
2
If your Zone 2 speakers are connected to a receiver  
or integrated amplifier in Zone 2, use its volume  
control to adjust the volume.  
En-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Controlling Other Components  
Use q/wto select “Remote Controller Setup”,  
Entering Remote Control Codes  
Controlling Other  
Components  
3
4
5
and then press ENTER.  
You’ll need to enter a code for each component that  
you want to control.  
Use q/wto select “Remote Mode Setup”, and  
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to  
control your other AV components, including those  
made by other manufacturers. This section explains  
how to enter the remote control code for a component  
that you want to control: DVD, TV, CD, etc.  
then press ENTER.  
Look up the appropriate remote control code  
Use q/wto select a remote mode, and then  
1
in the separate Remote Control Codes list.  
The codes are organized by category (e.g., DVD  
player, TV, etc.).  
press ENTER.  
The menu of category selection appears.  
Use q/wto select a category, and then press  
6
7
While holding down the REMOTE MODE  
ENTER.  
2
Preprogrammed Remote Control  
Codes  
button to which you want to assign a code,  
press and hold down DISPLAY (about 3  
seconds).  
The keyboard screen for brand name input  
appears.  
The following REMOTE MODE buttons are  
preprogrammed with remote control codes for  
controlling the components listed. You do not need to  
enter a remote control code to control these  
components.  
Use q/w/e/rto select a character, and then  
The remote indicator lights.  
press ENTER.  
Note  
Repeat this step for the first three characters of  
the brand name.  
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for  
RECEIVER and the multi zone button.  
When you have entered the 3rd character, select  
Search” and press ENTER.  
A list of brand names is retrieved.  
If the desired brand name is not found:  
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for TV.  
• Except for RECEIVER, TV, and the multi zone button,  
remote control codes from any category can be  
assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However,  
these buttons also work as input selector buttons, so  
choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds  
with the input to which you connect your component.  
For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD  
input, choose TV/CD when entering its remote control  
code.  
For details on controlling these components, see the  
indicated pages.  
BD/DVD Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player (page 78)  
Use rto select “Not Listed”, and then press  
TV/CD  
Onkyo CD player (page 77)  
ENTER.  
STB/DVR Apple TV  
The keyboard screen for brand name input  
appears.  
Use q/wto select a brand, and then press  
ENTER.  
Looking up for Remote Control Codes  
8
9
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to  
3
You can look up for an appropriate remote control  
code from the on-screen menu.  
enter the 5-digit remote control code.  
The remote indicator flashes twice.  
If the remote control code is not entered  
successfully, the remote indicator will flash once  
slowly.  
A remote control code with its instructions are  
displayed. Follow the procedure.  
Note  
If you can control the component, use q/wto  
select “OK”, and then press ENTER.  
The on-screen menu returns to the “Remote  
Mode Setup” front screen.  
• You need to connect your TV to the HDMI output (HDMI  
OUT MAIN) to make the following on-screen setting.  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME.  
Note  
1
If you cannot control the component, use q/w  
to select “Try Next Code” and press ENTER.  
The next code is displayed.  
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at  
the time of release, they are subject to change.  
Use e/ror q/wto select “Setup”, and then  
2
press ENTER.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Controlling Other Components  
`32901/33104/33504:  
Onkyo HD DVD player  
`70868:  
Remapping Colored Buttons  
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo  
Components Connected via RI  
You can change the configuration of colored buttons,  
with which REMOTE MODE buttons are preset.  
Onkyo MD recorder without u  
Onkyo components that are connected via uare  
controlled by pointing the remote controller at the AV  
receiver, not the component. This allows you to  
control components that are out of view, in a rack, for  
example.  
`71323:  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE  
Onkyo CD recorder without u  
1
button that you want to program, press and  
hold down A (Red) until the remote indicator  
lights (about 3 seconds).  
`82990:  
Onkyo Dock without u  
You can only change colored buttons for  
components whose codes belong to categories  
of the Remote Control Codes list (BD/DVD  
player, TV, cable set-top box, etc).  
Make sure the Onkyo component is connected  
1
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons  
with an ucable and an analog audio cable  
(RCA).  
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default  
remote control code.  
See “Connecting Onkyo RI Components” for  
details (page 20).  
Within 30 seconds, press the colored buttons  
2
in the order that you want to reassign them.  
The button presses are assigned to each button  
from left to right. The remote indicator flashes  
twice, indicating that the sequence has been  
successfully assigned. If the sequence is not  
successfully assigned, the remote indicator will  
flash once slowly.  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE  
Enter the appropriate remote control code for  
a REMOTE MODE button, by referring to the  
previous section.  
2
button that you want to reset, press and hold  
down HOME until the remote indicator lights  
(about 3 seconds).  
`42157:  
Within 30 seconds, press the REMOTE MODE  
button again.  
Onkyo cassette tape deck with u  
2
`81993:  
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that  
the button has been reset.  
Each REMOTE MODE button is preprogrammed  
with a remote control code. When a button is  
reset, its preprogrammed code is restored.  
Onkyo Dock with u  
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point the  
remote controller at the AV receiver, and  
operate the component.  
Tip  
3
• To reset the REMOTE MODE buttons to their default  
settings, see “Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons”.  
Note  
Controlling Onkyo components without u  
If you want to control an Onkyo component by  
pointing the remote controller directly at it, or you  
want to control an Onkyo component that’s not  
connected via u, use the following remote control  
codes:  
• If any other button than the colored buttons is pressed, the  
operation will be cancelled.  
• This operation cannot be done while the AV receiver is in  
Receiver mode or when Zone 2/3 is active.  
Resetting the Remote Controller  
You can reset the remote controller to its default  
settings.  
While holding down RECEIVER, press and  
hold down HOME until the remote indicator  
lights (about 3 seconds).  
1
`30627:  
Onkyo DVD player without u  
`71817:  
Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER again.  
The remote indicator flashes twice, indicating that  
the remote controller has been reset.  
2
Onkyo CD player without u  
`32900/33100/33500:  
Onkyo Blu-ray Disc player  
En-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Controlling Other Components  
Controlling MHL-Enabled Mobile Device  
Controlling Other Components  
Press the appropriate REMOTE  
MODE button first.  
By programming the supplied remote controller with  
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to  
operate your MHL-enabled mobile device.  
Connect your MHL-enabled mobile device to the AUX  
INPUT MHL jack. We advise you to program the  
remote control code on the AUX button.  
Use the following remote control codes:  
(North American and Taiwanese models)  
`33101:  
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been  
programmed with the remote control code for your  
component, you can control your component as  
described below.  
For details on entering a remote control code for other  
components, see “Entering Remote Control Codes”  
(page 76).  
h
i
Controlling a TV  
MHL-enabled mobile device  
(European, Australian, and Asian models)  
`32910:  
j
TV is preprogrammed with the remote control code  
*1  
for controlling a TV that supports the p  
a
b
(limited to some models). The TV must be able to  
receive remote control commands via pand  
be connected to the AV receiver via HDMI. If  
controlling your TV via pdoesn’t work very  
well, program your TV’s remote control code into TV  
and use the TV remote mode to control your TV.  
Use the following remote control codes:  
`11807/13100/13500:  
MHL-enabled mobile device  
k
l
Note  
• With some mobile devices, reliable operation cannot be  
guaranteed.  
c
d
m
n
Controlling a Blu-ray Disc/DVD Player, HD  
DVD Player or DVD Recorder  
BD/DVD is preprogrammed with the remote control  
code for controlling a component that supports the  
TV with p  
e
f
*1  
p
(limited to some models). The component  
Controlling Apple TV  
must be able to receive remote control commands via  
pand be connected to the AV receiver via  
HDMI.  
By programming the supplied remote controller with  
the appropriate remote control code, you can use it to  
operate your Apple TV.  
Use the following remote control codes:  
`32910/33101/33501/31612:  
g
Use the following remote control codes:  
`02615:  
Blu-ray Disc/DVD player with p  
Apple TV  
o
*1  
The psupported by the AV receiver is the CEC  
system control function of the HDMI standard.  
En-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Controlling Other Components  
TV operation  
DVD player/DVD recorder operation  
Satellite receiver/Cable receiver operation  
Available buttons  
Available buttons  
TOP MENU  
Available buttons  
GUIDE  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
a 8, INPUT, TV VOL q/w g  
b
h 8SOURCE  
b
h 8SOURCE  
Number: +10*1  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
GUIDE  
DISPLAY  
DISPLAY  
b
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
i
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
i
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
i
j
l
m
n
o
SETUP  
MUTING  
SETUP  
MUTING  
d
j
d
j
SETUP  
CH +/–  
CH +/–  
d
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
k
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
k
7, 6  
7, 6  
DISC +/–  
PREV CH  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
l
*1  
7, 6  
PREV CH  
RETURN  
AUDIO*1  
CLR  
A (Red)*1  
MENU  
A (Red)  
RETURN  
f
l
f
m
A (Red)*1  
B (Green)  
C (Yellow)*1  
D (Blue)*1  
B (Green)  
C (Yellow)  
D (Blue)  
RETURN  
AUDIO  
f
m
n
B (Green)*1  
C (Yellow)*1  
D (Blue)*1  
AUDIO*1  
CLR  
n
o
CLR  
o
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
g
g
Number: +10*1  
Number: +10  
Blu-ray Disc player/HD DVD player operation  
VCR/PVR operation  
CD player/CD recorder/MD recorder operation  
Available buttons  
TOP MENU  
Available buttons  
Available buttons  
b
h 8SOURCE  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
GUIDE  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
b
h 8SOURCE  
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
g
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
i
j
k
DISPLAY  
SETUP  
Number: +10  
SETUP  
c q/w/e/r, ENTER  
i
d
d
SETUP  
MUTING  
CH +/–  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
h 8SOURCE  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
d
j
k
l
m
o
7, 6  
7, 6  
DISC +/–  
MENU  
DISPLAY  
e 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
i
7, 6  
A (Red)  
PREV CH  
RETURN  
CLR  
SEARCH  
MUTING  
f
l
m
n
o
f
j
REPEAT  
RANDOM  
MODE  
DISC +/–  
RETURN  
AUDIO*1  
CLR  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
B (Green)  
g
k
Number: +10  
CLR  
C (Yellow)  
o
D (Blue)  
Cassette tape deck operation  
Number: 1 to 9, 0  
Number: +10*1  
g
Available buttons  
Note  
e 1, t(Reverse  
Playback), 2, 5, 4,  
7, 6  
h 8SOURCE  
• With some components, certain buttons may not work as  
expected, and some may not work at all.  
• See “Controlling Your iPod/iPhone” about the operation of  
iPod/iPhone (page 81).  
MUTING  
j
*1  
The pfunction is not supported. The p  
supported by the AV receiver is the CEC system control  
function of the HDMI standard.  
En-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Controlling Other Components  
Direct Change  
The Dock is sold separately. Models sold are  
different depending on the region.  
For the latest information on the Onkyo Dock  
components, see the Onkyo web site at:  
http://www.onkyo.com  
Before using the Onkyo Dock components, update  
your iPod/iPhone with the latest software, available  
from the Apple web site.  
For supported iPod/iPhone models, see the  
instruction manual of the Onkyo Dock.  
Using the Onkyo Dock  
RI Dock  
If you start iPod/iPhone playback while listening to  
another input source, the AV receiver will  
automatically switch to the input to which the RI Dock  
is connected.  
With the RI Dock, you can easily play the music of  
your iPod/iPhone, or watch the slideshows and  
videos of your iPod/iPhone on a TV. In addition, the  
on-screen display (OSD) allows you to view,  
navigate, and select your iPod/iPhone model’s  
contents on your TV, and with the supplied remote  
controller, you can control your iPod/iPhone from the  
comfort of your sofa. You can even use the AV  
receiver’s remote controller to operate your  
iPod/iPhone.  
Other Remote Operations  
You can use the remote controller that came with the  
AV receiver to control other iPod/iPhone functions.  
The available functionality depends on the AV  
receiver.  
Note  
• If you use your iPod/iPhone with any other accessories,  
iPod/iPhone playback detection may not work.  
• The System On function may not work depending on the RI  
Dock.  
Note  
• Enter the appropriate remote control code before using the  
AV receiver’s remote controller for the first time  
(page 77).  
iPod Alarm  
If you use the Alarm function on your iPod to start  
playback, the AV receiver will turn on at the specified  
time and select your iPod as the input source  
automatically.  
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an ucable  
(page 20).  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or  
“HDD/DOCK”.  
Note  
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”  
(page 50).  
• Depending on your iPod/iPhone model and generation,  
some of the linked operations may not be available.  
• This linked operation won’t work while a video is being  
played or when the sound set for the alarm is a built-in  
sound (Beep).  
System Function  
System On  
When you turn on the AV receiver, the RI Dock and  
iPod/iPhone turn on automatically. In addition, when  
RI Dock and iPod/iPhone are on, the AV receiver can  
be turned on by pressing 8SOURCE.  
• This linked operation won’t work with models on which  
music files cannot be used to set the alarm sound.  
Operating Notes  
• Use the AV receiver’s volume control to adjust the playback  
volume.  
• While your iPod/iPhone is inserted in the RI Dock, its  
volume control has no effect.  
• If you do adjust the volume control on your iPod/iPhone  
while it’s inserted in the RI Dock, be careful that it’s not set  
too loud before you reconnect your headphones.  
Auto Power On  
If you press the remote controller’s 1(Playback)  
while the AV receiver is on standby, the AV receiver  
will automatically turn on, select your iPod/iPhone as  
the input source, and your iPod/iPhone will start  
playback.  
En-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Controlling Other Components  
uDock operation  
Controlling Your iPod/iPhone  
Press the appropriate REMOTE  
MODE button first.  
Available buttons  
By pressing the REMOTE MODE button that’s been  
programmed with the remote control code for your  
Dock, you can control your iPod/iPhone in the Dock  
with the buttons described further in this section.  
See “Entering Remote Control Codes” for details on  
entering a remote control code (page 76).  
See the Dock’s instruction manual for more  
information.  
TOP MENU*1  
a
e 8SOURCE*2  
DISPLAY*3  
b q/w/e/r, ENTER  
f
MUTING  
PLAYLIST e/r  
g
e
f
ALBUM +/–  
c 1, 3, 2, 5, 4,  
h
7, 6  
i VOL q/w  
REPEAT  
MENU  
MODE*4  
d
j
k
RANDOM  
g
h
• With some iPod/iPhone models, generations and RI Docks,  
certain buttons may not work as expected.  
• For detailed operation of iPod/iPhone, please refer to the  
RI Dock  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to “HDD” or  
“HDD/DOCK”.  
i
*1  
TOP MENU works as the mode button when used with  
8SOURCE may not work with a remote control  
code (without u). In this case, make an u  
connection and enter the remote control code 81993  
(with u).  
the DS-A2 RI Dock.  
This button does not turn the Onkyo DS-A2 or DS-A2X  
a
b
j
*2  
RI Dock on or off. Also, your iPod/iPhone may not  
respond the first time you press this button, in which case  
you should press it again. This is because the remote  
controller transmits the On and Standby commands  
alternately, so if your iPod/iPhone is already on, it will  
remain on when the remote controller transmits the On  
command. Similarly, if your iPod/iPhone is already off, it  
will remain off when the remote controller transmits the  
Off command.  
With the RI Control  
Make an uconnection and enter the remote control  
code 81993 (with u).  
c
d
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to “DOCK”  
(page 50).  
k
*3  
DISPLAY turns on the backlight for a few seconds.  
Resume mode  
Without the RI Control  
*4  
You must enter the remote control code 82990 first  
(page 77).  
With the Resume function, you can resume playback of  
the song that was playing when you removed your  
iPod/iPhone from the Onkyo DS-A2 RI Dock.  
En-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Appendix  
seconds). Within 30 seconds, press RECEIVER  
again.  
The on-screen information appears only on a TV that  
is connected to HDMI outputs.  
Audio  
Troubleshooting  
There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet  
Make sure that the digital input source is selected properly.  
(page 59)  
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for  
a solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue  
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.  
Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed in all  
the way (page 15).  
Power  
Resetting the AV receiver  
Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all components  
are connected properly. (pages 15 to 20)  
Can’t turn on the AV receiver  
Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into the  
wall outlet.  
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting the  
AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.  
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults, turn it  
on and, while holding down CBL/SAT, press  
8ON/STANDBY. “Clear” will appear on the AV  
receiver’s display and the AV receiver will enter  
standby mode.  
Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is correct,  
and that the bare wires are in contact with the metal part of  
each speaker terminal. (page 13)  
Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five  
seconds or more, then plug it in again.  
Make sure that the input source is properly selected.  
(page 29)  
The AV receiver turns off unexpectedly  
The AV receiver will automatically enter standby mode  
when Auto Standby has been set and launches.  
(page 71)  
Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.  
(page 14)  
Check the volume. The AV receiver is designed for home  
theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume range, allowing  
precise adjustment.  
The AV receiver turns off and after restoring the  
power, it turns off again  
If the MUTING indicator is flashing on the AV receiver’s  
display, press the remote controller’s MUTING button to  
unmute the AV receiver. (page 50)  
The protection circuit has been activated. Remove the  
power cord from the wall outlet immediately. Make sure  
that all speaker cables and input sources are properly  
connected, and leave the AV receiver with its power cord  
disconnected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power  
cord and turn the power on. If the AV receiver turns off  
again, avoid resetting it and unplug the power cord. Then  
contact your Onkyo dealer. (page 14)  
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your  
radio presets and custom settings.  
While a pair of headphones is connected to the PHONES  
jack, no sound is output from the speakers. (page 20)  
If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an  
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings, and be  
sure to select a supported audio format.  
Remote indicator  
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected  
device. On some game consoles, such as those that  
support DVD, the default setting is off.  
Caution:  
• If “CHECK SP WIRE” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display, the speaker cables may be shorting.  
RECEIVER  
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio  
output format from a menu.  
If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must connect  
an MC head amp, or an MC transformer.  
WARNING:  
• If smoke, smell or abnormal noise is produced by the AV  
receiver, unplug the power cord from the wall outlet  
immediately and contact your Onkyo dealer.  
Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,  
twisted, or damaged.  
HOME  
Not all listening modes use all speakers. (page 41)  
Specify the speaker distances and adjust the individual  
speaker levels. (pages 60, 61)  
To reset the remote controller to its factory defaults,  
while holding down RECEIVER, press and hold down  
HOME until the remote indicator lights (about 3  
Make sure that the speaker setup microphone is not still  
connected.  
En-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix  
The front high and surround back speakers  
produce no sound  
Depending on the current listening mode, no sound may be  
produced by the front high and surround back speakers.  
Select another listening mode. (page 41)  
If the input signal format is set to “PCM” or “DTS”. Set it to  
Off”. (page 68)  
If the volume level of each individual speaker has been  
adjusted to high positive values, then the maximum master  
volume possible may be reduced. Note that the individual  
speaker volume levels are set automatically after the  
Audyssey MultEQ® Room Correction and Speaker Setup  
has been performed. (pages 24, 61)  
Only the front speakers produce sound  
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, only  
the front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.  
(page 43)  
Depending on the sources, the sound produced by the  
front high and surround back speakers may be weak.  
Noise can be heard  
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers output  
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Left /  
Right”. (page 62)  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 59)  
Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power cords,  
performance, so refrain from doing it.  
When Powered Zone 2 is used, playback in the main room  
is reduced to 5.1channels and the front high and surround  
back speakers produce no sound.  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 59)  
An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try  
repositioning your cables.  
Only the center speaker produces sound  
The subwoofer produces no sound  
When you play source material that contains no information  
in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.  
The Late Night function doesn’t work  
Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital, Dolby  
Digital Plus, and Dolby TrueHD. (page 54)  
If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic  
IIx Music, or Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game listening mode with  
a mono source, such as an AM radio station or mono TV  
program, the sound is concentrated in the center speaker.  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 59)  
Make sure that the “TrueHD Loudness Management”  
setting is not set to “Off”. The Late Night function doesn’t  
work when this setting is disabled. (page 63)  
In the Mono listening mode, only the center speaker output  
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Center”.  
(page 62)  
There’s no sound with a certain signal format  
Check the digital audio output setting on the connected  
device. On some game consoles, such as those that  
support DVD, the default setting is off.  
About DTS signals  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 59)  
When DTS program material ends and the DTS bitstream  
stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listening mode and  
the dts indicator remains on. This is to prevent noise when  
you use the pause, fast forward, or fast reverse function on  
your player. If you switch your player from DTS to PCM,  
you may not hear any sound because the AV receiver does  
not switch formats immediately. In such case, you should  
stop your player for about three seconds and then resume  
playback.  
With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an audio  
output format from a menu.  
The surround speakers produce no sound  
When the T-D (Theater-Dimensional), Stereo or Mono  
listening mode is selected, the surround speakers produce  
no sound.  
Depending on the input signal, some listening modes  
cannot be selected. (pages 41 to 48)  
Depending on the source and current listening mode, not  
much sound may be produced by the surround speakers.  
Try selecting another listening mode. (page 41)  
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode  
(European, Australian and Asian models) The Pure  
Audio listening mode cannot be selected while Zone 2/3 is  
on.  
With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to  
playback DTS material properly even though your player is  
connected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is  
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed  
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency response  
changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recognize it as a  
genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you may hear noise.  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 59)  
Can’t get 6.1/7.1 playback  
The center speaker produces no sound  
When the Stereo or Mono listening mode is selected, the  
center speaker produces no sound.  
If no surround back speakers and front high speakers are  
connected, or the Zone 2 speakers are being used, 6.1/7.1  
playback is not possible.  
In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers output  
sound if the “Output Speaker” setting is set to “Left /  
Right”. (page 62)  
Depending on the number of connected speakers, it is not  
always possible to select all of the listening modes.  
(pages 41 to 48)  
Playing DTS program material, using the pause, fast  
forward, or fast reverse function on your player may  
produce a short audible noise. This is not a malfunction.  
Make sure the speakers are configured correctly.  
(page 59)  
The speaker volume cannot be set as required  
Check to see if a maximum volume has been set.  
(page 69)  
En-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN  
can’t be heard  
There’s no picture from a source connected to  
an HDMI IN  
Remote Controller  
Since it takes longer to identify the format of an HDMI  
signal than it does for other digital audio signals, audio  
output may not start immediately.  
Reliable operation with an HDMI-to-DVI adapter is not  
guaranteed. In addition, video signals from a PC are not  
guaranteed. (page 93)  
The remote controller doesn’t work  
Before operating this unit, be sure to press RECEIVER.  
Make sure that the batteries are installed with the correct  
polarity. (page 11)  
When the resolution is set to any resolution not supported  
by the TV, no video is output from the HDMI outputs.  
(page 57)  
There’s no sound during Whole House Mode  
Make sure you’ve selected an analog audio input.  
Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of batteries,  
or old and new batteries. (page 11)  
If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not  
support the current video resolution and you need to select  
another resolution on your DVD player.  
Make sure that the remote controller is not too far away  
from the AV receiver, and that there’s no obstruction  
between the remote controller and the AV receiver’s  
remote control sensor. (page 11)  
Video  
There’s no picture  
Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed in all  
the way. (page 18)  
The on-screen menus don’t appear  
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV  
receiver is connected is selected.  
Make sure that the AV receiver is not subjected to direct  
sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Relocate if  
necessary.  
Make sure that each video component is properly  
connected. (page 15)  
If the AV receiver is installed in a rack or cabinet with  
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not work  
reliably when the doors are closed.  
When the AV receiver is not connected to a TV via HDMI  
OUT MAIN, on-screen menus are not displayed.  
If your TV is connected to the HDMI output(s), select  
- - - - -” in the “HDMI Input” setting to watch composite  
video, and component video sources. (page 58)  
The on-screen information does not appear  
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller  
mode. (pages 11, 78)  
If the video source is connected to a component video  
input, you must assign that input to an input selector, and  
your TV must be connected to either the HDMI output(s) or  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT. (pages 15, 58)  
Depending on the input signal, the on-screen information  
may not appear when the input signal from HDMI IN is  
output to a device connected to the HDMI output.  
When using the remote controller to control other  
manufacturers’ AV components, some buttons may not  
work as expected.  
If the video source is connected to a composite video input,  
your TV must be connected to the HDMI output(s) or the  
corresponding composite video output. (page 15)  
Tuner  
Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control code.  
(page 76)  
Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is noisy,  
or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t light  
Make sure to set the same ID on both the AV receiver and  
remote controller. (page 73)  
If the video source is connected to an HDMI input, you  
must assign that input to an input selector, and your TV  
must be connected to the HDMI output(s). (pages 15,  
58)  
Can’t control other components  
Move the AV receiver away from your TV or computer.  
Listen to the station in mono. (page 38)  
If it’s an Onkyo component, make sure that the ucable  
and analog audio cable are connected properly.  
Connecting only an ucable won’t be enough.  
(page 20)  
(European, Australian and Asian models) While the  
Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the analog video  
circuitry is turned off and only video signals input through  
HDMI IN can be output. (page 41)  
When listening to an AM station, operating the remote  
controller may cause noise.  
Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.  
Concrete walls weaken radio signals.  
Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote controller  
On your TV, make sure that the video input to which the AV  
receiver is connected is selected.  
mode. (pages 11, 78)  
If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor  
antenna.  
If you’ve connected an cassette tape deck to the TV/CD IN  
jack, or an RI Dock to the TV/CD IN or GAME IN jacks, for  
the remote controller to work properly, you must set the  
input display appropriately. (page 50)  
When the “Monitor Out” setting is set to “Both”, the “HDMI  
Through” setting is only available for the HDMI OUT MAIN  
jack. (pages 57, 70)  
If you cannot operate it, you will need to enter the  
appropriate remote control code. (page 76)  
To control another manufacturer’s component, point the  
remote controller at that component. (page 76)  
En-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
If you still can’t control your iPod/iPhone, start playback by  
pressing your iPod/iPhone model’s Play button. Remote  
operation should then be possible.  
Place the AV receiver away from the devices emitting  
To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via u,  
point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be sure to  
enter the appropriate remote control code first.  
(page 77)  
electromagnetic waves on the 2.4 GHz band (microwave  
ovens, game consoles, etc.). If this does not solve the  
problem, stop using other devices which emit  
electromagnetic waves.  
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.  
To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected via  
u, point the remote controller at the component. Be sure  
to enter the appropriate remote control code first.  
(page 77)  
Depending on your iPod/iPhone, some buttons may not  
work as expected.  
When other wireless LAN devices are used near the AV  
receiver, several issues such as interrupted playback and  
communication may occur. You can avoid these issues by  
changing the channel of your Wi-Fi router. For instructions  
on changing channels, see the instruction manual provided  
with your Wi-Fi router.  
The AV receiver unexpectedly selects my  
iPod/iPhone as the input source  
Always pause iPod/iPhone playback before selecting a  
different input source. If playback is not paused, the Direct  
Change function may select your iPod/iPhone as the input  
source by mistake during the transition between tracks.  
The entered remote control code may not be correct. If  
more than one code is listed, try each one.  
If there is a metallic object near the AV receiver, wireless  
LAN connection may not be possible as the metal can  
effect on the radio wave.  
RI Dock for iPod/iPhone  
iPod/iPhone doesn’t work properly  
Try reconnecting your iPod/iPhone.  
There’s no sound  
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is actually playing.  
If there is more than one access point in the network,  
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the  
Dock.  
It is recommended to place the Wi-Fi router (access point)  
and the AV receiver in the same room.  
Zone 2/3  
Make sure the AV receiver is turned on, the correct input  
source is selected, and the volume is turned up.  
There’s no sound  
Audio can be output only when analog, NET or USB input  
source is selected in Zone 2/3.  
Bluetooth  
Make sure the plugs are pushed in all the way.  
Try resetting your iPod/iPhone.  
Music playback is unavailable on the AV  
receiver even after successful Bluetooth  
connection.  
Depending on the characteristics or specifications of your  
Bluetooth-enabled device, playback on the AV receiver is  
not guaranteed.  
The Zone 2 speakers produce no sound  
Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if “Speakers Type  
(Front)” is set to “Bi-Amp”. (page 59)  
There’s no video  
Make sure that your iPod/iPhone model’s TV OUT setting  
is set to On.  
Make sure the correct input is selected on your TV or the  
AV receiver.  
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Network  
The audio quality is poor after connection with a  
Bluetooth-enabled device.  
The Bluetooth reception is poor. Move the Bluetooth-  
enabled device closer to the AV receiver or remove any  
obstacle between the Bluetooth-enabled device and the AV  
receiver.  
Some versions of the iPod/iPhone do not output video.  
Cannot access to Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) network  
or Sound playback is interrupted and  
communication doesn’t work  
The setting of SSID and encryption (WEP, etc.) is not  
correct. Make the same settings for network and the AV  
receiver.  
The AV receiver’s remote controller doesn’t  
control my iPod/iPhone  
Make sure your iPod/iPhone is properly inserted in the  
Dock. If your iPod/iPhone is in a case, it may not connect  
properly to the Dock. Always remove your iPod/iPhone  
from the case before inserting it into the Dock.  
Cannot connect with the AV receiver.  
The Bluetooth-enabled device does not support the profiles  
required for the AV receiver.  
Cannot receive radio wave due to a bad connection.  
Shorten the distance from wireless LAN access point or  
remove obstacles for a good visibility, and try again. Place  
the AV receiver away from microwave ovens or other  
access points.  
The iPod/iPhone cannot be operated while it’s displaying  
the Apple logo.  
The Bluetooth function of the Bluetooth-enabled device is  
not enabled. Refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth-  
enabled device for how to enable the function.  
Make sure you’ve selected the right remote mode.  
(page 81)  
2.4 GHz band for wireless LAN may not be enough.  
Connect the ETHERNET port and router with the Ethernet  
cable after selecting “Wired” in “Network Connection”  
setting in “Network”. (pages 16, 72)  
When you use the AV receiver’s remote controller, point it  
toward your AV receiver.  
En-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Bluetooth connection cannot be built  
Can’t connect to the AV receiver from a Web  
The sound changes when I connect my  
browser  
headphones  
When building a Bluetooth connection between the AV  
receiver and your Bluetooth-enabled device for the first  
time, if the connection is fail, you need to power off your  
Bluetooth-enabled device and power on again to clear the  
device name, and build the connection again.  
If you’re using DHCP, your router may not always allocate  
the same IP address to the AV receiver, so if you find that  
you can’t connect to a server or Internet radio station,  
recheck the AV receiver’s IP address on the “Network”  
screen. (page 72)  
When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
Mono, Direct, or Pure Audio (European, Australian and  
Asian models).  
If there is metallic object near the AV receiver, Bluetooth  
connection may not be possible as the metal can effect on  
the radio wave.  
The speaker distance cannot be set as required  
The values entered may be automatically adjusted with  
values best-suited for your home theater.  
Check the “Network” settings. (page 72)  
If the wireless LAN and Bluetooth connections are used at  
the same time, try to connect the ETHERNET port and  
router with the Ethernet cable after selecting “Wired” in  
Network Connection” setting in “Network” for a better  
connection. (pages 16, 72)  
USB Device Playback  
The display doesn’t work  
The display is turned off when the Pure Audio (European,  
Australian and Asian models) listening mode is selected.  
Can’t access the music files on a USB device  
Make sure the USB device is plugged in properly.  
The AV receiver supports USB devices that support the  
USB mass storage device class. However, playback may  
not be possible with some USB devices even if they  
conform to the USB mass storage device class.  
(page 94)  
How do I change the language of a multiplex  
source  
Use the “Multiplex” setting in the “Audio Adjust” menu to  
select “Main” or “Sub”. (page 62)  
Music Server and Internet Radio  
Can’t access the server or Internet radio  
Certain network service or contents available through this  
device may not be accessible in case the service provider  
terminates its service.  
Depending on the type of format, the playback from a USB  
the file formats that is supported. (page 95)  
The ufunctions don’t work  
To use u, you must make an uconnection and an  
analog audio connection (RCA) between the component  
and AV receiver, even if they are connected digitally.  
(page 20)  
Check the network connection between the AV receiver  
and your router or switch. (page 16)  
USB memory devices with security functions cannot be  
played.  
Make sure that your modem and router are properly  
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.  
While Zone 2/3 is selected, the ufunctions don’t work.  
(page 20)  
Others  
Make sure the server is up and running and compatible  
with the AV receiver. (page 94)  
The functions System On/Auto Power On and  
Direct Change don’t work for components  
connected via u  
Standby power consumption  
Check the “Network”settings. (page 72)  
In the following cases, the power consumption in standby  
mode may reach up to a maximum of 8.6 W:  
The “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting is set to “On”.  
(Depending on the TV status, the AV receiver will enter  
standby mode as usual.)  
The “HDMI Through” setting is set to other than “Off”.  
The “Network Standby” setting is set to “On”.  
(pages 69, 70, 73)  
Playback stops while listening to music files on  
the server  
Make sure your server is compatible with the AV receiver.  
(page 94)  
These functions don’t work when Zone 2/3 is turned on.  
(page 20)  
When performing “Automatic Speaker Setup”,  
the measurement fails and the message  
“Ambient noise is too high.” is displayed.  
If you download or copy large files on your computer,  
playback may be interrupted. Try closing any unused  
programs, use a more powerful computer, or use a  
dedicated server.  
This can be caused by a malfunction in your speaker unit.  
Check if the unit produces normal sounds.  
If an MHL-enabled mobile device connected to the AUX  
(front) input is charged, the power consumption in standby  
mode will increase than the figure above. (page 16)  
If the server is serving large music files to several  
networked devices simultaneously, the network may  
become overloaded and playback may be interrupted.  
Reduce the number of playback devices on the network,  
upgrade your network, or use a switch instead of a hub.  
The following settings can be made for the  
composite video inputs  
You must use the buttons on the unit to make these  
settings.  
En-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
• We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any  
error or damage of network environment or access  
device resulting from the use of this apparatus.  
Confirm with the provider or access device maker  
for more information.  
On the AV receiver, press the input selector for the  
input source that you want to set and the HOME  
button simultaneously. While holding down the  
input selector button, press HOME until “Video  
ATT :On” appears on the AV receiver’s display.  
Then, release both buttons. To turn the setting off,  
repeat the above process so that “Video ATT :Off”  
appears on the AV receiver’s display, and release  
the buttons.  
• Video Attenuation  
This setting can be made for the BD/DVD,  
CBL/SAT, STB/DVR or GAME input.  
If you have a game console connected to the  
composite video input, and the picture isn’t very  
clear, you can attenuate the gain.  
Radio Wave Caution  
The AV receiver uses a 2.4 GHz radio wave  
frequency, which is a band used by other wireless  
systems as 1 and 2 described below.  
1. Devices which use a 2.4 GHz radio wave  
frequency  
Scope of Operation  
• Cordless phones  
• Cordless facsimiles  
• Microwave ovens  
• Wireless LAN devices (IEEE802.11b/g/n)  
• Wireless AV equipment  
• Wireless controllers for game systems  
• Microwave oven-based health aids  
• Video transmitter  
• Specific type of external monitor and LCD  
display  
Use of the AV receiver is limited to home use.  
(Transmission distances may be reduced depending  
on communication environment.)  
In the following locations, poor condition or  
inability to receive radio waves may cause the  
audio to be interrupted or stopped:  
In reinforced concrete buildings or steel framed or  
iron framed buildings.  
• Near large metallic furniture.  
• In a crowd of people or near a building or obstacle.  
• In a location exposed to the magnetic field, static  
electricity or radio wave interference from radio  
communication equipment using the same  
frequency band (2.4 GHz) as the AV receiver, such  
as a 2.4 GHz wireless LAN device  
Video ATT :Off: (default).  
Video ATT :On: Gain is reduced by 2 dB.  
If the picture on your TV/monitor connected to  
the HDMI output(s) is unstable, try switching the  
DeepColor function off  
2. Less common devices which use a 2.4 GHz  
radio wave frequency  
• Anti-theft systems  
• Amateur radio stations (HAM)  
• Warehouse logistic management systems  
• Discrimination systems for train or emergency  
vehicles  
To turn off the DeepColor function, simultaneously  
press the STB/DVR and 8ON/STANDBY buttons  
on the AV receiver. While holding down STB/DVR,  
press 8ON/STANDBY until “Deep Color:Off”  
appears on the AV receiver’s display. Then, release  
both buttons. To reactivate the DeepColor function,  
repeat the above process until “Deep Color:On”  
appears on the AV receiver’s display and release  
the buttons.  
(IEEE802.11b/g/n) or microwave oven.  
• If you live in a heavily populated residential area  
(apartment, townhouse, etc.) and if your neighbor’s  
microwave oven is placed near your AV receiver,  
you may experience radio wave interference. If this  
occurs, move your AV receiver to a different place.  
When the microwave oven is not in use, there will be  
no radio wave interference.  
If these devices and the AV receiver are used at the  
same time, the audio may be undesirably stopped or  
disturbed due to a radio wave interference.  
Suggestions for improvement  
• Switch off the devices which emit the radio  
wave.  
• Place the interfering devices away from the AV  
receiver.  
• The AV receiver uses radio wave, and a third  
person can receive the wave on purpose or  
accidentally. Do not use the communication for  
important or fatal matters.  
En-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Electronic device which requires cautions  
Hearing aid, pace maker, other medical electronic  
devices, fire alarm, automatic door, and other  
automatic control device.  
When using a pace maker or other medical electronic  
devices, confirm with the medical electronic device  
maker or dealer for the effect of the radio wave.  
Radio Wave Reflections  
The radio waves received by the AV receiver include  
the radio wave coming directly from the devices and  
waves coming from various directions due to  
reflections by walls, furniture and building (reflected  
waves). The reflected waves (due to obstacles and  
reflecting objects) further produce a variety of  
reflected waves as well as variation in reception  
condition depending on locations. If the audio cannot  
be received properly due to this phenomenon, try  
moving the location of the wireless LAN device a little.  
Also note that audio may be interrupted due to the  
reflected waves when a person crosses or  
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for  
signal processing and control functions. In very rare  
situations, severe interference, noise from an  
external source, or static electricity may cause it to  
lockup. In the unlikely event that this happens,  
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait at  
least five seconds, and then plug it back in.  
approaches the space between the AV receiver and  
the wireless LAN device.  
• We assume no responsibility whatsoever for any  
damages resulting from the use of this apparatus  
except in the cases deemed acceptable under the  
applicable laws and regulations.  
• Operation in all environment is not guaranteed for  
wireless LAN. The communication may not be  
possible or have desirable communication speed.  
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD  
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused  
by the unit’s malfunction. Before you record  
important data, make sure that the material will be  
recorded correctly.  
Before disconnecting the power cord from the wall  
outlet, set the AV receiver to standby.  
Precautions  
• Do not use this apparatus near an electronic device  
handling high-accuracy controls or weak signals.  
Doing so may cause an accident due to a  
malfunction of the device.  
• Do not use this apparatus in use prohibited location  
such as an aircraft equipment or a hospital. Doing  
so may cause an accident due to a malfunction of  
an electronic device or an electro-medical  
apparatus. Follow the instructions of the medical  
facilities.  
En-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
DISCLAIMER  
Video Resolution Chart  
Through this device you are able to link to other services or websites which are not under the  
control of any company which has designed, manufactured or distributed/have distributed this  
device, and its affiliates (collectively, “Company”). We have no control over the nature, content  
and availability of those services. The inclusion of any links does not necessarily imply a  
recommendation or endorse the views expressed within them.  
All information, content and services available through this device belong to third parties and  
are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws of  
applicable countries. The information, content and services provided through this device are  
for your personal, noncommercial use only. Any information, content or services may not be  
used in any manner other than previously approved by the appropriate content owner or  
service provider.  
You may not modify, copy, republish, translate, exploit, create derivative works, upload, post,  
transmit, sell or distribute in any manner any information, content or services available  
through this device, unless expressly permitted by the appropriate copyright, patent,  
trademark and/or other intellectual property owner, including, without limitation, content owner  
or service provider.  
The following tables show how video signals at different resolutions are output by  
the AV receiver.  
: Output available  
HDMI  
4K*1  
Output  
1080p/24  
1080p  
1080i  
720p  
480p/576p  
480i/576i  
Input  
HDMI  
*3  
4K*2  
1080p/24  
1080p  
1080i  
*3  
*3  
*3  
720p  
*3  
480p/576p  
480i/576i  
1080p  
*3  
Component  
Composite  
1080i  
720p  
480p/576p  
480i/576i  
480i/576i  
*3  
*3  
THE CONTENT AND SERVICES AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE ARE PROVIDED  
“AS IS”. COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT INFORMATION, CONTENT OR SERVICES SO  
PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE.  
COMPANY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,  
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
Component  
1080p  
Composite  
480i/576i  
Output  
s
1080i  
720p  
480p/576p  
480i/576i  
Input  
HDMI  
4K*2  
1080p/24  
1080p  
1080i  
720p  
Company makes no representation or warranty of any kind, express or implied, about the  
completeness, accuracy, validity, legality, reliability, suitability or availability with respect to  
the information, content or services available through this device. Company shall not be liable,  
whether in contract or tort, including negligence and strict liability, for any direct, indirect,  
special, incidental or consequential damages or any other damages arising out of, or in  
connection with, any information contained in, or as a result of the use of any content or  
service by you or any third party, even if Company has been advised of the possibility of such  
damages, nor shall Company be liable for any third party claims against users of this device  
or any third party.  
In no event shall Company be responsible nor liable for, without limiting the generality of the  
foregoing, any interruption or suspension of any information, content or service available  
through this device. Company is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to  
the information, content and services available through this device.  
480p/576p  
480i/576i  
1080p  
Component  
Composite  
1080i  
720p  
480p/576p  
480i/576i  
480i/576i  
*1  
*2  
Supported resolutions: [3840 × 2160 30 Hz], [3840 × 2160 25 Hz], [3840 × 2160 24 Hz],  
[4096 × 2160 24 Hz]  
The AV receiver is compatible with HDMI IN 1 to HDMI IN 4. However, the number of the  
player that outputs video signal at 4K resolution or the same level at the same time may  
be up to three.  
*3  
Supported resolutions for HDMI OUT SUB.  
Any question or request for service relating to the information, content or services should be  
made directly to the appropriate content owners and services providers.  
En-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Appendix  
Before Starting  
Limitation of liability  
The program and accompanying online  
Firmware Update  
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”  
(page 69).  
• Turn off the controller device connected via network.  
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.  
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB  
or servers, etc.  
To update the firmware of the AV receiver, you can  
choose from the following two methods: update via  
network, or update via USB storage. Choose the one  
that best suits your environment. Before proceeding  
with the update, please read the corresponding  
explanations carefully.  
documentation are furnished to you for use at your  
own risk. Onkyo will not be liable and you will have  
no remedy for damages for any claim of any kind  
whatsoever concerning your use of the program or  
the accompanying online documentation,  
regardless of legal theory, and whether arising in  
tort or contract. In no event will Onkyo be liable to  
you or any third party for any special, indirect,  
incidental, or consequential damages of any kind,  
including, but not limited to, compensation,  
reimbursement or damages on account of the loss  
of present or prospective profits, loss of data, or for  
any other reason whatsoever.  
Update via network  
You need a Internet connection to update the  
firmware.  
Update Procedure  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the  
remote controller.  
1
Update via USB storage (page 91)  
Please prepare a USB storage device such as a  
USB flash memory stick. You need at least 32 MB  
of available space to update the firmware.  
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.  
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.  
2
Note that the “Firmware Update” option will be  
grayed out for a short while after the AV receiver  
is turned on. Please wait until it becomes  
operable.  
See the Onkyo web site for latest information.  
Note  
• Check the network connection before updating.  
• Do not touch any cable or device connected to the AV  
receiver during the update process.  
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC  
while it is being updated.  
• Do not shutdown the power of the AV receiver while it is  
being updated.  
• The storage media in the USB card reader may not work.  
• If the USB device is partitioned, each section will be treated  
as an independent device.  
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver  
may take a while to read it.  
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which  
includes the ability to power them.  
• Onkyo takes no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or  
damage of data resulting from the use of a USB device with  
the AV receiver. Onkyo recommends that you back up your  
important music files beforehand.  
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the USB port,  
Onkyo recommends that you use its AC adapter to power it.  
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are not  
supported. Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub.  
• USB devices with security functions are not supported.  
Updating the Firmware via Network  
Select “Update via NET” and press ENTER.  
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware using  
network connection.  
3
Note that this option will not be available if there  
is no firmware file newer than the currently  
installed version. If the AV receiver is not  
connected to the internet, “Update via NET” is  
not displayed.  
Note  
• Make sure your AV receiver and TV are turned on and the  
AV receiver is connected to the Internet.  
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver while it is being  
updated.  
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI or Ethernet cable during the  
update process.  
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC  
while it is being updated.  
• Never unplug the power cord during the update process.  
• It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update.  
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update  
is finished.  
Select “Update” and press ENTER.  
The update process will begin.  
4
During the update process, the on-screen display  
may disappear depending on the updated  
program. When this occurs, you can still view the  
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.  
The on-screen display will reappear after the  
update is complete, and upon turning the AV  
receiver off and on again.  
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, indicating that the update  
has been completed.  
5
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
Case 2:  
Troubleshooting  
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
6
If an error occurs during the update process,  
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try  
again.  
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.  
Case 1:  
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote  
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV  
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the  
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the  
following table and take appropriate action.  
controller.  
The AV receiver will enter standby mode  
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether  
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.  
Case 3:  
If you do not have an Internet connection to the  
network, please contact Onkyo Support.  
Errors during an update via network  
Congratulations! You now have the latest  
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.  
Error Code  
Description  
Updating the Firmware via USB  
*-01, *-10  
The Ethernet cable was not detected.  
Reconnect the cable properly.  
The AV receiver allows you to update the firmware  
using a USB device.  
*-02, *-03,  
*-04, *-05,  
*-06, *-11,  
*-13, *-14,  
*-16, *-17,  
*-18, *-20,  
*-21  
Internet connection error.  
Check the following items:  
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask,  
gateway address, and DNS server are  
configured properly.  
• Make sure the router is turned on.  
• Make sure the AV receiver and the router  
are connected with an Ethernet cable.  
• Make sure your router is configured  
properly. See the instruction manual of  
the router.  
Note  
• Never unplug or turn off the AV receiver during the update  
process.  
• Never plug or unplug an HDMI cable or a USB device  
during the update process.  
• Never unplug the USB storage device containing the  
firmware file or the AC power cord during the update  
process.  
• Do not attempt to access the AV receiver from your PC  
while it is being updated.  
• If your network allows only one client  
connection and there is any other device  
already connected, the AV receiver will  
not be able to access the network.  
Consult your Internet Service Provider  
(ISP).  
• If your modem does not function as a  
router, you will need a router. Depending  
on your network, you may need to  
configure the proxy server if necessary.  
See the document provided by your ISP.  
If you are still unable to access the  
Internet, the DNS or proxy server may be  
temporarily down. Contact your ISP.  
• It takes up to 20 minutes to complete the firmware update.  
• The AV receiver will retain all your settings after the update  
is finished.  
Before Starting  
• Set the “HDMI CEC (RIHD)” setting to “Off”  
(page 69).  
• Turn off the controller device connected via network.  
• Turn off Multi Zone if this function is present.  
• Stop playback of contents from Internet Radio, USB  
or servers, etc.  
Others  
Retry the update procedure from the  
beginning. If the error persists, please  
contact Onkyo Support and provide the  
error code.  
• If there is any data in the USB device, remove it first.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Update Procedure  
Troubleshooting  
Case 1:  
If an error occurs, “Error!! *-**” is displayed on the AV  
receiver’s display. (Alpha-numeric characters on the  
front display are denoted by asterisks.) Refer to the  
following table and take appropriate action.  
Select “Update” and press ENTER.  
The update process will begin.  
10  
During the update process, the on-screen display  
may disappear depending on the updated  
program. When this occurs, you can still view the  
update progress on the AV receiver’s display.  
The on-screen display will reappear after the  
update is complete, and upon turning the AV  
receiver off and on again.  
Do not turn off the AV receiver and do not  
remove the USB device during the update  
process.  
Connect a USB device to your PC. If there is  
any data in the USB device, remove it first.  
1
Download the firmware file from the Onkyo  
web site. The file name is as follows:  
2
ONKAVR****_************.zip  
Unzip the downloaded file. The numbers of  
folders and files differ according to the model.  
Error Code  
Description  
*-01, *-10  
The USB device was not detected. Make  
sure the USB flash memory or USB cable is  
properly connected to the USB port. If the  
USB storage device has its own power  
supply, use it to power the USB device.  
Copy all the extracted folders including all  
folders and files to the root folder of the USB  
device. Be careful not to copy the zip file.  
3
The message “Completed!” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, indicating that the update  
has been completed.  
11  
12  
Remove the USB device from your PC and  
connect it to the USB port on the AV receiver.  
*-05, *-13,  
*-20, *-21  
The firmware file was not found in the root  
folder of the USB device, or the firmware  
file is for another model. Retry and  
download the file on the support page of  
the web site, following the on-site  
instructions. If the error persists, please  
contact Onkyo Support and provide the  
error code.  
4
Remove the USB device.  
Make sure the AV receiver and TV are turned  
on.  
5
Press 8ON/STANDBY on the front panel.  
The AV receiver will enter standby mode.  
If the AV receiver is in standby mode, press  
8ON/STANDBY on the AV receiver to light up  
the front display.  
Do not use 8RECEIVER on the remote  
controller.  
Others  
Retry the update procedure from the  
beginning. If the error persists, please  
contact Onkyo Support and provide the  
error code.  
The AV receiver will enter standby mode  
automatically in 3 minutes regardless of whether  
8ON/STANDBY is pressed.  
Select the USB input source.  
6
Now Initializing...” appears on the AV receiver’s  
display and then the name of the USB device is  
displayed. It takes 20 to 30 seconds to recognize  
the USB device.  
Congratulations! You now have the latest  
firmware installed on your Onkyo AV receiver.  
Case 2:  
If an error occurs during the update process,  
disconnect then reconnect the AC power cord and try  
again.  
Press RECEIVER followed by HOME on the  
remote controller.  
7
The Home menu appears on the TV screen.  
Select “Firmware Update” and press ENTER.  
8
Select “Update via USB” and press ENTER.  
9
Note that this option will not be available if there  
is no firmware file newer than the currently  
installed version. If the AV receiver is not  
connected to the internet, “Update via USB” is  
not displayed.  
Operating  
procedure  
(page 56)  
En-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Supported Audio Formats  
About Copyright Protection  
About HDMI  
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)  
• Multichannel linear PCM (up to 7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz,  
16/20/24 bit)  
• Bitstream (DSD, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus,  
Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD High Resolution  
Audio, DTS-HD Master Audio)  
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth  
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital  
TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a  
new digital interface standard for connecting TVs,  
projectors, Blu-ray Disc/DVD players, set-top boxes,  
and other video components. Until now, several  
separate video and audio cables have been required  
to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single  
cable can carry control signals, digital video, and up  
to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM,  
multichannel digital audio, and multichannel PCM).  
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is  
*2  
Digital Content Protection) , a copy-protection  
system for digital video signals. Other devices  
connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also  
support HDCP.  
Your Blu-ray Disc/DVD player must also support  
HDMI output of the above audio formats.  
*1  
DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface  
standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.  
HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The  
*2  
video encryption technology developed by Intel for  
HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to protect video content and  
requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the  
encrypted video.  
*1  
compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface) , so  
TVs and displays with a DVI input can be connected  
by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may  
not work with some TVs and displays, resulting in no  
picture.)  
*3  
DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel,  
Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and  
Silicon Image, this open industry group’s objective is to  
address the industry’s requirements for a digital  
connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and  
digital displays.  
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital  
*2  
Content Protection) , so only HDCP-compatible  
components can display the picture.  
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the  
following:  
Note  
• The HDMI video stream is compatible with DVI (Digital  
Visual Interface), so TVs and displays with a DVI input can  
be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable.  
(Note that DVI connections only carry video, so you’ll need  
to make a separate connection for audio.) However,  
reliable operation with such an adapter is not guaranteed.  
In addition, video signals from a PC are not supported.  
• The HDMI audio signal (sampling rate, bit length, etc.) may  
be restricted by the connected source component. If the  
picture is poor or there’s no sound from a component  
connected via HDMI, check its setup. Refer to the  
Audio Return Channel, 3D, x.v.Color, DeepColor, Lip  
Sync, 4K (up-scaling and Passthrough), DTS-HD  
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, Dolby  
TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DSD and Multichannel  
PCM.  
connected component’s instruction manual for details.  
En-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix  
modem, etc.). Please consult your ISP or computer  
dealer if you’re unsure.  
The setting varies depending on the media server or  
controller devices. Refer to your devices’ instruction  
manual for details.  
If the operating system of your personal computer is  
Windows 8/Windows 7, Windows Media Player 12 is  
already installed. For more information, see the  
Microsoft web site.  
Network/USB Features  
Note  
Network Requirements  
• To receive Internet radio with the AV receiver, your  
broadband Internet connection must be working and able to  
access the Web. Consult your ISP if you have any problems  
with your Internet connection.  
• The AV receiver uses DHCP to configure its network  
settings automatically. If you want to configure these  
settings manually, see “Network” (page 72).  
• The AV receiver does not support PPPoE settings, so if you  
have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must use a  
PPPoE-compatible router.  
Ethernet Network  
For the best results, a 100Base-TX switched Ethernet  
network is recommended. Although it’s possible to  
play music on a computer that’s connected to the  
network wirelessly, playback may be unreliable, so it  
is recommended to use wired connections.  
USB Device Requirements  
• USB mass storage device class (but not always  
guaranteed).  
Ethernet Router  
• FAT16 or FAT32 file system format.  
• If the storage device has been partitioned, each  
section will be treated as an independent device.  
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders  
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.  
• USB hubs and USB devices with hub functions are  
not supported.  
A router manages the network, data-routing and  
supplying of IP addresses. Your router must support  
the following:  
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a proxy  
server to use Internet radio. If your computer is configured  
to use a proxy server, use the same settings for the AV  
receiver (page 72).  
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows  
several networked computers to access the Internet  
simultaneously via a single Internet connection. The  
AV receiver needs Internet access for Internet radio.  
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).  
DHCP supplies IP addresses to the network  
devices, allowing them to configure themselves  
automatically.  
Server Requirements  
Server playback  
Note  
The AV receiver can play digital music files stored on  
a computer or media server and supports the  
following technologies:  
• Windows Media Player 11  
• Windows Media Player 12  
• If the media you connect is not supported, the message “No  
Storage” will be displayed.  
• If you connect a USB hard disk drive to the AV receiver’s  
USB port, we recommend that you use its AC adapter to  
power it.  
• A router with a built-in 100Base-TX switch is  
recommended.  
• The AV receiver supports USB MP3 players that support  
the USB Mass Storage Class standard, which allows USB  
devices to be connected to computers without the need for  
special drivers or software. Note that not all USB MP3  
players support the USB Mass Storage Class standard.  
Refer to your USB MP3 player’s instruction manual for  
details.  
• Protected WMA music files on an MP3 player cannot be  
played.  
• Onkyo accepts no responsibility whatsoever for the loss or  
damage to data stored on a USB device when that device  
is used with the AV receiver. We recommend that you back  
up your important music files beforehand.  
Some routers have a built-in modem, and some  
Internet Service Providers (ISP) require you to use  
specific routers. Please consult your ISP or computer  
dealer if you’re unsure.  
• DLNA-certified media server  
• The computer or media server must be on the same  
network as the AV receiver.  
• Up to 20,000 folders can be displayed, and folders  
may be nested up to 16 levels deep.  
CAT5 Ethernet cable  
Use a shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type) to  
connect the AV receiver to your home network.  
Note  
• Depending on the media server, the AV receiver may not  
recognize it, or may not be able to play its music files.  
Internet Access (for Internet radio)  
Remote playback  
To receive Internet radio, your Ethernet network must  
have Internet access. A narrowband Internet  
connection (e.g., 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide  
satisfactory results, so a broadband connection is  
strongly recommended (e.g., cable modem, xDSL  
• Windows Media Player 12  
• DLNA-certified (within DLNA Interoperability  
Guidelines version 1.5) media server or controller  
device.  
• MP3 players containing music files that are managed with  
special music software are not supported.  
En-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Appendix  
• Operation is not guaranteed for all USB devices, which  
includes the ability to power them.  
• Do not connect your USB device via a USB hub. The USB  
device must be connected directly to the AV receiver’s USB  
port.  
• If the USB device contains a lot of data, the AV receiver  
make take a while to read it.  
• USB devices with security functions cannot be played.  
WMA Lossless (.wma or .WMA)  
• Sampling rates of 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,  
96 kHz are supported.  
LPCM (Linear PCM)  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are  
supported.  
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit  
WAV (.wav or .WAV)  
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit  
WAV files contain uncompressed PCM digital audio.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and  
192 kHz are supported.  
*
Only for playback via network.  
Apple Lossless (.m4a/.mp4/.M4A/.MP4)  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz are  
supported.  
Supported Audio File Formats  
For server playback and playback from a USB device,  
the AV receiver supports the following music file  
formats.  
Variable bit-rate (VBR) files are supported. However,  
playback times may not display correctly.  
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit  
*
For playback from a USB device, sampling rates of  
• Quantization bit: 16 bit, 24 bit  
176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are not supported.  
AAC  
(.aac/.m4a/.mp4/.3gp/.3g2/.AAC/.M4A/.MP4/  
.3GP or .3G2)  
• The sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz is supported.  
Note  
• With remote playback, the AV receiver does not support the  
following music file formats: FLAC, Ogg Vorbis, DSD and  
Dolby TrueHD.  
• In the case of server playback, the above-mentioned file  
formats may not be played depending on the server type.  
Dolby TrueHD (.vr/.mlp/.VR/.MLP)  
• Sampling rates of 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz,  
96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and 192 kHz are supported.  
AAC stands for MPEG-2/MPEG-4 Audio.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz and bitrates of  
between 8 kbps and 320 kbps are supported.  
*
For playback from a USB device, sampling rates only of  
48 kHz and 64 kHz are supported.  
MP3 (.mp3 or .MP3)  
• MP3 files must be MPEG-1/MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3  
format with sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz,  
12 kHz, 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz and bitrates of between 8 kbps  
and 320 kbps. Incompatible files cannot be played.  
FLAC (.flac or .FLAC)  
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data  
compression.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, 176.4 kHz and  
192 kHz are supported.  
About DLNA  
The Digital Living Network Alliance is an international,  
cross-industry collaboration. Members of DLNA  
develop a concept of wired and wireless interoperable  
networks where digital content such as photos,  
music, and videos can be shared through consumer  
electronics, personal computers, and mobile devices  
in and beyond the home. The AV receiver complies  
with the DLNA Interoperability Guidelines version 1.5.  
WMA (.wma or .WMA)  
WMA stands for Windows Media Audio and is an  
audio compression technology developed by  
Microsoft Corporation. Audio can be encoded in WMA  
• Quantization bit: 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit  
Ogg Vorbis (.ogg or .OGG)  
®
format by using Windows Media Player.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz and bitrates of between 48 kbps and  
500 kbps are supported. Incompatible files cannot  
be played.  
• WMA files must have the copyright option turned off.  
• Sampling rates of 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz,  
16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz, bitrates of between 5 kbps and 320 kbps,  
and WMA DRM are supported.  
• WMA Pro/Voice formats are not supported.  
En-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Windows and the Windows logo are trademarks of the  
Microsoft group of companies.  
License and Trademark  
Information  
THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which  
may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
Qdeo and QuietVideo are trademarks of Marvell or its  
affiliates.  
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
THX Select2 Plus  
Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of  
THX Ltd.  
Before any home theater component can be THX Select2  
Plus certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and  
performance tests. Only then can a product feature the  
THX Select2 Plus logo, which is your guarantee that the  
Home Theater products you purchase will give you superb  
performance for many years to come. THX Select2 Plus  
requirements define hundreds of parameters, including  
power amplifier performance, and pre-amplifier  
performance and operation for both digital and analog  
domains. THX Select2 Plus receivers also feature  
proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which  
accurately translate movie soundtracks for home theater  
playback.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:  
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;  
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and  
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol,  
& DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered  
trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of  
DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights  
Reserved.  
“MHL, the MHL Logo, and Mobile High-Definition Link are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of MHL LLC in the  
United States and other counties.”  
Apple, iPod and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc.,  
registered in the U.S. and other countries.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol  
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the  
Wi-Fi Alliance.  
Apple TV is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the  
U.S. and other countries.  
Wi-Fi certified logo shows international association  
certifying interoperability “Wi-Fi Alliance” ensures the  
product has passed the test for compatibility with other  
Wi-Fi certified equipment.  
Music Optimizer™ and “WRAT” are trademarks of Onkyo  
Corporation.  
Manufactured under license from  
Audyssey Laboratories™,Inc. U.S. and foreign patents  
pending. Audyssey MultEQ®, Audyssey Dynamic EQ®,  
Audyssey Dynamic Volume® and Audyssey DSX® are  
registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories,Inc.  
“The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States  
and other countries.”  
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered  
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of  
such marks by Onkyo is under license. Other trademarks  
and trade names are those of their respective owners.  
“DLNA®, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED® are  
trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the  
Digital Living Network Alliance.”  
Onkyo does not guarantee Bluetooth compatibility between  
the AV receiver and all Bluetooth-enabled devices.  
For compatibility between the AV receiver and another  
device with Bluetooth technology, consult the device’s  
documentation and dealer. In some countries, there may  
be restrictions on using Bluetooth devices. Check with your  
local authorities.  
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from  
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.  
This product is protected by certain intellectual property  
rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology  
outside of this product is prohibited without a license from  
Microsoft.  
InstaPrevue and the InstaPrevue logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Silicon Image, Inc. in the United  
States and other countries.  
En-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Video Section  
Frequency band  
2.4 GHz band (2.4000 GHz -  
2.4835 GHz)  
FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum)  
Specifications  
Amplifier Section  
Modulation method  
Compatible Bluetooth profiles  
Input Sensitivity/Output Level and Impedance  
1 Vp-p/75 (Component Y)  
0.7 Vp-p/75 (Component PB/CB,  
PR/CR)  
A2DP 1.2 (Advanced Audio Distribution  
Profile)  
AVRCP 1.3 (Audio Video Remote  
Control Profile)  
SBC  
Rated Output Power  
All channels:  
1 Vp-p/75 (Composite)  
110 watts minimum continuous power  
Component Video Frequency Response  
5 Hz - 100 MHz/+0 dB, –3 dB  
per channel, 8 ohm loads, 2 channels  
driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a  
maximum total harmonic distortion of  
0.08% (FTC)  
125 watts minimum continuous power  
per channel, 6 ohm loads, 2 channels  
driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total  
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)  
(North American)  
Supported Codecs  
Transmission range (A2DP)  
20 Hz - 20,000 Hz (Sampling frequency  
44.1 kHz)  
Tuner Section  
FM Tuning Frequency Range  
*1  
The actual range will vary depending on factors such as  
obstacles between devices, magnetic fields around a  
microwave oven, static electricity, cordless phone,  
reception sensitivity, antenna’s performance, operating  
system, software application, etc.  
87.5 MHz - 107.9 MHz (North American  
and Taiwanese)  
87.5 MHz - 108.0 MHz, RDS (Others)  
7 ch × 170 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch  
driven of 1% (IEC)  
(Others)  
AM Tuning Frequency Range  
522/530 kHz - 1611/1710 kHz  
Preset Channel  
Maximum Effective Output Power  
7 ch × 185 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch  
40  
General  
driven (JEITA)  
(Asian)  
Network Section  
Power Supply  
AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
(North American and Taiwanese)  
AC 220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (Others)  
*
Dynamic Power  
*
IEC60268-Short-term maximum output power  
Ethernet LAN  
Wireless LAN  
Compatible standards:  
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX  
250 W (3 , Front)  
220 W (4 , Front)  
130 W (8 , Front)  
Power Consumption 6.9 A (North American and Taiwanese)  
690 W (Others)  
No-sound Power Consumption  
®
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n standard (Wi-Fi  
standard)  
WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit, WPA/WPA2-  
PSK (AES), WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)  
THD+N (Total Harmonic Distortion+Noise)  
80 W (North American and Taiwanese)  
0.08% (20 Hz - 20 kHz, half power)  
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8 )  
Security:  
75 W (230 V)  
80 W (240 V)  
(Others)  
Damping Factor  
Input Sensitivity and Impedance (Unbalance)  
Transmission frequency  
200 mV/47 k(LINE)  
Stand-by Power Consumption  
1 - 11 ch (North American and  
Taiwanese)  
2.5 mV/47 k(PHONO MM)  
0.1 W (North American and Taiwanese)  
0.2 W (Others)  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
10 - 13 ch (France)  
1 - 13 ch (Others)  
Rated RCA Output Level and Impedance  
200 mV/2.2 k(LINE OUT)  
Maximum RCA Output Level and Impedance  
2 V/2.2 k(LINE OUT)  
70 mV (MM 1 kHz 0.5% Direct)  
Frequency Response 5 Hz - 100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB (Direct  
mode)  
®
(Wi-Fi standard)  
435 mm × 175 mm × 380 mm  
17-1/8" × 6-7/8" × 14-15/16"  
Radio frequency  
2.4 GHz  
Weight  
11.2 kg (24.7 lbs.)  
Phono Overload  
Bluetooth Section  
Communication system  
Tone Control Characteristics  
Bluetooth Specification version 2.1 +  
EDR (Enhanced Data Rate)  
Maximum communication range  
10 dB, 30 Hz (BASS)  
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)  
Signal to Noise Ratio 106 dB (LINE, IHF-A)  
80 dB (PHONO MM, IHF-A)  
*1  
Line of sight approx. 15 m  
Speaker Impedance 4 - 16 Ω  
En-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
HDMI  
Input  
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 5, IN 6, IN 7,  
AUX INPUT  
Output  
Video Resolution  
Audio Format  
OUT MAIN, OUT SUB  
4K  
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio,  
DVD-Audio, DSD  
Supported  
3D, Audio Return Channel, DeepColor,  
x.v.Color, LipSync, CEC (RIHD), 4K (up-  
scaling and Passthrough)  
Video Inputs  
Component  
Composite  
IN  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME  
Video Outputs  
Component  
Composite  
OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
Audio Inputs  
Digital  
Optical: 1  
Coaxial: 2  
Analog  
BD/DVD, CBL/SAT, STB/DVR, GAME,  
PC, TV/CD, PHONO  
Audio Outputs  
Analog  
Subwoofer Pre Outputs  
ZONE2 LINE OUT, ZONE3 LINE OUT  
2
Speaker Outputs  
Main (L, R, C, SL, SR, SBL/FHL,  
SBR/FHR) + ZONE2 (L, R)  
Phones  
1 (ø 6.3)  
Others  
Setup Mic  
RI  
1
1
USB  
Ethernet  
1 (Front)  
1
Specifications and features are subject to change  
without notice.  
En-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Memo  
En-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN  
http://www.onkyo.com/  
The Americas  
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.  
For Dealer, Service, Order and all other Business Inquiries:  
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650  
http://www.us.onkyo.com/  
For Product Support Team Only:  
1-800-229-1687  
http://www.us.onkyo.com/  
Europe  
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY  
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4208-213  
http://www.eu.onkyo.com/  
Unit 19, Building 6, Croxley Green Business Park, Hatters Lane, Watford, WD18 8YH, UK  
Tel: +44 (0)8712-00-19-96 Fax: +44 (0)8712-00-19-95  
China  
(Hong Kong)  
Unit 1033, 10/F, Star House, No 3, Salisbury Road, Tsim Sha Tsui Kowloon, Hong Kong.  
Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039  
http://www.hk.onkyo.com/  
(Mainland)  
1301, 555 Tower, No.555 West NanJing Road, Jing’an District, Shanghai, China 200041,  
Tel: 86-21-52131366 Fax: 86-21-52130396  
http://www.cn.onkyo.com/  
Asia, Oceania, Middle East, Africa  
Please contact an Onkyo distributor referring to Onkyo SUPPORT site.  
http://www.intl.onkyo.com/support/  
The above-mentioned information is subject to change without prior notice.  
Visit the Onkyo web site for the latest update.  
Y1303-3  
SN 29401427EN-B  
(C) Copyright 2013 Onkyo Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 2 7 E N - B *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Internet Radio  
Using Multiple Accounts  
®
Using Internet Radio  
Pandora internet radio  
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,  
which means you can freely switch between several  
logins. After registering user accounts, login is  
performed from the “Users” screen.  
–Getting Started (U.S. only)..................... 2  
Common Procedures in Internet Radio  
Menu  
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only).......................... 3  
Note  
Press MENU while the Users screen is  
displayed.  
The following menu items appear:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.  
• Certain network service or contents available through this  
device may not be accessible in case the service provider  
terminates its service.  
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(North American only)..............................4  
You can either store a new user account, or  
delete an existing one.  
Press NET.  
1
Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 5  
Using Slacker Personal Radio...................... 6  
Using MP3tunes............................................. 7  
A list of the network services appears, and the  
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the  
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV  
receiver.  
Tip  
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user  
accounts.  
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.  
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the  
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.  
Select the desired service and press ENTER.  
The top page of the selected service appears.  
2
En-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using Internet Radio  
Delete this station:  
Pandora® internet radio  
–Getting Started (U.S. only)  
To play a station, use q/wto select the station  
from your station list, and then press ENTER.  
Playback starts and the playback screen  
appears.  
2
This will permanently delete a station from your  
Pandora account. All of your thumbs feedback  
will be lost should you choose to re-create the  
station with the same track or artist.  
Create station from this track:  
Creates a radio station from this track.  
Rename this station:  
Lets you rename the current radio station.  
Bookmark this artist:  
Pandora will bookmark your favorite artist for  
your profile on www.pandora.com.  
Bookmark this track:  
Pandora will bookmark the current track and  
allow you to buy them all from Amazon or iTunes  
in one step!  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a station to My Favorites list.  
Pandora is a free, personalized Internet radio service  
that plays the music you know and helps you discover  
music you’ll love.  
Create a New Station:  
Enter the name of a track, artist, or genre and  
Pandora will create a unique radio station for you  
based on the musical qualities of that track, artist,  
or genre.  
Use q/wto select “I have a Pandora Account”  
1
or “I’m new to Pandora” and then press  
ENTER.  
Menu Items  
I like this track:  
Give a track “thumbs-up” and Pandora will play  
more music like it.  
I don’t like this track:  
Give a track “thumbs-down” and Pandora will ban  
that track from the current station.  
Why is this track playing?:  
Discover some of the musical attributes that  
Pandora uses to create your personal radio  
stations.  
If you are new to Pandora select “I’m new to  
Pandora”. You will see an activation code on  
your TV screen. Please write down this code. Go  
to an Internet connected computer and point your  
browser to www.pandora.com/onkyo  
Enter your activation code and then follow the  
instructions to create your Pandora account and  
your personalized Pandora Internet radio  
stations. You can create your stations by entering  
your favorite tracks and artists when prompted.  
After you have created your account and stations  
you can return to your Onkyo receiver and press  
enter to begin listening to your personalized  
Pandora Internet radio.  
I’m tired of this track:  
PANDORA, the PANDORA logo, and the Pandora  
trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks  
of Pandora Media, Inc. Used with permission.  
If you are tired of a track, you can put the track to  
sleep and Pandora will not play it for one month.  
Create station from this artist:  
Creates a radio station from this artist.  
If you have an existing Pandora account, you can  
add your Pandora account to your Onkyo  
receiver by selecting “I have a Pandora  
Account” and logging in with your email and  
password.  
Tip  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
En-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Use q/wto select the menu, then press  
ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a channel, and press ENTER  
or 1to start playback.  
Using Rhapsody (U.S. only)  
2
3
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”  
Search:  
Playback starts and the playback screen  
appears.  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
1
and then press ENTER.  
You can search for music by Artist, Album, or  
Track.  
To use Rhapsody, you need an account. If you  
don’t have one yet, you can create a new  
account at  
Music Guide:  
You can play tracks from Genres, Top Artists,  
Top Albums, Top Tracks, New Releases, and  
Staff Picks.  
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,  
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo  
6, RANDOM, REPEAT  
If you have an existing Rhapsody account, select  
Sign in to your account” and press ENTER.  
Enter your user name (usually your email) and  
password in the next keyboard screen, or in Web  
Setup.  
Note  
Rhapsody Channels:  
• On Rhapsody Channels, some of the buttons don’t  
work.  
Listen to radio channels programmed by  
Rhapsody’s top-notch editors.  
Playlists:  
Menu Items  
Add track to My Library:  
Bookmark currently-playing tracks.  
Add album to My Library:  
Bookmark currently-playing albums.  
Add playlist to My Library:  
Bookmark currently-playing playlists.  
Add channel to My Channels:  
Bookmark currently-playing Rhapsody radio  
channels.  
Play your own personal playlists.  
My Library:  
Bookmark your favorite albums and tracks from  
the Rhapsody catalog using My Library.  
Account Info:  
Confirm your account information.  
Sign Out:  
Sign out from your Rhapsody account.  
Using the keyboard screen  
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user  
name and password.  
2. Select OK”.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
4. Press ENTER.  
Tip  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a track, channel or playlist to My Favorites  
list.  
Tip  
• You can remove bookmarked tracks, albums, and  
Rhapsody Channels from My Library.  
En-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Use q/wto select “Sign In”, and then press  
ENTER.  
Use q/wto select the desired channel and then  
press ENTER.  
Using the SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(North American only)  
1
3
If you have an existing SIRIUS account, you can  
sign in by selecting “Sign In”. Enter your user  
name and password in the next keyboard screen,  
or in Web Setup. If you don’t know your  
username or password, call Sirius XM at (888)  
539-7474 for assistance.  
The playback screen for the selected channel  
appears and you can listen to SiriusXM Internet  
Radio.  
Your Onkyo AV receiver includes a free trial of  
SiriusXM Internet Radio. The “Account Info” screen  
shows how many days are left in your trial. After the  
trial period expires, if you want to continue listening to  
the service, you must subscribe. To subscribe go to  
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio with your  
computer.  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
Enabled buttons: 2, 3, 7, 6  
Tip  
Menu Items  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a channel to My Favorites list.  
When you subscribe, you will be provided with a  
username and password which has to be entered into  
the AV receiver.  
Using the keyboard screen  
1. Use q/w/e/rand ENTER to enter your user  
name and password.  
2. Select OK”.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
To use SiriusXM Internet Radio, you must have your  
AV receiver connected to the Internet. Using the  
remote control, follow these steps:  
SiriusXM Internet Radio subscriptions are sold  
separately and are governed by the Sirius Terms and  
Conditions (see www.sirius.com). Be sure to read this  
agreement before you purchase your subscription.  
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are  
trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its  
subsidiaries. All rights reserved.  
4. Press ENTER.  
Please wait...” appears and then “SiriusXM  
Internet Radio” screen appears which displays  
the category available for selection.  
Use q/wto select the category and then press  
2
ENTER.  
The channel list screen for the selected category  
appears.  
En-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Profile:  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,  
and then press ENTER.  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened  
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.  
Account Info:  
Confirm your account information.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you  
love...  
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can  
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your  
account”. Enter your user name and password in  
the next keyboard screen.  
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you  
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all  
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the  
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the  
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and  
see what they like, too.  
It signs out from your account.  
Using the keyboard screen  
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER  
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your  
user name and password.  
2. Select OK”.  
or 1 to start playback.  
Playback starts and the playback screen  
appears.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an  
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio  
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.  
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at  
www.last.fm/join  
Menu Items  
I Love this track:  
4. Press ENTER.  
Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm  
Internet Radio” screen appears.  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency increases.  
Ban this track:  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency reduces.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Tip  
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-  
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without  
a computer!  
Recommended Radio:  
Discover smart personalised recommendations that  
adapt as your tastes change.  
Artist Radio:  
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of  
music inspired by your choice.  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Use q/wto select menu and then press  
ENTER.  
Adds a station to My Favorites list.  
2
Using scrobbling control  
Search Station:  
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User  
Name.  
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.  
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be  
terminated with or without notice.  
Top Artists Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.  
Top Tags Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.  
Personal Station:  
• You can play tracks from personalized station  
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and  
Your Recommendations”).  
My Library:  
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.  
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music  
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.  
Tag Radio:  
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll  
entertain you with it for hours.  
Start your free trial straight away when you create  
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to  
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest  
prices and full information are available at  
www.last.fm/subscribe  
En-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on  
the remote control.  
Using Slacker Personal Radio  
6
If you do not have an account, create one on  
the Slacker website (www.slacker.com) with  
your computer.  
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 6  
Stores information to server, making it more likely  
that the song will be played again.  
Ban Song:  
Stores information to server, making it less likely  
that the song will be played again.  
Ban Artist:  
Stores information to server, making it less likely  
that the songs from this artist will be played  
again.  
Mark Favorite:  
Adds the currently playing station to your  
favorites.  
Unmark Favorite:  
Deletes the currently playing station from your  
favorites.  
1
Menu Items  
Rate Song as Favorite:  
If you already have a Slacker account, select  
“Sign in to your account” and then press  
ENTER.  
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter  
information from the remote control or the keys  
on the main unit.  
If there are no mistakes in the information you  
have entered, use q/w/e/rto select “OK”  
then press ENTER.  
2
3
An account information confirmation screen  
appears.  
If you do not have an account, select “Access  
without Sign In” and press ENTER to use a  
restricted version of the service.  
Note that use will be restricted.  
Add song to Library:  
Tip  
Adds the currently playing track to your library.  
Delete song from Library:  
Deletes the currently playing track from your  
library.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Adds a station or song to My Favorites list.  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Use q/wto select a menu item and then press  
4
5
ENTER.  
To sign out, use q/wto select “Sign out” from  
this screen and then press ENTER.  
Use q/wto select a station and then press  
ENTER or 1to start playback from the  
station.  
The playback screen appears.  
En-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Playing Contents on the AV Receiver  
The track at the top of the music list is automatically  
played back.  
Using MP3tunes  
Tip  
Listen to your music collection on your home stereo in  
complete digital fidelity without a personal computer  
plus safely backup all your songs. Here’s how:  
Use q/wto select a track and press ENTER or  
5
• Before proceeding, you need to select the MP3tunes  
service as described in “Common Procedures in Internet  
Radio Menu” (page 1).  
1to start playback.  
A playback screen appears.  
You can control the tracks with the buttons on the  
remote control.  
Creating an Account on your Computer  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,  
1
and then press ENTER.  
Enabled buttons: 1, 3, 2, 7, 6  
From your computer, open a web browser and  
go to: www.mp3tunes.com/signup  
1
Enter the e-mail address and password you  
used when creating your account, select “OK”  
and press ENTER.  
Menu Items  
2
Go to Menu:  
Create an account.  
2
3
Displays additional menu options.  
The keyboard screen appears. You can enter  
your user name and password from the remote  
controller or the buttons on the AV receiver.  
Click the Upload link  
(www.mp3tunes.com/upload) to add files to  
your Locker.  
You can view or change your MP3tunes  
account settings by going to  
www.mp3tunes.com/account.  
If there are no mistakes in the information you  
3
View, edit and listen to your files by clicking  
on Player (www.mp3tunes.com/player).  
4
have entered, select “OK” and press ENTER.  
An account information confirmation screen  
appears.  
Tip  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Use q/wto select the menu, then press  
4
ENTER.  
Music:  
The place to find your Artists, Albums, and  
Playlists.  
Shuffle:  
Starts playing a random selection of tracks from  
your Locker.  
Search:  
Find a specific Album, Artist, or Song.  
Account Info:  
Your MP3tunes account information.  
Sign Out:  
Log out of your MP3tunes account.  
En-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Utilisation de plusieurs comptes  
®
Pandora internet Radio  
Utilisation d’une  
webradio  
L’ampli-tuner AV prend en charge plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, ce qui signifie que vous pouvez librement  
commuter entre plusieurs connexions. Après avoir  
enregistré des comptes utilisateur, l’identification est  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
–Pour commencer  
(États-Unis uniquement).......................... 2  
Utilisation de Rhapsody  
Procédures courantes dans le menu de  
webradio  
(Etats-Unis uniquement).......................... 3  
Appuyez sur MENU lorsque l’écran Users est  
affiché.  
1
Remarque  
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(Amérique du Nord uniquement) ............ 4  
Les éléments de menu suivants s’affichent :  
Add new user :  
• Les services disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de la  
région.  
• Certain services réseau ou contenus disponible via cet  
appareil peuvent être inaccessibles au cas où le prestataire  
de services terminerait son service.  
Remove this user :  
Vous pouvez soit stocker un nouveau compte  
utilisateur, soit en supprimer un existant.  
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm................5  
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio ......... 6  
Appuyez sur NET.  
1
Conseil  
Une liste des services réseau s’affiche, et le  
témoin NET s’allume. S’il clignote, vérifiez que le  
câble Ethernet est fermement branché sur  
l’ampli-tuner AV.  
• Certains des services ne permettent pas l’utilisation de  
plusieurs comptes utilisateur.  
• Vous pouvez stocker jusqu’à 10 comptes utilisateur.  
• Pour commuter entre les comptes, vous devez d’abord  
vous déconnecter du compte actuel, puis vous reconnectez  
depuis l’écran « Users ».  
Sélectionnez le service désiré et appuyez sur  
ENTER.  
2
La page principale du service sélectionné  
s’affiche.  
Fr-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Delete this station :  
Pandora® internet Radio  
–Pour commencer (États-Unis  
uniquement)  
Pour lire une station, utilisez q/wpour  
sélectionner la station dans votre liste de  
stations, puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
2
Ceci supprimera de façon permanente la station  
de votre compte Pandora. Au cas où vous  
décideriez de récréer la station avec les mêmes  
pistes ou les mêmes artistes, tous vos  
acceptations/rejets précédents seront perdus.  
Create station from this track :  
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de  
cette piste.  
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.  
Create a New Station :  
Pandora est un service de radio en ligne libre et  
personnalisé vous permettant de lire la musique que  
vous connaissez et de découvrir celle que vous  
aimez.  
Saisissez le nom d’une piste, d’un artiste ou d’un  
genre et Pandora créera une station radio unique  
pour vous en fonction des qualités musicales de  
la piste, de l’artiste ou du genre choisi.  
Rename this station :  
Vous permet de renommer la station radio  
actuelle.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « I have a  
1
Eléments du menu  
I like this track :  
Acceptez la piste et Pandora lira d’autres  
musiques similaires.  
I don’t like this track :  
Rejetez la piste et Pandora éliminera cette piste  
de la station écoutée.  
Why is this track playing? :  
Découvrez certains des attributs musicaux que  
Pandora utilise pour créer vos stations radio  
personnelles.  
Pandora Account » ou « I’m new to Pandora »,  
puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Si vous ne connaissez pas Pandora sélectionnez  
« I’m new to Pandora ». Un code d’activation  
apparaîtra sur l’écran de votre téléviseur. Notez  
ce code. Utilisez un ordinateur branché sur  
Internet et connectez le navigateur à  
Bookmark this artist :  
Pandora marquera votre artiste préféré pour  
votre profil sur www.pandora.com.  
Bookmark this track :  
Pandora marquera la piste en cours et vous  
permettra de toutes les acheter sur Amazon ou  
iTunes en une étape !  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My  
Favorites.  
www.pandora.com/onkyo  
Saisissez votre code d’activation puis suivez les  
instructions pour créer votre compte Pandora et  
vos stations webradio Pandora personnalisées.  
Lorsque vous y êtes invités, vous pouvez créer  
vos stations en saisissant vos pistes et vos  
artistes préférés. Après la création de votre  
compte et de vos stations, vous pouvez retourner  
à votre récepteur Onkyo et appuyez sur entrée  
pour écouter votre webradio Pandora  
I’m tired of this track :  
Si vous en avez assez d’une piste, vous pouvez  
mettre la piste « au repos » et Pandora ne la lira  
plus pendant un mois.  
Create station from this artist :  
Permet de créer une station radio à partir de cet  
artiste.  
PANDORA, le logo PANDORA, et l’habillage  
commercial Pandora sont des marques  
commerciales ou des marques déposées de la  
société Pandora Media, Inc. Utilisées avec  
autorisation.  
personnalisée.  
Si vous disposez d’un compte Pandora, vous  
pouvez ajouter votre compte Pandora à votre  
récepteur Onkyo en sélectionnant « I have a  
Pandora Account » et y accéder en entrant  
votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
Fr-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le menu, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un canal, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer la  
lecture.  
Utilisation de Rhapsody (Etats-Unis  
uniquement)  
2
3
Search :  
Vous pouvez rechercher des morceaux par  
artiste, par album ou par piste.  
Music Guide :  
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.  
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les  
touches sur la télécommande.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to your  
1
account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Vous devez posséder un compte pour utiliser  
Rhapsody. Si vous ne disposez pas encore d’un  
compte, vous pouvez en créer un à partir de  
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes à partir des  
genres,des meilleurs artistes, des meilleurs  
albums, des meilleures pistes, des nouveautés et  
des sélections du personnel.  
Rhapsody Channels :  
Écoutez les canaux de radio programmée par les  
meilleurs éditeurs de Rhapsody.  
Playlists :  
Permet de jouer vos listes de lecture  
personnelles.  
My Library :  
Marquez vos albums et vos pistes personnelles  
dans le catalogue de Rhapsody à l’aide de My  
Library.  
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,  
6, RANDOM, REPEAT  
Remarque  
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Rhapsody,  
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur (en général votre  
adresse électronique) et votre mot de passe dans  
l’écran clavier suivant ou dans Configuration  
Web.  
• Sur les canaux Rhapsody, certaines touches ne  
fonctionnent pas.  
Eléments du menu  
Add track to My Library :  
Marquez les pistes en cours de lecture.  
Add album to My Library :  
Marquez les albums en cours de lecture.  
Add playlist to My Library :  
Marquez les listes de lecture en cours de lecture.  
Add channel to My Channels :  
Marquez les canaux de radio Rhapsody en cours  
de lecture.  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une piste, un canal ou une liste  
de lecture à la liste My Favorites.  
Utilisation de l’écran clavier  
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre  
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.  
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».  
Account Info :  
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.  
Sign Out :  
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm  
your entries » s’affiche.  
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.  
Déconnectez-vous de votre compte Rhapsody.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
Conseil  
• Vous pouvez supprimer des pistes, des albums et des  
canaux Rhapsody marqués de My Library.  
Fr-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign In », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner le canal de  
votre choix, puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
L’écran de lecture du canal sélectionné s’affiche  
et vous pouvez écouter SiriusXM Internet Radio.  
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les  
touches sur la télécommande.  
Utilisation de SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(Amérique du Nord uniquement)  
1
3
Si vous possédez déjà un compte SIRIUS, vous  
pouvez y accéder en sélectionnant « Sign In ».  
Saisissez votre nom utilisateur et votre mot de  
passe dans l’écran clavier suivant ou dans  
Configuration Web. Si vous ne connaissez pas  
votre nom d’utilisateur ou votre mot de passe,  
appelez Sirius XM au (888) 539-7474 pour  
obtenir une assistance.  
Votre ampli-tuner AV Onkyo comprend un essai  
gratuit de SiriusXM Internet Radio. L’écran « Account  
Info » affiche le nombre de jours restants dans votre  
essai. Une fois la période d’essai expirée, si vous  
souhaitez continuer à écouter le service, vous devez  
vous abonner. Pour vous inscrire, accédez à  
l’adresse  
Boutons activés : 2, 3, 7, 6  
Eléments du menu  
Add to My Favorites :  
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio à l’aide de votre  
ordinateur.  
Permet d’ajouter un canal à la liste My Favorites.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
Lorsque vous vous inscrivez, vous devez fournir un  
nom est un mot de passe utilisateur qui doivent être  
saisis dans l’ampli-tuner AV.  
Les abonnements SiriusXM Internet Radio sont  
vendus séparément et sont subordonnés par les  
conditions Sirius (voir www.sirius.com). Assurez-vous  
de lire cet accord avant d’acquérir votre abonnement.  
Sirius, XM et tous les logos et marques afférents sont  
des marques déposées de Sirius XM Radio Inc. et de  
ses filiales. Tous droits réservés.  
Utilisation de l’écran clavier  
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret ENTER pour saisir votre  
nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe.  
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».  
Pour utiliser SiriusXM Internet Radio, l’ampli-tuner AV  
doit être connecté à Internet. Suivez les étapes ci-  
dessous à l’aide de la télécommande :  
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm  
your entries » s’affiche.  
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.  
« Please wait... » s’affiche, puis l’écran  
« SiriusXM Internet Radio » affiche la catégorie  
que vous pouvez sélectionner.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner la catégorie,  
puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
2
L’écran de la liste des canaux de la catégorie  
sélectionnée s’affiche.  
Fr-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Profile :  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Sign in to  
your account », puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Vous possédez déjà un compte Last.fm, vous  
pouvez vous y connecter pour sélectionner  
« Sign in to your account ». Saisissez votre  
nom utilisateur et votre mot de passe dans  
l’écran clavier suivant.  
Utilisation de la webradio Last.fm  
1
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de « Recently  
Listened Tracks », « Library » et  
« Neighbours ».  
Account Info :  
Vérifiez les informations de votre compte.  
Sign Out :  
Last.fm un service de musique qui apprend ce que  
vous aimez…  
Votre nouvel ampli-tuner AV Onkyo est très intelligent.  
Si vous avez un compte Last.fm gratuit, il garde une  
trace de toutes les chansons que vous avez juste  
jouées. Quand vous vous rendez sur le site Web de  
Last.fm, vous pouvez voir les graphiques personnels  
de la musique que vous avez appréciée, les partagez  
avec vos amis et également voir ce qu’ils aiment.  
Pour vous déconnecter de votre compte.  
Utilisation de l’écran clavier  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station, puis  
1. Utilisez q/w/e/ret le bouton ENTER pour  
saisir votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de  
passe.  
3
appuyez sur ENTER ou  
lecture.  
1
pour démarrer la  
2. Sélectionnez « OK ».  
La lecture débute et l’écran de lecture s’affiche.  
Avec des milliers de biographies, de revues et un  
choix infini de stations de radio personnalisées et  
sans pub, Last.fm est excellent moyen de découvrir  
de la musique. Créez aujourd’hui votre compte  
Last.fm gratuit sur www.last.fm/join  
3. Appuyez sur ENTER. L’écran « Confirm  
your entries » s’affiche.  
4. Appuyez sur ENTER.  
« Please wait... » apparait puis l’écran « Last.fm  
Internet Radio » apparait.  
Eléments du menu  
I Love this track :  
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le  
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture  
augmente.  
Inscrivez-vous et vous pourrez apprécier le meilleur  
de la radio sans pub Last.fm sur votre ampli-tuner AV  
Onkyo sans ordinateur !  
Conseil  
Ban this track :  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
L’information de la piste est sauvegardée dans le  
serveur Last.fm, et la fréquence de lecture  
diminue.  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une station à la liste My  
Favorites.  
Recommended Radio :  
Découvrez les recommandations personnalisées  
futées qui changent en même temps que vos goûts.  
Artist Radio :  
Sélectionnez n’importe quel artiste et nous vous  
jouerons une station entière de musique inspirée par  
votre choix.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un menu puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
2
Search Station :  
Utilisation du contrôle Scrobbling  
Vous pouvez rechercher une station par artiste,  
par tag ou par nom d’utilisateur.  
Top Artists Station :  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner « Enable », puis  
My Library :  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Reposez-vous de retour et appréciez les sélections à  
partir de toute la musique que vous avez entendue  
depuis que vous avez joint Last.fm.  
Tag Radio :  
Funk polonaise ? Death pop ? Pensez à un style et  
nous vous divertirons avec pendant des heures.  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des artistes les mieux  
évalués.  
Top Tags Station :  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes des tags les mieux  
évalués.  
Personal Station :  
*
Les services de webradio fournis par un tiers peuvent être  
résiliés avec ou sans préavis.  
Les services de webradio peuvent ne pas être accessibles  
dans certaines zones.  
Vous pouvez lire des pistes de votre station  
personnalisée (« Your Library », « Your  
Neighbourhood » et « Your  
Recommendations »).  
Commencez votre essai gratuit immédiatement à la  
création votre compte et découvrez par vous-même  
ce que cela fait d’avoir la musique du monde au bouts  
des doigts. Les derniers prix et les informations  
complètes sont disponibles sur www.last.fm/subscribe  
Fr-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Utilisation d’une webradio  
Vous pouvez contrôlez les pistes avec les  
touches sur la télécommande.  
Utilisation de Slacker Personal Radio  
6
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte, créez-en  
Boutons activés : 1, 3, 2, 6  
1
un à partir du site Web de Slacker  
(www.slacker.com) à l’aide de votre  
ordinateur.  
Eléments du menu  
Rate Song as Favorite :  
Permet de stocker des informations sur le  
serveur, et d’augmenter la probabilité que le  
morceau soit lu de nouveau.  
Si vous possédez déjà un compte Slacker,  
sélectionnez « Sign in to your account », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
L’écran clavier s’affiche. Pouvez saisir des  
informations à partir de la télécommande ou des  
touches sur l’appareil principal.  
Ban Song :  
Permet de stocker des informations sur le  
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que le  
morceau soit lu de nouveau.  
Si les informations que vous avez saisies ne  
comportent pas d’erreur, utilisezq/w/e/r  
pour sélectionner « OK », puis appuyez sur  
ENTER.  
Ban Artist :  
2
3
Permet de stocker des informations sur le  
serveur, et de diminuer la probabilité que les  
morceaux de cet artiste soient lus de nouveau.  
Mark Favorite :  
Permet d’ajouter la station en cours de lecture à  
vos favoris.  
Unmark Favorite :  
Permet de supprimer la station en cours de  
lecture de vos favoris.  
L’écran de confirmation des informations du  
compte s’affiche.  
Si vous ne possédez pas de compte,  
sélectionnez « Access without Sign In », puis  
appuyez sur ENTER pour utiliser une version  
restreinte du service.  
Veuillez noter que l’utilisation est restreinte.  
Add song to Library :  
Permet d’ajouter la piste en cours de lecture à  
votre bibliothèque.  
Delete song from Library :  
Permet de supprimer la piste en cours de lecture  
de votre bibliothèque.  
Conseil  
• Si vous souhaitez utiliser plusieurs comptes  
utilisateur, consultez « Utilisation de plusieurs  
comptes » (page 1). L’identification peut être  
réalisée à partir de l’écran « Users ».  
Add to My Favorites :  
Permet d’ajouter une station ou un morceau à la  
liste My Favorites.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner un élément du  
4
5
menu, puis appuyez sur ENTER.  
Pour vous déconnecter, utilisez q/wpour  
sélectionner « Sign out » depuis cet écran, puis  
appuyez sur ENTER.  
Utilisez q/wpour sélectionner une station,  
puis appuyez sur ENTER ou 1pour démarrer  
la lecture depuis cette station.  
L’écran de lecture apparaît.  
Fr-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Uso de múltiples cuentas  
®
Uso de Internet Radio  
Pandora Internet Radio  
El receptor de AV permite múltiples cuentas de  
usuario, lo que quiere decir que se puede cambiar  
libremente entre varios usuarios. Después de  
registrar las cuentas de usuario, el acceso se realiza  
desde la pantalla “Users”.  
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)............... 2  
Procedimientos comunes en el menú  
Internet Radio  
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)................... 3  
Nota  
Pulse MENU cuando aparezca la pantalla de  
usuarios.  
Aparecerán los siguientes elementos del menú:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
1
• Los servicios disponibles pueden variar de una región a  
otra.  
• Es posible que determinados servicios de red o contenidos  
disponibles a través de este dispositivo no sean accesibles  
si el proveedor del servicio da por finalizado el servicio.  
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio  
(solo Norteamérica).................................. 4  
Puede guardar una nueva cuenta de usuario o  
borrar una existente.  
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio...................... 5  
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio.................... 6  
Pulse NET.  
1
Aparecerá una lista de los servicios de red y se  
iluminará el indicador NET. Si parpadea,  
verifique que el cable Ethernet esté firmemente  
conectado al receptor de AV.  
Consejo  
• Algunos de los servicios no permiten el uso de múltiples  
cuentas de usuario.  
• Puede guardar hasta 10 cuentas de usuario.  
• Para cambiar entre cuentas debe antes cerrar sesión en la  
cuenta actual y acceder de nuevo en la pantalla “Users”.  
Seleccione el servicio deseado y pulse  
ENTER.  
Aparecerá la página principal del servicio  
seleccionado.  
2
Es-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Delete this station:  
Pandora® Internet Radio  
–Primeros pasos (solo EE.UU.)  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora en la  
lista de emisoras y luego pulse ENTER.  
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de  
reproducción.  
2
Esto eliminará de forma permanente una  
emisora de su cuenta de Pandora. Toda la  
información sobre sus aprobaciones/  
desaprobaciones se perderá si quiere volver a  
crear la emisora con el mismo tema o artista.  
Create station from this track:  
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este tema.  
Rename this station:  
Le permite renombrar la emisora de radio actual.  
Bookmark this artist:  
Pandora marcará su artista favorito para su perfil  
en www.pandora.com.  
Bookmark this track:  
Pandora marcará el tema actual y le permitirá  
comprarlos todos en Amazon o iTunes ¡con un  
solo paso!  
Pandora es un servicio de radio por Internet gratuito y  
personalizado que reproduce la música que usted  
conoce y le ayudará a descubrir música que le  
encantará.  
Create a New Station:  
Introduzca el nombre de un tema, artista o  
género; Pandora creará una emisora de radio  
exclusiva para usted basada en las cualidades  
musicales de ese tema, de ese artista o de ese  
género.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “I have a Pandora  
1
Account” o “I’m new to Pandora” y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
Elementos del menú  
I like this track:  
Si no conoce Pandora seleccione “I’m new to  
Pandora”. Verá un código de activación en la  
pantalla del televisor. Tome nota de este código.  
Vaya a un ordenador conectado a Internet y dirija  
el navegador a www.pandora.com/onkyo  
Introduzca su código de activación y siga las  
instrucciones para crear su cuenta de Pandora y  
sus emisoras de radio por Internet  
Si aprueba (pulgar arriba) un tema, Pandora  
reproducirá más música parecida.  
I don’t like this track:  
Si no aprueba (pulgar abajo) el tema, Pandora  
eliminará dicho tema de la emisora actual.  
Why is this track playing?:  
Descubra algunos de los atributos musicales que  
Pandora utiliza para crear sus emisoras de radio  
personalizadas.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.  
personalizadas de Pandora. Puede crear sus  
propias emisoras introduciendo sus temas y  
artistas favoritos cuando aparezca la solicitud  
correspondiente. Una vez creada su cuenta y sus  
emisoras, puede regresar al receptor Onkyo y  
pulsar Enter para empezar a escuchar su radio  
por Internet personalizada de Pandora.  
Si ya dispone de una cuenta de Pandora, puede  
añadirla al receptor Onkyo seleccionando “I have  
a Pandora Account” e iniciando la sesión con su  
dirección de correo electrónico y contraseña.  
I’m tired of this track:  
PANDORA, el logotipo de PANDORA logo, y la  
imagen corporativa de Pandora son marcas  
comerciales o marcas comerciales registradas de  
Pandora Media, Inc. Uso con permiso.  
Si se cansa de un tema, puede “silenciarlo” de  
modo que Pandora no lo reproduzca durante un  
mes.  
Crea una emisora de radio a partir de este  
artista.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Es-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar el menú y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y  
luego pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la  
reproducción.  
Uso de Rhapsody (sólo EE.UU.)  
2
3
Search:  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your  
1
account” y luego pulse ENTER.  
Puede buscar música por artista, álbum o  
canción.  
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de  
reproducción.  
Para utilizar Rhapsody, necesitará una cuenta. Si  
todavía no tiene una, puede crear una nueva en  
www.rhapsody.com/onkyo  
Music Guide:  
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del  
mando a distancia.  
Puede reproducir canciones por géneros, artistas  
principales, álbumes principales o canciones  
principales, novedades, selección del sitio.  
Rhapsody Channels:  
Escuche las emisoras de radio programadas por  
los principales redactores de Rhapsody.  
Playlists:  
Si ya tiene una cuenta Rhapsody, seleccione  
Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.  
Escriba su nombre de usuario (normalmente el  
correo electrónico) y contraseña en la pantalla de  
teclado que aparece a continuación o en la  
configuración web.  
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 5, 4, 7,  
6, RANDOM, REPEAT  
Nota  
• En Rhapsody Channels, algunos de los botones no  
funcionan.  
Elementos del menú  
Add track to My Library:  
Marca las canciones que se están reproduciendo  
actualmente.  
Add album to My Library:  
Marca los álbumes que se están reproduciendo  
actualmente.  
Add playlist to My Library:  
Marca las listas de reproducción que se están  
reproduciendo actualmente.  
Add channel to My Channels:  
Marca las emisoras de Rhapsody que se están  
reproduciendo actualmente.  
Reproduzca sus listas personales.  
My Library:  
Marque sus álbumes y canciones preferidas en  
el catálogo de Rhapsody, usando Mi biblioteca.  
Account Info:  
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.  
Sign Out:  
Salga de su cuenta Rhapsody.  
Utilización de la pantalla de teclado  
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su  
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.  
2. Seleccione OK”.  
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla  
Confirm your entries”.  
4. Pulse ENTER.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una canción, emisora o lista de  
reproducción a la lista Mis favoritos.  
Consejo  
• Puede eliminar las canciones, los álbumes y las  
emisoras de Rhapsody marcados de Mi biblioteca.  
Es-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign In”, y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la emisora  
Uso de SiriusXM Internet Radio (solo  
Norteamérica)  
1
3
deseada y luego pulse ENTER.  
Si ya tiene una cuenta SIRIUS, puede acceder  
seleccionando “Sign In”. Escriba su nombre de  
usuario y contraseña en la pantalla de teclado  
que aparece a continuación o en la configuración  
web. Si no sabe su nombre de usuario o la  
contraseña, llame a Sirius XM al número (888)  
539-7474 para solicitar asistencia.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción de la  
emisora seleccionada y ahora usted podrá  
escuchar SiriusXM Internet Radio.  
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del  
mando a distancia.  
Su receptor de AV Onkyo incluye una prueba gratuita  
de SiriusXM Internet Radio. La pantalla “Account  
Info” muestra los días que quedan de la prueba. Una  
vez que termine el periodo de prueba, si desea seguir  
escuchando este servicio, deberá contratarlo. para  
suscribirse vaya a  
Botones activados: 2, 3, 7, 6  
Elementos del menú  
www.siriusxm.com/internetradio con su  
ordenador.  
Consejo  
Add to My Favorites:  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.  
Cuando se suscriba, recibirá un nombre de usuario y  
una contraseña que deberá introducir en el receptor  
de AV.  
Utilización de la pantalla de teclado  
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su  
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.  
2. Seleccione OK”.  
Las suscripciones a SiriusXM Internet Radio se  
venden por separado y se rigen por las condiciones  
de Sirius (consulte www.sirius.com). Lea  
atentamente este acuerdo antes de comprar la  
suscripción. Sirius, XM y todas las marcas y logotipos  
relacionados son marcas comerciales de Sirius XM  
Radio Inc. y sus filiales. Todos los derechos  
reservados.  
Para poder utilizar SiriusXM Internet Radio, el  
receptor de AV debe estar conectado a internet. Para  
usar el mando a distancia, siga este procedimiento:  
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla  
Confirm your entries”.  
4. Pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla  
SiriusXM Internet Radio”, que muestra la  
categoría disponible para la selección.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar la categoría y  
luego pulse ENTER.  
2
Aparece una pantalla con una lista de emisoras  
de la categoría seleccionada.  
Es-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Profile:  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign in to your  
account”, y luego pulse ENTER.  
Uso de Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
Puede reproducir pistas de “Recently Listened  
Tracks”, “Library” y “Neighbours”.  
Account Info:  
Confirme los datos de su cuenta.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm es un servicio musical que sabe lo que le  
gusta...  
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Last.fm, puede  
acceder a ella para seleccionar “Sign in to your  
account”. Introduzca su nombre de usuario y  
contraseña en la siguiente pantalla de teclado.  
Su nuevo receptor de AV Onkyo es muy inteligente.  
Si tiene una cuenta gratuita de Last.fm, hará un  
seguimiento de todas las canciones que acaba de  
escuchar. Cuando visite el sitio web de Last.fm,  
podrá ver listas personales de la música que ha  
disfrutado, compartirlas con sus amigos y también  
ver lo que les gusta a ellos.  
Se desconecta de su cuenta.  
Utilización de la pantalla de teclado  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y  
luego pulse ENTER o 1 para iniciar la  
reproducción.  
1. Utilice q/w/e/ry ENTER para introducir su  
nombre de usuario y su contraseña.  
2. Seleccione OK”.  
3. Pulse ENTER. Aparecerá la pantalla  
Confirm your entries”.  
Se inicia la reproducción y aparece la pantalla de  
reproducción.  
Con sus miles de biografías, críticas y una infinita  
variedad de emisoras de radio personalizadas y sin  
publicidad, Last.fm es una forma excelente de  
descubrir música. Cree hoy mismo una cuenta  
gratuita de Last.fm en www.last.fm/join  
4. Pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá “Please wait...” y después la pantalla  
Last.fm Internet Radio”.  
Elementos del menú  
I Love this track:  
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el  
servidor de Last.fm y aumenta la frecuencia con  
la que se reproduce.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Si se suscribe podrá disfrutar de lo mejor de Last.fm  
Radio sin anuncios en su receptor de AV Onkyo sin  
necesidad de un ordenador.  
Ban this track:  
Se guarda la información sobre la canción en el  
servidor de Last.fm y se reduce la frecuencia con  
la que se reproduce.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora a la lista Mis favoritos.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego  
pulse ENTER.  
Recommended Radio:  
2
Descubra nuestras interesantes recomendaciones  
personalizadas que se adaptan a sus gustos en cada  
momento.  
Search Station:  
Puede buscar emisoras por artista, etiquetas o  
nombre de usuario.  
Artist Radio:  
Uso del control de scrobbling  
Top Artists Station:  
Puede reproducir canciones de los artistas mejor  
clasificados.  
Top Tags Station:  
Puede reproducir canciones con las etiquetas  
mejor clasificadas.  
Escoja cualquier artista y podrá escuchar una  
emisora de radio inspirada exclusivamente en su  
elección.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Enable”, y luego pulse  
ENTER.  
My Library:  
*
Los servicios de radio por Internet suministrados por  
Relájese y disfrute de selecciones de toda la música  
que ha escuchado desde que se registró en Last.fm.  
Tag Radio:  
terceros pueden cancelarse con o sin aviso previo.  
Es posible que los servicios de radio por Internet no estén  
disponibles en algunas zonas.  
Personal Station:  
Puede reproducir pistas de una emisora  
personalizada (“Your Library”, “Your  
Neighbourhood” y “Your Recommendations”).  
¿Polish funk? ¿Death pop? Piense en un estilo y  
podrá escucharlo durante horas.  
Pruébelo gratis ahora mismo. Cree una cuenta y verá  
por sí mismo lo que significa tener toda la música del  
mundo al alcance de sus oídos. Puede consultar los  
precios actualizados y toda la información que desee  
en www.last.fm/subscribe  
Es-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Uso de Internet Radio  
Puede controlar las pistas con los botones del  
mando a distancia.  
Uso de Slacker Personal Radio  
6
Si no tiene una cuenta, cree una en el sitio web  
de Slacker (www.slacker.com) con su  
ordenador.  
Botones activados: 1, 3, 2, 6  
1
Elementos del menú  
Rate Song as Favorite:  
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que  
sea más probable que la canción se vuelva a  
reproducir.  
Si ya tiene una cuenta de Slacker, seleccione  
“Sign in to your account” y pulse ENTER.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de teclado. Puede  
introducir información desde el mando a  
distancia o desde el teclado de la unidad  
principal.  
Ban Song:  
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que  
sea menos probable que la canción se vuelva a  
reproducir.  
Si no hay errores en la información que ha  
introducido, utilice q/w/e/rpara seleccionar  
“OK” y luego pulse ENTER.  
2
3
Ban Artist:  
Guarda información en el servidor, haciendo que  
sea menos probable que las canciones de este  
artista se vuelvan a reproducir.  
Mark Favorite:  
Añade la emisora que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente a los favoritos.  
Aparecerá una pantalla de confirmación de la  
información de la cuenta.  
Si no tiene una cuenta, seleccione “Access  
without Sign In” y pulse ENTER para utilizar  
una versión restringida del servicio.  
Unmark Favorite:  
Tenga en cuenta que el uso estará restringido.  
Elimina la emisora que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente de los favoritos.  
Add song to Library:  
Añade la canción que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente a su biblioteca.  
Consejo  
• Si desea utilizar múltiples cuentas de usuario,  
consulte “Uso de múltiples cuentas” (página 1). Se  
puede iniciar sesión desde la pantalla “Users”.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar un menú y luego  
Delete song from Library:  
4
5
pulse ENTER.  
Elimina la canción que se está reproduciendo  
actualmente de la biblioteca.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Añade una emisora o canción a la lista Mis  
favoritos.  
Para salir, utilice q/wpara seleccionar “Sign out”  
en esta pantalla y luego pulse ENTER.  
Utilice q/wpara seleccionar una emisora y  
luego pulse ENTER o 1para iniciar la  
reproducción de la emisora.  
Aparecerá la pantalla de reproducción.  
Es-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Y1212-1  
SN 29401478IRUS  
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 8 I R U S *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using Internet Radio  
Using Multiple Accounts  
Using Internet Radio  
The AV receiver supports multiple user accounts,  
which means you can freely switch between several  
logins. After registering user accounts, login is  
performed from the “Users” screen.  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio........................ 2  
Common Procedures in Internet Radio  
Menu  
Note  
Press MENU while the Users screen is  
displayed.  
The following menu items appear:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
1
• Available services may vary depending on the region.  
• Certain network service or contents available through this  
device may not be accessible in case the service provider  
terminates its service.  
You can either store a new user account, or  
delete an existing one.  
Press NET.  
1
A list of the network services appears, and the  
NET indicator lights. If it flashes, verify that the  
Ethernet cable is firmly connected to the AV  
receiver.  
Tip  
• Some of the services don’t allow the use of multiple user  
accounts.  
• You can store up to 10 user accounts.  
• To switch between accounts you must first log out from the  
current account, and log in again on the “Users” screen.  
Select the desired service and press ENTER.  
The top page of the selected service appears.  
2
En-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using Internet Radio  
Profile:  
Use q/wto select “Sign in to your account”,  
and then press ENTER.  
Using Last.fm Internet Radio  
1
You can play tracks from “Recently Listened  
Tracks”, “Library” and “Neighbours”.  
Account Info:  
Confirm your account information.  
Sign Out:  
Last.fm is a music service that learns what you  
love...  
If you have the existing Last.fm account, you can  
sign in to your account to select “Sign in to your  
account”. Enter your user name and password in  
the next keyboard screen.  
Your new Onkyo AV receiver is very clever. If you  
have a free Last.fm account, it will keep track of all  
the songs you’ve just played. When you visit the  
Last.fm website, you can see personal charts of the  
music you’ve enjoyed, share them with friends and  
see what they like, too.  
It signs out from your account.  
Using the keyboard screen  
Use q/wto select a station, and press ENTER  
1. Use q/w/e/rand the ENTER to enter your  
user name and password.  
2. Select OK”.  
or 1 to start playback.  
Playback starts and the playback screen  
appears.  
3. Press ENTER. The “Confirm your entries”  
screen appears.  
With thousands of biographies, reviews and an  
endless choice of personalised, ad-free radio  
stations, Last.fm is a great way to discover music.  
Pick up your free Last.fm account today at  
www.last.fm/join  
Enabled buttons: 1, 2, 6  
4. Press ENTER.  
Please wait...” appears and then “Last.fm  
Internet Radio” screen appears.  
Menu Items  
I Love this track:  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency increases.  
Ban this track:  
Track information is saved in Last.fm server, and  
playback frequency reduces.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Tip  
UK and Germany only:  
• If you want to use multiple user accounts, see “Using  
Multiple Accounts” (page 1). Login can be made  
from the “Users” screen.  
Get a subscription and you can enjoy the best of ad-  
free Last.fm Radio on your Onkyo AV receiver without  
a computer!  
Recommended Radio:  
Discover smart personalised recommendations that  
adapt as your tastes change.  
Use q/wto select menu and then press  
ENTER.  
2
Adds a station to My Favorites list.  
Search Station:  
You can search station by Artist, Tag, or User  
Name.  
Using scrobbling control  
Artist Radio:  
Use q/wto select “Enable”, and then press ENTER.  
Pick any artist and we’ll play you a whole station of  
music inspired by your choice.  
My Library:  
Sit back and enjoy selections from all the music  
you’ve heard since you joined Last.fm.  
Tag Radio:  
Top Artists Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated artists.  
Top Tags Station:  
You can play tracks of top-rated tags.  
Personal Station:  
You can play tracks from personalized station  
(“Your Library”, “Your Neighbourhood” and  
Your Recommendations”).  
*
Internet radio services provided by a third party may be  
terminated with or without notice.  
Internet radio services may not be available in some areas.  
Polish funk? Death pop? Think of a style and we’ll  
entertain you with it for hours.  
Start your free trial straight away when you create  
your account and see for yourself what it’s like to  
have the world’s music at your fingertips. Latest  
prices and full information are available at  
www.last.fm/subscribe  
En-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internetradio verwenden  
Verwendung mehrerer Konten  
Internetradio verwenden  
Der AV-Receiver unterstützt mehrere Nutzerkonten,  
was bedeutet, dass Sie frei zwischen mehreren  
Logins umschalten können. Nach der Anmeldung der  
Nutzerkonten wird das Login vom „Users“ Bildschirm  
aus vorgenommen.  
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio..... 2  
Allgemeine Verfahren bei den  
Internetradio-Menüs  
Anmerkung  
Drücken Sie MENU während der Bildschirm  
• Die verfügbaren Dienste sind länderabhängig verschieden.  
• Bestimmte Netzwerkdienste oder über dieses Gerät zur  
Verfügung stehende Inhalte stehen eventuell nicht zur  
Verfügung, falls der Service-Anbieter seine Dienstleistung  
beendet.  
1
des Nutzers angezeigt wird.  
Das folgende Menü erscheint:  
Add new user:  
Remove this user:  
Sie können entweder ein neues Nutzerkonto  
abspeichern oder ein bestehendes löschen.  
Drücken Sie NET.  
1
Es erscheint eine Liste der Netzwerkdienste und  
die NET-Anzeige leuchtet. Wenn sie blinkt,  
überprüfen Sie ob das Ethernet-Kabel fest im AV-  
Receiver eingesteckt ist.  
Tipp  
• Einige dieser Dienstleistungen lassen keine mehrfachen  
Nutzerkonten zu.  
• Sie können bis zu 10 Nutzerkonten speichern.  
• Um zwischen den Konten umzuschalten, müssen Sie sich  
zuerst aus Ihrem aktuellen Konto ausloggen und sich dann  
wieder auf dem „Users“ Bildschirm einloggen.  
Wählen Sie den gewünschten Service aus und  
drücken Sie ENTER.  
Die oberste Seite des ausgewählten Services  
erscheint.  
2
De-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Internetradio verwenden  
können. Die aktuellen Nutzungspreise und umfassende  
Infos sind unter www.last.fm/subscribe erhältlich  
Personal Station:  
Verwendung von Last.fm Internet Radio  
Sie können Titel aus einem persönlich  
angepassten Sender wiedergeben („Your  
Library“, „Your Neighbourhood“ und „Your  
Recommendations“).  
Last.fm ist ein Musikdienst, der sich Ihre  
Lieblingsmusik merkt...  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Sign in to your  
1
account“ auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie  
ENTER.  
Wenn Sie über einen bestehenden Last.fm Konto  
verfügen, können Sie sich anmelden und „Sign  
in to your account“ wählen. Geben Sie Ihre Ihre  
Benutzernamen und das Kennwort in der  
folgenden Tastaturanzeige ein.  
Ihr neuer Onkyo AV-Receiver ist äußerst clever. Wenn Sie  
ein kostenloses Last.fm-Konto eingerichtet haben, werden  
darin alle kürzlich abgespielten Titel gespeichert. Wenn Sie  
die Last.fm-Website besuchen, können Sie Ihre  
persönlichen Charts der von Ihnen abgespielten Musik  
anzeigen; teilen Sie diese mit Freunden und sehen Sie  
auch, welche Musik Ihre Freunde mögen.  
Profile:  
Sie können Titel aus „Recently Listened Tracks“,  
Library“ und „Neighbours“ wiedergeben.  
Account Info:  
Bestätigen Sie Ihre Kontoinformation.  
Sign Out:  
Verwendung der Tastaturanzeige  
Mit tausenden von Biografien, Rezensionen und einer  
schier endlosen Auswahl an persönlich angepassten,  
werbefreien Radiosendern ist Last.fm eine großartige  
Gelegenheit, um Musik zu entdecken. Holen Sie sich  
Ihr kostenloses Last.fm-Konto noch heute unter  
www.last.fm/join  
Zur Abmeldung aus Ihrem Konto.  
1. Verwenden Sie  
Ihren Nutzernamen und Passwort einzugeben.  
2. Wählen Sie „OK“.  
3. Drücken Sie ENTER. Die Anzeige „Confirm  
your entries“ erscheint.  
q
/
w
/
e
/
r
und den ENTER, um  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um einen Sender  
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER  
oder 1 , um die Wiedergabe zu starten.  
Die Wiedergabe wird gestartet und die  
Wiedergabeanzeige erscheint.  
3
4. Drücken Sie ENTER.  
Please wait...“ wird angezeigt und danach  
erscheint die „Last.fm Internet Radio“-Anzeige.  
Nur für Großbritannien und Deutschland:  
Holen Sie sich ein Abonnement und Sie können auch  
ohne Computer die besten werbefreien Last.fm-  
Radiosender auf Ihrem Onkyo AV-Receiver hören!  
Recommended Radio:  
Entdecken Sie smarte, persönlich angepasste  
Empfehlungen, die sich mit Ihrem Musikgeschmack  
verändern.  
Aktivierte Tasten: 1, 2, 6  
Menüsymbole  
I Love this track:  
Tipp  
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-  
Server gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der  
Wiedergabe wird erhöht.  
• Falls Sie mehrere Nutzerkonten verwenden möchten,  
schlagen Sie bitte unter „Verwendung mehrerer  
Konten“ nach (Seite 1). Das Login kann vom  
Users“-Bildschirm aus erfolgen.  
Ban this track:  
Titel-Informationen werden auf dem Last.fm-  
Server gespeichert und die Häufigkeit der  
Wiedergabe wird verringert.  
Add to My Favorites:  
Fügt einen Sender zu meiner My Favorites Liste hinzu.  
Artist Radio:  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um das Menü  
auszuwählen und dann drücken Sie ENTER.  
Search Station:  
2
Wählen Sie einen beliebigen Interpreten und wir  
spielen für Sie einen ganzen Radiosender mit durch  
Ihre Wahl inspirierter Musik.  
Sie können einen Sender anhand Interpreten,  
Tags oder Benutzernamen suchen.  
Top Artists Station:  
My Library:  
Lehnen Sie sich zurück und erfreuen Sie sich an  
einer Auswahl aller Musik, die Sie seit Ihrer  
Mitgliedschaft bei Last.fm gehört haben.  
Tag Radio:  
Polish Funk? Death Pop? Denken Sie an einen  
Musikstil und wir unterhalten Sie stundenlang damit.  
Scrobbling-Steuerung verwenden  
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten  
Interpreten wiedergeben.  
Top Tags Station:  
Sie können Titel der am besten bewerteten Tags  
wiedergeben.  
Verwenden Sie q/w, um „Enable“ auszuwählen und  
dann drücken Sie ENTER.  
*
Von Drittparteien zur Verfügung gestellte Internetradio-  
Dienste können unter Umständen ohne Vorankündigung  
eingestellt werden.  
Starten Sie Ihr kostenloses Probeabo direkt wenn Sie  
Ihr Konto erstellen und finden Sie selbst heraus wie es  
ist, jederzeit die Musik der ganzen Welt abrufen zu  
In bestimmten Gebieten sind Internetradio-Dienste  
eventuell nicht verfügbar.  
Y1212-1  
SN 29401479IREU  
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 9 I R E U *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote Control Codes  
While holding down the REMOTE MODE button to which you want to assign a  
code, press and hold down [DISPLAY] (about 3 seconds).  
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator lights.  
On Integra products, button names are capitalized. For example, “Remote Mode”  
button and “Display” button.  
Remote Control Codes  
/
1
2
Notes:  
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for [RECEIVER] and the multi zone button.  
• Only TV remote control codes can be entered for [TV].  
• Except for [RECEIVER], [TV], and the multi zone button, remote control codes from any  
category can be assigned for the REMOTE MODE buttons. However, these buttons also work  
as input selector buttons, so choose a REMOTE MODE button that corresponds with the input  
to which you connect your component. For example, if you connect your CD player to the CD  
input, choose [TV/CD] when entering its remote control code.  
Within 30 seconds, use the number buttons to enter the 5-digit remote control  
code.  
The REMOTE MODE button/Remote indicator flashes twice.  
If the remote control code is not entered successfully, the REMOTE MODE  
button/Remote indicator will flash once slowly.  
Notes:  
• The flashing element of the remote controller will differ according to your AV receiver’s model.  
• The remote controller is preconfigured with remote controller presets of different components.  
By entering a code from the Remote Control Code list, you can activate the relevant preset for  
that component.  
• When there are multiple codes related to one manufacturer, try and enter them one-by-one until  
it matches your component.  
• Depending on the model and year of your component, compatibility is not guaranteed.  
• With some models, the remote controller may not not work or its compatibility may be limited  
to part of the component’s functionality.  
• Besides, it is not possible to add new codes to the existing remote controller presets.  
• Though the provided remote control codes are correct at the time of printing, they are subject to  
change by the manufacturer.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Codes de télécommande  
Códigos de control remoto  
Tout en maintenant enfoncé le bouton REMOTE MODE auquel vous souhaitez  
associer un code, pressez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton [DISPLAY] (pendant  
environ 3 secondes).  
Manteniendo pulsado el botón REMOTE MODE para el cual desea introducir un  
código, pulse y mantenga presionado el botón [DISPLAY] (aproximadamente 3  
segundos).  
1
1
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote s’allume.  
Les noms de boutons sont en manjuscules sur les produits Integra. Par exemple, le  
bouton « Remote Mode » et le bouton « Display ».  
Remarques :  
Se iluminará el botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote.  
En los productos Integra, los nombres de los botones aparecen con mayúsculas. Por  
ejemplo, el botón “Remote Mode” y el botón “Display”.  
Notas:  
• Les codes de télécommande ne peuvent pas être entrés pour [RECEIVER] et le bouton multi  
zone.  
• No podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia para [RECEIVER] y el botón multizona.  
• Únicamente podrán introducirse códigos de mando a distancia de televisor para el botón [TV].  
• Con la excepción de [RECEIVER], [TV] y el botón multizona, se pueden asignar códigos de  
mando a distancia de cualquier categoría a los botones de REMOTE MODE. No obstante, estos  
botones también pueden funcionar como botones de selector de entrada; por tanto, seleccione  
un botón REMOTE MODE que se corresponda con la entrada a la cual está conectado el  
componente. Por ejemplo, si conecta un reproductor de CD a la entrada de CD, seleccione  
[TV/CD] cuando introduzca su código de mando a distancia.  
• Seul les code de télécommande de téléviseurs peuvent être entrés pour [TV].  
• À l’exception de [RECEIVER], [TV] et du bouton multi zone, vous pouvez affecter des codes  
de télécommande de n’importe quelle catégorie pour les boutons REMOTE MODE. Cependant,  
ces boutons font également office de bouton de sélecteur d’entrée : par conséquent, choisissez  
un bouton REMOTE MODE correspondant à l’entrée à laquelle vous souhaitez raccorder votre  
appareil. Par exemple, si vous raccordez votre lecteur CD à l’entrée CD, choisissez [TV/CD]  
lorsque vous saisissez le code de télécommande.  
Antes de que transcurran 30 segundos, utilice los botones numéricos para  
introducir el código de mando a distancia de 5 dígitos.  
El botón REMOTE MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará dos veces.  
Si el código de mando a distancia no se introduce correctamente, el botón REMOTE  
MODE/indicador Remote parpadeará una vez despacio.  
Notas:  
• El parpadeo del mando distancia será distinto según el modelo de receptor de AV.  
• El mando a distancia está preconfigurado con los ajustes predeterminados de los distintos  
componentes. Al introducir un código de la lista de códigos del mando a distancia se puede  
activar el ajuste predeterminado de ese componente.  
• Cuando hay múltiples códigos relacionados con un fabricante, pruebe a introducirlos uno a uno  
hasta que coincida con su componente.  
• Dependiendo del modelo y el año de su componente, la compatibilidad no está garantizada.  
• Con algunos modelos, es posible que el mando a distancia no funcione o que su compatibilidad  
esté limitada a una parte de las funciones del componente.  
2
Vous disposez de 30 secondes pour saisir le code de télécommande à cinq chiffres  
à l’aide des boutons numérotés.  
2
Le bouton REMOTE MODE/le témoin Remote clignote deux fois.  
Si le code de télécommande n’a pas été saisi correctement le bouton REMOTE  
MODE/l’indicateur Remote ne clignote qu’une seule fois.  
Remarques :  
• L’élément clignotant de la télécommande différera selon le modèle de votre ampli-tuner AV.  
• La télécommande est préconfigurée avec des préréglages de télécommande de différents  
appareils. En entrant un code de la liste des codes de télécommandes, vous pouvez activer le  
préréglage approprié pour cet appreil.  
• Quand il y a de multiples codes liés à un fabricant, essayez-les et entrez-les un par un jusqu’à ce  
que cela corresponde à votre appareil.  
• Selon le modèle et l’année de votre appareil, la compatibilité n’est pas garantie.  
• Avec certains modèles, la télécommande peut ne pas fonctionner ou sa compatibilité peut être  
limitée à une partie de la fonctionnalité de l’appareil.  
• Además, no es posible añadir nuevos códigos a los ajustes predeterminados existentes del  
mando a distancia.  
• Los códigos de mando a distancia suministrados son correctos en el momento de la impresión,  
pero el fabricante puede realizar cambios.  
• En outre, il n’est pas possible d’ajouter de nouveaux codes aux préréglages de télécommande  
existants.  
• Bien que les codes de télécommande fournis soient corrects au moment de l’impression de la  
liste, ils sont susceptibles d’être modifiés par le fabricant.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Codici del telecomando  
Fernbedienungscodes  
Tenendo premuto il tasto REMOTE MODE al quale si desidera assegnare il  
Halten Sie die REMOTE MODE-Taste gedruckt, fur die Sie den Code eingeben  
mochten, und drucken Sie (ca. 3 Sekunden lang) die [DISPLAY]-Taste.  
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige leuchtet.  
Bei den Integra-Produkten werden die Namen der Tasten groß geschrieben. Zum  
Beispiel „Remote Mode“ (Fernbedienungsmodus)-Taste und „Display“-Taste.  
Hinweise:  
1
1
codice, premere e tenere premuto [DISPLAY] (per circa 3 secondi).  
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote si accende.  
Sui prodotti Integra, i nomi dei tasti sono scritti con l'iniziale maiuscola. Ad esempio,  
tasto “Remote Mode” e tasto “Display”.  
Note:  
• I codici di controllo del telecomando non possono essere inseriti per [RECEIVER] e i tasti multi  
zona.  
• Der Fernbedienungscode kann nicht [RECEIVER] und der Multi-Zonen-Taste zugeordnet  
werden.  
• Der Taste [TV] können nur Fernbedienungscodes für einen Fernseher zugeordnet werden.  
• Abgesehen von [RECEIVER], [TV] und der Multi-Zone-Taste, können die  
Fernbedienungscodes jeder Kategorie den REMOTE MODE-Tasten zugewiesen werden.  
Allerdings dienen diese Tasten auch als Quellenwahltasten. Wählen Sie also nach Möglichkeit  
eine REMOTE MODE-Taste, die dem Eingang zugeordnet ist, an den Sie die betreffende Quelle  
angeschlossen haben. Wenn Sie z.B. einen CD-Player an den CD-Eingang anschließen, sollten  
Sie [TV/CD] wenn Sie den Fernbedienungscode eingeben.  
• Per [TV] è possibile immettere solo codici telecomando del televisore.  
• Tranne che per [RECEIVER], [TV], e per il tasto multi zona, è possibile assegnare codici di  
controllo di ogni categoria per i tasti REMOTE MODE. Tuttavia, tali tasti fungono anche da  
tasti del selettore d'ingresso, quindi scegliere un tasto REMOTE MODE che corrisponda  
all'ingresso al quale viene collegato il dispositivo. Per esempio, se si collega il lettore CD  
all'ingresso CD, scegliere il [TV/CD] quando si immette il relativo codice telecomando.  
Entro 30 secondi utilizzare i tasti numerici per inserire il codice telecomando a 5  
cifre.  
2
Geben Sie mit den Zifferntasten innerhalb von 30 Sekunden den 5-stelligen  
Herstellercode ein.  
Die REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige blinkt zwei Mal.  
Wenn der Fernbedienungscode nicht ordnungsgemäß eingegeben wurde, blinkt die  
REMOTE MODE-Taste/Remote-Anzeige einmal langsam.  
Hinweise:  
• Das blinkende Element auf der Fernbedienung unterscheidet sich je nach AV-Receiver-Modell.  
• Die Fernbedienung ist mit den Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung der verschiedenen  
Komponenten vorkonfiguriert. Indem ein Code aus der Liste der Fernbedienungscodes  
eingegeben wird, können Sie die entsprechende Voreinstellung für die Komponente aktivieren.  
• Wenn es mehrere Codes gibt, die sich auf einen Hersteller beziehen, versuchen Sie sie einzeln  
einzugeben, bis einer mit Ihrer Komponente übereinstimmt.  
2
Il tasto REMOTE MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia due volte.  
Se il codice telecomando non viene inserito correttamente, il tasto REMOTE  
MODE/l'indicatore Remote lampeggia lentamente una volta.  
Note:  
• L'elemento lampeggiante del telecomando varia a seconda del modello del ricevitore AV.  
• Il telecomando è preconfigurato con preselezioni per diversi apparecchi. Inserendo un codice  
dall'elenco dei codici telecomando, è possibile attivare la relativa preselezione per tale  
apparecchio.  
• Se sono presenti più codici relativi allo stesso produttore, provare a inserirli uno a uno finché  
non si arrivi al codice corrispondente dell'apparecchio.  
• A seconda del modello e dell'anno dell'apparecchio, la compatibilità non è garantita.  
• Con alcuni modelli, il telecomando può non funzionare o la sua compatibilità può essere limitata  
a una parte della funzionalità dell'apparecchio.  
• Dies hängt vom Modell und Herstellungsjahr Ihrer Komponente ab und die Kompatibilität ist  
nicht garantiert.  
• Es kann sein, dass bei einigen Modellen die Fernbedienung nicht funktioniert oder ihre  
Kompatibilität sich auf nur auf Teile der Funktionalität der Komponente beschränkt.  
• Abgesehen davon ist es nicht möglich, den bestehenden Voreinstellungen der Fernbedienung  
neue Codes hinzuzufügen.  
• Inoltre, non è possibile aggiungere nuovi codici alle preselezioni esistenti del telecomando.  
• I codici telecomando specificati sono validi alla data della stampa del presente documento, ma  
sono soggetti a variazioni da parte del produttore.  
• Obwohl die angegebenen Fernbedienungscodes dem Stand bei Drucklegung entsprechen, sind  
Änderungen durch den Hersteller vorbehalten.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Afstandsbedieningscodes  
Fjärrstyrningskoder  
Houd terwijl u de REMOTE MODE toets ingedrukt houdt waarvoor u een code  
Håll ned knappen för det REMOTE MODE som du vill tilldela en kod samtidigt  
som du trycker och håller ned [DISPLAY] (i cirka 3 sekunder).  
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa.  
På Integra-produkter, är knappnamnens begynnelsebokstav en versal. Till exempel,  
”Fjärrläge”-knapp och ”Display”-knapp.  
1
1
wilt toewijzen de [DISPLAY] toets ingedrukt (ongeveer 3 seconden).  
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje  
afstandsbediening gaat branden.  
Op producten van Integra staan de namen van de toetesn in hoofdletters. Bijvoorbeeld,  
de toetsen “Remote Mode” en “Display”.  
Anmärkningar:  
Opmerkingen:  
• Fjärrkontrollkoder kan inte anges för knapparna [RECEIVER] och flerzonsknappen.  
• Endast fjärrkontrollkoder för tv kan anges för [TV].  
• Er kunnen geen afstandsbedieningscodes worden ingevoerd voor [RECEIVER] en de multi  
zone-toets.  
• Förutom [RECEIVER], [TV] och flerzonsknappen, kan fjärrkontrollkoder för vilken som helst  
kategori tilldelas för knapparna REMOTE MODE. Dessa knappar fungerar dock även som  
ingångväljarknappar, så använd en knapp för REMOTE MODE som motsvarar ingången som  
du ansluter utrustningen till. Till exempel, om du ansluter din CD-spelare till CD-ingången ska  
du välja [TV/CD] när du anger dess fjärrkontrollkod.  
• Alleen TV afstandsbedieningscodes kunnen worden ingevoerd voor [TV].  
• Behalve voor [RECEIVER], [TV] en de multi zone-toets, kunnen afstandsbedieningscodes  
vanuit elke categorie worden toegewezen aan de REMOTE MODE toetsen. Deze toetsen  
werken overigens ook als ingangsselectortoetsen, kies dus een REMOTE MODE toets die  
overeenkomt met de ingang waarop u uw component wilt aansluiten. Kies indien u bijvoorbeeld  
uw CD-speler aansluit op de CD-ingang de [TV/CD] toets bij het invoeren van de  
afstandsbedieningscode.  
Använd sifferknapparna för att ange den femsiffriga koden inom 30 sekunder.  
REMOTE MODE-knapp/Fjärrindikatorlampa blinkar två gånger.  
Om fjärrkontrollkoden inte ställdes in, blinkar REMOTE MODE-  
knappen/fjärrindikatorn långsamt en gång.  
2
Gebruik binnen 30 seconden de cijfertoetsen om de 5-cijferige  
afstandsbedieningscode in te voeren.  
2
Anmärkningar:  
De toets REMOTE MODE (afstandsbedieningsmodus) / Het indicatielampje  
afstandsbediening knippert tweemaal.  
Indien de afstandsbedieningscode niet met succes wordt ingevoerd, zal de toets  
REMOTE MODE/Remote-indicator eenmaal traag knipperen.  
Opmerkingen:  
• Het knippergedeelte van de afstandsbediening zal verschillen ten opzichte van het model van  
uw AV-receiver.  
• De afstandsbediening is voorgeprogrammeerd met voorkeuzetoetsen van verschillende  
componenten. Door het invullen van een code uit de afstandsbediening codelijst kunt u de  
voorkeuzetoets voor die component activeren.  
• Det blinkande elementet på fjärrkontrollen skiljer sig åt beroende på din modell av AV-receiver.  
• Fjärrkontrollen har förkonfigurerats med förvalda kanaler på fjärrkontrollen för olika  
komponenter. Genom att ange en kod från fjärrkontrollkodlistan, kan du aktivera relevanta  
förvalda kanaler för den utrustningen.  
• När det finns flera olika koder för en tillverkare ska du försöka att ange dem en och en tills de  
stämmer överens med din utrustning.  
• Beroende på utrustningens modell och årgång, går det inte att garantera kompatibilitet.  
• På vissa modeller kan det hända att fjärrkontrollen inte fungerar eller så kan dess kompatibilitet  
vara begränsad till en del av utrustningens funktion.  
• Dessutom går det inte att lägga till nya koder till fjärrkontrollens existerande förvalda kanaler.  
• Även om erhållna fjärrkontrollkoder är korrekta vid tryckningen, kan de ändras av tillverkaren.  
• Wanneer er meerdere codes gerelateerd zijn aan één fabrikant, probeer deze dan een voor een  
totdat de juiste code overeenkomt met uw component.  
• Afhankelijk van het model en het bouwjaar van uw component is de compatibiliteit niet  
gegarandeerd.  
• Bij sommige modellen werkt de afstandsbediening mogelijk niet of is de compatibiliteit ervan  
beperkt tot een deel van de functionaliteit van de component.  
Daarnaast is het niet mogelijk om nieuwe codes aan de bestaande voorkeuzetoetsen van de  
afstandsbediening toe te voegen.  
• Hoewel de gegeven afstandsbedieningscodes correct zijn op het moment van afdrukken, kunnen  
deze door de fabrikant gewijzigd worden.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
遙控代碼  
在按住想指定編碼的 REMOTE MODE (遙控模式)按鈕時,同時按住  
遥控代码  
按住想指定编码的 REMOTE MODE遥控模式)按钮的同时,按[DISPLAY  
(显示)]大约 3 秒钟。  
1
1
[DISPLAY] (顯示約 3 秒。  
REMOTE MODE (遙控模式)按鈕 / 遙控指示燈亮起。  
在 Integra 系列產品上,按鈕名稱為大寫。例如Remote Mode遙控模式)  
按鈕和 「Display顯示)按鈕。  
REMOTE MODE遥控模式)按/控指示灯亮起。  
Integra 产品上的按钮名称单词首字母大写。例如Remote Mode遥控模  
按钮Display显示按钮。  
注意:  
注意:  
[RECEIVER接收机)]多区域按钮不能输入遥控编码。  
只能[TV电视)]入电视遥控编码。  
[RECEIER] (接收機)和多區域按鈕不能輸入遙控編碼。  
您只能為 [TV] (電視)輸入電視遙控編碼。  
除 [RECEIVER] (接收機[TV] (電視)和多區域按鈕外,您可針對 REMOTE MODE  
(遙控模式)按鈕指定任何類別的遙控編碼。但是,這些按鈕仍可用作為輸入選擇器按  
鈕,因此,請選擇與您設備所連接輸入接口對應的 REMOTE MODE 按鈕。例如,如果  
要將 CD 播放機連接到 CD 輸入源上,則需在輸入遙控編碼時選擇 [TV/CD]。  
[RECEIVER接收机)]、[TV电视)]多区域按钮外,不能为 REMOTE MODE遥  
控模式)按钮指定任何类别的遥控编码是,这些按钮仍可用作输入选择器按钮,因  
择与设备所要连接的输入端对应的 REMOTE MODE(遥控模式果  
要将 CD 播放机连接到 CD 输入端,应在输入遥控编码时选[TV/CD/CD)]。  
在 30 秒內,使用數字按鈕輸入 5 位數的遙控編碼。  
REMOTE MODE (遙控模式)按鈕 / 遙控指示燈閃爍兩次。  
如果無法成功輸入遙控編碼,REMOTE MODE (遙控模式)按鈕 / 遙控指示燈  
會慢慢地閃爍一次。  
REMOTE MODE遥控模式)按/控指示灯闪烁两次。  
如果不能顺利输入遥控编码,REMOTE MODE遥控模式)按/控指示灯会  
缓慢闪烁一次。  
2
2
注意:  
注意:  
視您的 AV 接收機型號而定,遙控器的閃爍元件會有不同。  
遙控器已預先設定有不同設備的遙控器預設值。透過輸入遙控編碼清單中的編碼,您  
可啟用該設備的相關預設值。  
根据 AV 接收机产品类型的不同,遥控器闪烁元素将会不同。  
遥控器采用不同设备的遥控器预设进行预配置。通过从遥控器编码列表输入编码,便  
可激活相应设备的相关预设。  
當有多個編碼與單一製造商相關時,請嘗試一個接著一個輸入,直到與您的設備對應  
為止。  
单个制造商关联多个编码时,请尝试逐个输入,直至符合当前设备。  
根据设备的产品类型和年份的不同,无法保证兼容性。  
視設備的型號和年份而定,並不保證與本公司產品相容。  
在某些型號上,遙控器可能無法作用,或是其相容性限於部份設備功能。  
除此之外,您無法新增編碼至現有的遙控器預設值。  
对于某些产品类型,遥控器可能无法工作或其兼容性可能受到部分设备功能性的限制。  
此外,可能无法将新的编码追加到现有的遥控器预设。  
尽管付印时所提供的遥控编码是正确的,但制造商会随时更改。  
雖然所提供之遙控編碼在本文件列印時為正確,製造商仍可能會對其作出修改。  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Cable/PVR Combination  
Cable Set Top Box  
ADB  
Cable Set Top Box  
Neuf TV  
Noos  
Cable Set Top Box  
Visiopass  
02254, 02769  
02769  
03107  
00817  
01376  
01877  
Time Warner  
UPC  
01376, 01877, 02187  
01582  
Aon  
00817  
VTR  
Arris  
02187  
NTL  
01068, 01060  
02767  
WideOpenWest  
Ziggo  
Videotron  
VTR  
01877  
AT&T  
00858  
Numericable  
Ono  
00660, 01666, 02015,  
02142, 02447, 02774  
01376  
Bright House  
BT Vision  
Cable & Wireless  
Cable One  
Cablecom  
Cablevision  
Charter  
01376, 01877  
02294  
01068, 01562  
01060  
WideOpenWest  
Ziggo  
01877  
Optus  
02142  
Cable/PVR Combination  
01068  
Orange  
Pace  
00817  
Arris  
02187  
IPTV  
01376, 01877  
01582  
01376, 01877, 01068,  
01060, 01982  
Bright House  
Cable One  
Cablevision  
Charter  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877, 02187  
01877, 01982  
ADB  
02254, 02769  
02769  
Panasonic  
Philips  
01488, 01982  
Aon  
01376, 01877  
01376, 01877, 02187  
00817, 01582, 02294,  
02767  
AT&T  
BT Vision  
Canal+  
Cisco  
00858  
02294  
Cisco  
01877, 00858, 01982,  
02345, 02378  
Pioneer  
RCN  
01877, 01500  
01376  
Cisco  
02657  
Comcast  
01376, 01877, 01982,  
02187  
Com Hem  
Comcast  
00817, 00660, 01666,  
02015, 02447  
00858, 02345, 02378  
01385  
Rogers  
Sagem  
Samsung  
01877  
Kreatel  
mio TV  
Motorola  
Cox  
01376, 01877  
02187  
01376, 01877, 01982,  
02187  
00817  
02802  
Digeo  
01877, 01060, 01666,  
02015, 02774  
01376, 00858, 01998,  
02378  
Cox  
01376, 01877  
01877  
Freebox  
Humax  
01482  
Daeryung  
Digeo  
Scientific Atlanta  
01877, 00858, 01982,  
02345  
02142, 03051, 03053  
01376, 01877  
03051, 03053  
01877  
Neuf TV  
Pace  
03107  
02187  
Insight  
02657  
SFR  
03107  
DX Antenna  
France Telecom  
Freebox  
Fujitsu  
01500  
J:COM  
Scientific Atlanta  
SFR  
00858, 02345  
03107  
Shaw  
01376  
00817  
Knology  
Mediacom  
Motorola  
Moxi  
SingTel  
Sony  
01998, 02802  
01460  
01482  
01376, 01877  
01376  
SingTel  
01998, 02802  
01385  
01497  
TeliaSonera  
Telus  
Stofa  
02015  
Humax  
00660, 02142, 02447,  
03051, 03053  
02187  
02345  
Suddenlink  
Sumitomo  
Telewest  
TeliaSonera  
Telus  
01376, 01877  
01500  
Numericable  
Pace  
02767  
Thomson  
Verizon  
02769  
Insight  
01376, 01877  
03051, 03053  
01877  
01877  
02378  
J:COM  
01068  
Panasonic  
Philips  
01982  
Knology  
Kreatel  
01385  
01582, 02767  
01877  
IPTV/PVR Combination  
01385  
02345  
Pioneer  
ADB  
02769  
Macab  
00817  
Thomson  
Time Warner  
Toshiba  
UPC  
01582, 01982, 02769  
01376, 01877, 02187  
01509  
Rogers  
01877  
Aon  
02769  
Mediacom  
mio TV  
Motorola  
01376, 01877  
02802  
Samsung  
Scientific Atlanta  
Shaw  
01877  
AT&T  
BT Vision  
Cisco  
00858  
01877, 01982  
01376  
02294  
01376, 00858, 01562,  
01982, 01998, 02378  
01582  
00858, 02345, 02378  
01385  
Verizon  
Videotron  
Virgin Media  
02378  
Suddenlink  
Thomson  
01376, 01877  
01582  
Kreatel  
Motorola  
Moxi  
NEC  
02187  
01496  
01877  
00858, 02378  
01068, 01060  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
IPTV/PVR Combination  
CD  
CD  
MD  
Neuf TV  
Philips  
03107  
Harman/Kardon  
Hitachi  
Integra  
JVC  
70157  
Rotel  
70157  
Onkyo  
Sony  
70868  
02294  
00858  
03107  
02378  
70032  
SAE  
70157  
70490, 70000  
72977  
Scientific Atlanta  
SFR  
71817, 70101  
70072  
Sansui  
70157  
TEAC  
Yamaha  
SAST  
70157  
70490  
Verizon  
Kenwood  
Krell  
70626, 70157, 70036  
70157  
Siemens  
Silsonic  
Simaudio  
Sonic Frontiers  
Sony  
70157  
Cassette Deck  
Aiwa  
70036  
CD/Cassette Dock  
40029  
40076  
40029  
40029  
40076  
40029  
40029  
40070  
40244  
40070  
40029  
40029  
40029  
42157  
40027  
40029  
40027  
40029  
40029  
40027  
40029  
40029  
40243  
40029  
40244  
40027, 40029  
40097  
Linn  
70157  
70157  
TASCAM  
73095  
Arcam  
Loewe  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Matsui  
MCS  
70157  
70157  
Audiolab  
Carver  
70157  
70490, 70000  
70157  
CD  
70626, 70029, 70157  
70157  
Sylvania  
TAG McLaren  
Tandy  
Advantage  
AH!  
70032  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70157  
Denon  
70157  
Grundig  
Harman/Kardon  
Inkel  
70029  
70032  
Aiwa  
Memorex  
Meridian  
Micromega  
Miro  
70032  
TASCAM  
TEAC  
73533, 73095  
73531, 73551, 73532  
70029, 70303  
70157  
Arcam  
70157  
Atoll Electronique  
Audio Research  
Audiolab  
Audiomeca  
Audioton  
AVI  
JVC  
70157  
Technics  
Thorens  
Thule Audio  
Traxdata  
Universum  
Victor  
Kenwood  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Myryad  
Onkyo  
70000  
Mission  
Myryad  
NAD  
70157  
70157  
70157  
70626  
70000, 70721  
70157  
70157  
Naim  
70072  
Balanced Audio  
Technology  
Optimus  
Philips  
NSM  
70157  
Wards  
70000, 70032, 70157  
70490, 70032, 70036  
70157  
Onkyo  
Optimus  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Primare  
Proton  
71817  
Yamaha  
Zonda  
Cairn  
70157  
Pioneer  
Polk Audio  
Radiola  
RCA  
70000, 70032  
70029, 70303  
70626, 70157  
70032, 70101  
70157  
California Audio Labs 70029, 70303  
Cambridge  
Cambridge Audio  
Carver  
70157  
CD-R  
70157  
Denon  
JVC  
70626, 70766  
70072  
70157  
Revox  
CCE  
70157  
Kenwood  
Marantz  
Onkyo  
Philips  
Sony  
70626  
Sansui  
70157  
Cyrus  
70157  
70626  
Sony  
70157  
Denon  
70626, 70766  
70000  
71323  
Thorens  
Victor  
QED  
70157  
DKK  
70626  
Quad  
70157  
DMX Electronics  
Dynaco  
70157  
70000  
Wards  
Quasar  
Radiola  
RCA  
70029  
70157  
TASCAM  
71830, 72304  
Yamaha  
70157  
Genexxa  
Goldmund  
Grundig  
70000, 70032  
70157  
70032  
CD-R/MD  
Accessory  
Restek  
Revox  
70157  
70157  
TASCAM  
73511  
Apple  
81115  
70157  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Accessory  
Jamo  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
82228  
Alba  
01284  
Centrex  
CGV  
01457  
Durabrand  
Echostar  
01284  
Logitech  
Onkyo  
82182  
Allvision  
Amstrad  
01334  
01413, 01567  
01334, 01626  
01176  
00775, 00853, 01323,  
01409, 02527  
82990, 81993, 82351  
82228  
00847, 01175, 01662,  
01693  
Chess  
Eco-Star  
Edision  
01413  
Polk Audio  
CityCom  
Clatronic  
Clayton  
Com Hem  
Comag  
Comsat  
Coship  
Crown  
Ansonic  
Arnion  
02418  
01631  
01413  
01300  
Elap  
01413, 01567  
02418  
Video - Accessory  
ADB  
01626  
ASCI  
01334  
Elbe  
02254, 02769  
02769  
01176, 01915  
01413  
AssCom  
Astro  
00853  
Energy Sistem  
Engel  
01631, 02418  
01251  
Aon  
00173, 01100  
02418  
Apple  
02615  
01413  
Atlanta  
Atsat  
EuroLine  
Europhon  
Europsat  
Expressvu  
Fagor  
01251  
AT&T  
00858  
01457  
01300  
01334  
BT Vision  
Canal+  
02294  
01284  
AtSky  
01334  
01413, 01611  
00775  
02657  
CS  
01631  
Audiola  
Aurora  
02418  
Cisco  
00858, 02345, 02378  
01385  
Cyfra+  
Cyfrowy Polsat  
D-box  
01409  
00879, 00642, 01433  
00879, 00642, 01259  
01631  
01611  
Kreatel  
00853, 02527  
00723, 01114  
01626  
Austar  
Ferguson  
Finlux  
01291  
mio TV  
Motorola  
02802  
Avanit  
01626  
01376, 00858, 01998,  
02378  
Dantax  
Denver  
Dgtec  
Awa  
02418  
Fly Com  
FMD  
01457  
02418  
Neuf TV  
Pace  
03107  
Axil  
01413, 01457, 02418  
01626  
01413, 01457  
00879, 01176, 01356  
02408  
01631, 02418  
02418  
02657  
Axitronic  
Balmet  
Bell ExpressVu  
Belson  
Foxtel  
Dick Smith  
Electronics  
Philips  
02294  
01457  
Freesat  
Scientific Atlanta  
SFR  
00858, 02345  
03107  
00775  
Digi Raum Electronics 01176  
Fuba  
00173, 01251  
00853, 00879  
01176  
02418  
Digiality  
Digihome  
DigiLogic  
DigiQuest  
Digisky  
01334  
Galaxis  
SingTel  
TeliaSonera  
Telus  
01998, 02802  
01385  
Big Sat  
Black Diamond  
Blaupunkt  
Boshmann  
Boston  
01457  
01284  
General Satellite  
Globo  
01284  
01284  
01251, 01334, 01626  
00775  
02345  
00173  
01300, 01457, 01631  
01457  
GOI  
Thomson  
Verizon  
02769  
01413, 01631  
01251  
Gold Box  
Gold Vision  
GoldMaster  
Goodmans  
Gradiente  
Grandin  
Grocos  
00853  
02378  
DigitalBox  
Digiwave  
DirecTV  
Dish Network  
Dishpro  
01100, 01631  
01631  
01631  
Boxer  
01458  
01334  
Receiver  
British Sky  
00847, 01175, 01662  
01377, 00099  
00775  
01284, 01291  
00099, 00887  
01626  
Onkyo  
52503  
Broadcasting  
BskyB  
00847, 01175, 01662  
01284, 01291, 01626  
00853, 01334  
00775  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Bush  
DishTV  
01300  
01409, 01457  
@sat  
01300  
Canal Digital  
Canal Satellite  
Canal+  
DRE  
01176  
Grundig  
00847, 00853, 00173,  
00879, 01284, 01291  
@Sky  
01334  
00853, 02657  
Dream Multimedia  
DSE  
01237  
Acoustic Solutions  
ADB  
01284  
00853, 02657  
Haier  
Hallo  
02418  
01626  
02280, 02418  
00879, 00642, 01433  
00642, 00887, 01259  
01626  
CanalSat  
00853, 02657  
DSTV  
Akura  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Hama  
01567  
Leiko  
01626  
Pace  
00847, 00853, 00887,  
01175, 01323, 01356,  
01423, 01662, 01693,  
01850, 02059, 02060,  
02211, 02657  
Sat Industrie  
SAT+  
01611  
Hanseatic  
Hirschmann  
Hitachi  
Hornet  
01100  
00173  
01284  
01300  
00775  
Lemon  
01334  
01409  
Lenoxx  
Linsar  
01611  
Satplus  
01100  
01284  
SatyCon  
01631  
Listo  
01626  
Schaub Lorenz  
Schneider  
Schwaiger  
Sedea Electronique  
SEG  
02418  
Pacific  
01284  
HTS  
Lodos  
01284  
01206, 01251  
01334, 01457, 01631  
01206, 01626  
01251, 01284, 01626  
01611  
Palcom  
Panasat  
Panasonic  
01409, 01611  
00879, 01433  
Humax  
01377, 01176, 01427,  
01675, 01808, 01882,  
01915, 02144, 02408,  
02616  
Logik  
01284  
Macab  
00853  
00847, 01304, 01404,  
03099  
Manhattan  
Maspro  
Matsui  
01300  
Panda  
Pass  
00173  
00173  
Servimat  
ServiSat  
ID Digital  
ID Sat  
01176  
01567  
00173, 01284, 01626  
01334  
01251  
01334  
peeKTon  
Philips  
01457, 02418  
Maximum  
Mediabox  
Mediacom  
MediaSat  
Medion  
MegaSat  
Metronic  
Shark  
01631  
ILLUSION sat  
Imperial  
Indovision  
iNETBOX  
Inno Hit  
Innova  
01631  
01114, 00887, 00133,  
02211  
00853  
Sherwood  
Siemens  
01409  
01195, 01334  
00887  
01206  
00173, 01334, 01626,  
02418  
00853  
01237  
Phoenix  
Pino  
02418  
Sigmatek  
SKY  
02418  
01334, 01626  
01631  
01626  
01334  
00099, 00847, 00887,  
01175, 01662, 01693,  
01850, 02754  
00099  
Pioneer  
PMB  
00853, 01308  
01611  
01334, 01413, 01631,  
02418  
inVion  
02418  
iotronic  
01413  
SKY Brazil  
SKY Deutschland  
SKY Italia  
00887  
Premiere  
Pro Basic  
Proline  
QNS  
00723  
Metz  
00173  
ISkyB  
00887  
02754  
00853  
Moserbaer  
Movistar  
Multichoice  
01251  
ITT  
02418  
00853, 01693, 01850  
02211  
01284  
02527, 02761  
ITT Nokia  
Jadeworld  
Jaeger  
00723  
SKY New Zealand  
SKY PerfecTV!  
Sky XL  
01404  
00879, 00642, 01433,  
02059, 02060  
00642  
02299, 02616, 03099  
01251  
RCA  
01291  
01334  
Regal  
01251  
MySky  
NEOTION  
Netsat  
01356, 01693, 01850  
01334  
JVC  
00775  
Sky+  
01175, 01662  
Roadstar  
Rollmaster  
Rownsonic  
SAB  
00853  
KabelBW  
Kaon  
01195, 01882, 01915  
01300  
Skymaster  
01334, 01409, 01567,  
01611  
01413  
00099, 00887  
00723  
01567  
Nikko  
Skymax  
Skyplus  
01413  
Kathrein  
Kenwood  
Koenig  
00173, 01561, 01567  
00853  
01251, 01300, 01631  
01114  
Nokia  
00853, 00723, 01223  
01611  
01175, 01334  
01100  
Sagem  
Saivod  
Samsung  
Nordmende  
NPG  
SkySat  
01631  
02418  
01631  
Skyvision  
SM Electronic  
Smart  
01334  
Kreiling  
Kreiselmeyer  
L&S Electronic  
LaSAT  
01626  
01377, 00853, 01175,  
01206, 01458, 01662,  
02986  
Onn  
01284  
01409  
00173  
Optex  
01413, 01611, 01626  
00879, 01356  
01334  
01404, 01413, 01631  
01457  
01334  
Optus  
Sansui  
01251  
01626  
01300  
SmartVision  
Sony  
00173  
Orbis  
Sanyo  
00847, 00853, 01558,  
02299  
Lava  
01631  
Orbitech  
01100, 01195  
Sat Control  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Satellite Set Top Box  
Satellite Set Top Box  
SAT/PVR Combination  
SAT/PVR Combination  
Star  
00887  
UBC  
00642  
Canal+  
02657  
SKY Deutschland  
SKY Italia  
SKY New Zealand  
SKY PerfecTV!  
Sky+  
02754  
Stream System  
Strong  
01300  
UEC  
00879, 01356  
01251, 01626, 02418  
01882  
CanalSat  
02657  
01693, 01850  
02211  
00853, 00879, 01284,  
01300, 01409, 01626,  
02418  
United  
Cyfrowy Polsat  
DigiQuest  
DirecTV  
02527  
Unitymedia  
Universum  
Variosat  
VEA  
01300  
02299, 03099  
01662  
00173, 01251  
00173  
01377, 00099, 20739  
00775  
Sunny  
01300  
Dish Network  
Dishpro  
Skyplus  
01175, 01334  
01631  
Sunstar  
00642  
02418  
00775  
Smart  
Supernova  
Supratech  
Systec  
00887  
Vestel  
01251, 01284  
01195  
Dream Multimedia  
Echostar  
01237  
Sony  
02299  
01413  
Viasat  
00775, 02527  
01631  
Stream System  
Strong  
01300  
01334  
Vision  
01626  
Edision  
01300  
Sytech  
02418  
Visiosat  
Vitecom  
Vivax  
01413, 01457  
01413  
Expressvu  
Foxtel  
00775  
Sunny  
01300  
TBoston  
TEAC  
01251, 02418  
01251  
01356  
TechniSat  
Technosat  
Telefonica  
Telestar  
01195  
02418  
Humax  
01176, 01427, 01675,  
01808  
01206  
Technical  
Technika  
TechniSat  
Technosat  
Techwood  
TELE System  
Telefonica  
Telestar  
01626  
Volcasat  
Wavelength  
Wharfedale  
Wisi  
02418  
02527  
01284  
ID Sat  
01334  
01413  
01195  
01100, 01195  
01206  
iNETBOX  
Kaon  
01237  
01284  
Thomson  
Topfield  
01175, 01662  
01206  
01300  
00173  
01251, 01284, 01626  
01251, 01409, 01611  
02527, 02761  
Kathrein  
Maximum  
Mediacom  
MegaSat  
Movistar  
Multichoice  
MySky  
01561  
Worldsat  
Woxter  
Xsat  
01251  
Viasat  
01195  
01334  
02418  
Xtreme  
01300  
01206  
00847, 01323  
01300  
01100, 01195, 01251,  
01334, 01626  
01631  
Television  
A.R. Systems  
Accent  
Xtreme  
Yakumo  
Yes  
02527  
10556, 10037  
10037  
01413  
Televes  
Televisa  
Tevion  
01300, 01334  
00887  
02059, 02060  
01356, 01693, 01850  
01334  
00887  
Acer  
11339  
Zehnder  
01251, 01334, 01413,  
01631  
01409  
NEOTION  
Pace  
Acoustic Solutions  
Action  
11037, 11667  
10650  
Thomson  
00847, 00853, 01175,  
01046, 01291, 01662  
Zinwell  
02280, 02761  
01175, 01356, 01423,  
01662, 01693, 01850,  
02059, 02060, 02211,  
02657  
Addison  
AEG  
10653  
Tonna  
Topfield  
Toshiba  
Trevi  
01611  
01206  
01284  
01251  
SAT/PVR Combination  
11037, 11324  
12719  
@sat  
01300  
Agfaphoto  
Aiko  
Panasonic  
Philips  
01304, 03099  
00099  
Amstrad  
Atsat  
01175, 01662, 01693  
01300  
10037  
Aim  
10037, 10499  
Triax  
00853, 01251, 01291,  
01413, 01611, 01626,  
01631  
Samsung  
01175, 01206, 01662  
01300  
Bell ExpressVu  
00775  
Akai  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10714, 10715, 10208,  
11675  
Sat Control  
Schneider  
Sedea Electronique  
SKY  
British Sky  
Broadcasting  
01175, 01662  
01206  
Tricolor TV  
True Visions  
Twinner  
01176  
02408  
01611  
01206  
BskyB  
01175, 01662  
02657  
Akiba  
Akito  
10037  
10037  
01175, 01662, 01693,  
01850, 02754  
Canal Satellite  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Television  
Belstar  
Television  
Classic  
Television  
DMTech  
Domeos  
Drean  
Akura  
10171, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 11363,  
11585, 11667, 11709  
11037  
10499  
12001  
10668  
10037  
10698  
Beon  
10037  
Clatronic  
Clayton  
Condor  
10037, 10714, 11324  
11037  
Berthen  
10556, 10668  
10037  
Alba  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 11585  
Bestar  
10037  
DSE  
Bexa  
12493  
Conrowa  
Contec  
10698  
Dual  
10037, 11037, 11585,  
11667  
Alien  
11037  
Black Diamond  
Blaupunkt  
Blue Sky  
11037  
10037  
Allstar  
10037  
Durabrand  
10178, 10171, 10714,  
11037, 11652  
10195  
Cosmel  
CPTEC  
Crown  
10037  
Amstrad  
Anam  
10171, 10037, 11037  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10625,  
10714, 10668, 11037,  
10715, 10499, 11324,  
11363, 11652, 11709  
10625, 11363  
Dux  
10037  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 10715, 10208,  
11652  
Anam National  
Andersson  
Anitech  
Ansonic  
AOC  
10037, 10650  
11585  
DX Antenna  
Dynatron  
Dynex  
11817, 13817  
10037  
10037  
Boca  
11652  
Cyberpix  
D-Vision  
Daewoo  
11667  
12049  
10037, 10668  
10178, 10625, 11365  
10037, 10714  
10037  
Boman  
Bork  
11324  
10556, 10037  
e-motion  
E:max  
11709  
11363  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10634, 10499, 12098  
11324  
Ardem  
BPL  
10037, 10208  
10625, 10714, 10560  
11709  
Easy Living  
ECE  
11666, 11709  
10037  
Arena  
Brandt  
Brimax  
Brinkmann  
Brionvega  
Bush  
Dansai  
Dantax  
10037, 10208  
Aristona  
ART  
10556, 10037  
11037  
10714, 11037, 10715,  
11652  
Elbe  
10556, 10037  
11755  
10037, 10668  
10037  
Electrograph  
Element  
Elfunk  
Datsura  
Dawa  
10208  
Art Mito  
Asberg  
Astra  
11585  
11886  
10037  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10698,  
10208, 11585, 11652,  
11667, 12719  
11037  
Daytron  
De Graaf  
DEC  
10037  
10037  
ELG  
10037  
10208  
ATD  
10698  
Elin  
10037  
11709  
Atlantic  
Audiosonic  
Audioworld  
Aventura  
Axxon  
10037  
Elite  
10037  
Byd:sign  
Camper  
Carad  
12140, 12209  
10037  
Decca  
10037  
10037, 10714, 10715  
10698  
Emerson  
10178, 10171, 10037,  
10714, 10668, 11394,  
11864, 11886  
Denver  
Desmet  
Diamant  
Diamond  
10037, 11709  
10037  
10668, 11037  
10037  
10171  
Carena  
10037  
Envision  
Epson  
11365, 11506  
11379  
10714  
Carrefour  
Cascade  
Casio  
10037  
10698  
Baird  
10208  
10037  
Dick Smith  
Electronics  
10698  
Erres  
10037  
Barco  
10556  
10037  
ESA  
10171  
Basic Line  
10556, 10037, 10668,  
11037  
Cathay  
10037  
Digatron  
Digihome  
Digiline  
Digitek  
Digitor  
Dixi  
10037  
ESC  
10037  
CCE  
10037  
11667  
Baur  
10037, 10195, 10512  
10178  
Euroman  
Europa  
Europhon  
Evesham  
Excello  
Exquisit  
10037  
Centrum  
Centurion  
Changhong  
Chimei  
Clarivox  
11037  
10037, 10668  
11709  
Beaumark  
Beijing  
Beko  
10037  
10037  
10208  
10037  
10508  
10037, 10698  
10037  
10037, 10714, 10715,  
11652  
11248, 11667  
11037  
11666  
10037  
Belson  
10698  
DL  
11363  
10037  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Television  
Television  
Hoeher  
Television  
Karcher  
Kathrein  
Kendo  
Ferguson  
10037, 10625, 10560,  
10195, 11037, 11585  
Goodmans  
10556, 10037, 10625,  
10714, 10560, 10668,  
10634, 11037, 10499,  
11585, 11667  
10714  
10037  
11666  
11295  
10714, 11324  
10556  
Hornyphon  
Hugoson  
Humax  
Fidelity  
Finlandia  
Finlux  
10171, 10037, 10512  
10208  
10037, 11037, 11585  
11037  
Kennex  
Kioto  
Gorenje  
Gradiente  
Graetz  
11585  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10715, 11248, 11667  
Hypson  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10715  
10556  
10037  
Kiton  
10037, 10668  
10037  
10714  
Firstline  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10208,  
11363  
Hyundai  
Iberia  
11037, 10698  
10037  
KLL  
Granada  
Grandin  
10037, 10560, 10208  
Kneissel  
Koenig  
Kolin  
10556, 10037, 10499  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10715,  
11652  
ICE  
10037  
Fisher  
10208  
iLo  
11394  
10150, 10037, 11610,  
11755  
Flint  
10037  
Imperial  
Indiana  
Ingelen  
Inno Hit  
Innova  
Insignia  
Integra  
Interbuy  
Interfunk  
Internal  
Intervision  
Irradio  
IRT  
10037  
Grundig  
10556, 10037, 10195,  
11223, 11667, 12625  
Formenti  
Fraba  
10037  
10037  
Kolster  
Konka  
Korpel  
Kosmos  
Kunlun  
L&S Electronic  
Lavic  
10037  
10037  
GVA  
11363, 12098  
12001  
10714  
10037, 10714  
10037  
Friac  
10037, 10499  
11709  
H & B  
11037, 11585  
10037  
Fujicom  
Fujitsu  
Fujitsu Siemens  
Funai  
Haier  
10037, 10698, 10508  
10178  
10037  
10809  
Hallmark  
Hankook  
Hanseatic  
10171, 11423, 12049  
11807, 13100, 13500  
10037  
10208  
10809, 11248, 11666  
10178  
10714  
10171, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 11394, 11666,  
11817, 13817  
10556, 10037, 10625,  
10714, 10634, 10499,  
12001  
11363  
10037, 10512  
10556  
Lavis  
11037  
G-Hanz  
Gaba  
11363  
11037  
10037  
10037  
11755  
Lecson  
Lenco  
10037  
Hantarex  
Hantor  
10037  
10037  
10037, 11037  
10037  
10037  
Galaxi  
Galaxis  
Gateway  
GE  
10037  
Leyco  
Harwood  
Hauppauge  
HB  
10037  
10698  
LG  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10714, 10715, 10698,  
11423, 11768, 11840,  
12182, 12358, 12424,  
12834  
10037  
Isukai  
ITS  
10037  
11324  
10178, 11454, 10625,  
10560  
10037  
HCM  
10037  
ITT  
10208  
Highline  
Hinari  
10037  
GEC  
10037  
ITT Nokia  
ITV  
10208  
Liesenkoetter  
Lifetec  
10037  
10037, 10208  
10714  
Genesis  
Genexxa  
GFM  
10037  
10037  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 12001  
Hisawa  
Hisense  
10037  
JGC  
11709  
10556, 10508, 10208,  
11363, 12098  
10171, 11864, 11886  
11585  
Linsar  
11585  
Jinfeng  
Jinxing  
JMB  
10208  
Godrej  
Goldfunk  
GoldStar  
Local India TV  
Local Malaysia TV  
Lodos  
10208  
10556, 10037, 10698  
10556, 10634, 10499  
10556  
Hitachi  
10150, 10178, 10037,  
10634, 11037, 10508,  
10499, 10578, 11576,  
11585, 11643, 11667,  
11691, 12433  
10668  
10698  
10178, 10037, 10714,  
10715  
11037  
Jubilee  
JVC  
Loewe  
10037, 10512, 11884  
11037, 10698  
10668  
10650, 10653, 10508,  
11428, 11601, 12271  
Logik  
Hitachi Fujian  
Hitec  
10150  
10698  
Kaisui  
10037  
Logix  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Luma  
Television  
Metronic  
Metz  
Television  
NetTV  
Television  
Orline  
11037  
10625  
11755  
10037  
Lumatron  
Lumenio  
Lux May  
Luxor  
10037, 10668  
10037  
10037, 10668, 10195,  
11037  
Neufunk  
New Tech  
Newave  
Nikkai  
10556, 10037, 10714  
10556, 10037  
10178  
Ormond  
Osaki  
10668, 11037  
10556, 10037  
10037  
MGA  
10150, 10178  
10037  
Osio  
Micromaxx  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 11324, 12001  
11037, 10208  
10178  
10037  
Osume  
10037  
LXI  
Nikkei  
10714  
Otto Versand  
10556, 10037, 10195,  
10512  
Microspot  
Mikomi  
11614  
M Electronic  
10037, 10714, 10634,  
10195, 10512, 11652  
Nikko  
10178  
11037, 11585  
10037  
Pacific  
10556, 10714, 11037,  
11324  
Nokia  
10208  
Minato  
Madison  
10037  
Norcent  
Nordmende  
11365  
Minerva  
10195, 11248  
11667  
Palladium  
Palsonic  
Panama  
10556, 10037, 10714  
10037, 10698  
10037  
Magnavox  
10171, 11454, 11365,  
11506, 11755, 11867,  
12372  
10037, 10714, 10560,  
10195, 11585, 11667,  
12001  
Ministry Of Sound  
Minoka  
10037  
Magnum  
Manesth  
Manhattan  
Marantz  
Mark  
10037, 10714, 10715  
10037  
Mirai  
11666  
Normerel  
Nortek  
Novatronic  
Novita  
Nu-Tec  
O.K.Line  
Oceanic  
Odys  
10037  
Panasonic  
11480, 10037, 10650,  
10508, 10208, 11636,  
12170  
Mitsubishi  
10150, 11250, 10178,  
10556, 10037, 11037,  
10512, 11171  
10668  
10037, 10668, 11037  
11454, 10556, 10037  
10037, 10714, 10715  
10499  
10037  
Panavision  
Panda  
10037  
11585  
Mivar  
10609  
10698, 10508, 10208  
11636  
10698  
Moree  
10037  
Pansonic  
Penney  
Perdio  
Master's  
Mastro  
11037, 11324  
10208  
Morgan's  
Moserbaer  
MTC  
10037  
10178  
10698  
11585  
10037  
Masuda  
Matsui  
10037  
12719  
10512  
Perfekt  
Petters  
10037  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10195, 11037, 10208,  
11666, 11667  
Okano  
OKI  
10037  
MTlogic  
Mudan  
Multitec  
Multitech  
Myrica  
Myryad  
NAD  
10714  
10037  
11585, 11667  
11610, 12124  
10698  
10208  
Philco  
10178, 10171, 10037,  
11394  
Olevia  
Omni  
Matsushita  
Maxent  
Maxess  
Meck  
10650  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10037  
11755  
Philips  
10178, 10171, 11454,  
10556, 10037, 10512,  
10605, 10690, 11394,  
11506, 11867, 12372  
Onei  
11667  
12493  
11666  
Onida  
10653  
10698  
10556  
Onimax  
Onix  
10714  
Mediator  
Medion  
10556, 10037  
10178, 10037  
10037  
Phocus  
Phoenix  
Phonola  
Pioneer  
10714, 11652  
10037  
10698  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 10698,  
10512, 11248, 11585,  
11667, 12001, 12719  
Naiko  
Onkyo  
Onn  
11807, 13100, 13500  
11667, 11709  
11709  
Nakimura  
National  
NEC  
10037  
10556, 10037  
10508, 10208  
10037, 10698, 10512,  
11457, 11636, 12171  
Onyx  
10178, 10653, 10508,  
10499  
Megatron  
MEI  
10178  
Opera  
10037, 10714  
10650  
Plantron  
10037  
11037  
Optimus  
Orbit  
Neckermann  
NEI  
10556, 10037  
10037, 11037  
11324  
Playsonic  
10037, 10714, 10715,  
11652  
Memorex  
Mercury  
Mermaid  
10150, 10178, 11037  
10037  
10037  
Orion  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11037, 12001  
Powerpoint  
Prinston  
10037, 10698  
11037, 10715  
NEO  
10037  
Netsat  
10037  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Profitronic  
Proline  
Television  
Rowa  
Television  
Siera  
Television  
Svasa  
10037  
10037, 10698  
10556, 10037  
10037  
10208  
10037, 10625, 10634,  
11037  
Saba  
10625, 10714, 10560  
10618  
Silva  
Swisstec  
Sylvania  
11614, 11775  
Sagem  
Saivod  
Salora  
Silva Schneider  
Silver  
10037  
10171, 11394, 11864,  
11886  
Prosonic  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11324, 11585, 11667,  
11709, 12001  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10208, 12001  
10715  
Symphonic  
Synco  
10171, 11394  
10178, 11755  
11610  
SilverCrest  
Sinudyne  
SKY  
11037  
Sampo  
10178, 10171, 10650,  
11755  
10037  
Protech  
Proton  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10178  
Syntax  
Sysline  
Tacico  
Talent  
10037, 11614, 11775  
10037, 10698  
11324  
Samsung  
10178, 10556, 10037,  
10618, 10650, 10208,  
12051  
10037  
Skyworth  
Sliding  
ProVision  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11324  
10178  
10178  
SLX  
10668  
Pvision  
Pye  
12001  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
10171, 10037, 10714,  
11248, 12001  
Tashiko  
Tatung  
TCL  
10650  
Solavox  
Soniko  
10037  
10556, 10037  
10208  
10037, 11248, 11324  
10037  
Qingdao  
Quasar  
Quelle  
11037, 10508, 10208,  
11142, 11365, 11585,  
11667, 11974  
10698, 12403, 12434,  
13183  
Soniq  
12493  
10650  
Sonitron  
Sonneclair  
Sonoko  
Sonolor  
Sontec  
10208  
10037, 10668, 10195,  
11037, 10512  
TCM  
10714, 12001  
SBR  
10556, 10037  
10037  
TEAC  
10178, 10171, 10037,  
10714, 10668, 11037,  
10698, 10512, 11248,  
11363, 11709, 11755  
Schaub Lorenz  
10714, 11324, 11363,  
11667, 12001  
R-Line  
10037  
10037  
Radiola  
10556, 10037  
10037  
10208  
Schneider  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037  
Radiomarelli  
RadioShack  
Radiotone  
RCA  
10037  
10178, 10037  
10037, 10668, 11037  
Tec  
10037  
Sony  
10810, 11505, 11167,  
11651, 11825  
Schoentech  
Scotch  
Scott  
11037  
Tech Line  
Technica  
Technics  
Technika  
TechniSat  
Technisson  
Techno  
10037, 10668  
11037  
10178  
Soundesign  
Soundwave  
Sowa  
10178  
10178, 11454, 10625,  
10560, 10618, 11781,  
12247, 12403, 12434,  
12746, 12932  
10178  
10037, 11037, 10715  
10178  
10556, 10650  
11667  
Sears  
10178, 10171  
10634  
Seaway  
Seelver  
SEG  
Squareview  
Standard  
Starlite  
10171  
10556  
Realistic  
Recor  
10178  
11037  
10037, 11037, 11709  
10037  
10714, 11652  
11585  
10037  
10037, 10668, 11037,  
12719  
Rectiligne  
Redstar  
Reflex  
10037  
Strato  
10037  
Technosonic  
10556, 10625, 10499,  
11324  
SEI  
10037  
10037  
10178  
10208  
10037  
SunBriteTV  
Sungoo  
11610  
Sei-Sinudyne  
Serie Dorada  
Shanghai  
Sharp  
10037, 10668, 11037  
11585  
Techvision  
Techwood  
Tecnimagen  
Teco  
11709  
11248  
Relisys  
Remotec  
Reoc  
11037, 11667  
10556  
Sunny  
10037  
10171, 10037  
10714  
Sunstar  
10037  
10650, 10818, 11165,  
11423, 11659  
10178, 10653  
10208, 11709  
10150  
Sunstech  
Sunwood  
Supersonic  
SuperTech  
Supra  
12001  
Revox  
10037  
Tedelex  
10037  
Shintoshi  
Shivaki  
Siam  
10037  
RFT  
10037  
Teknika  
10208  
10178, 10037  
10037  
Roadstar  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037, 10715  
TELE System  
Telecor  
11585  
10556, 10037  
10178  
10037  
Siemens  
10037, 10195  
Rolson  
12001, 12098  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Television  
Television  
Ultravox  
UMC  
Television  
PVR  
Telefunken  
10037, 10625, 10714,  
10560, 10698, 11585,  
11667  
10037  
Wharfedale  
10556, 10037, 11324,  
11667  
ReplayTV  
Sonic Blue  
TiVo  
20616  
20616  
20739  
11614, 11775  
10037  
White Westinghouse 10037  
Unic Line  
Uniden  
Telefusion  
Telegazi  
Telemeister  
Telesonic  
Telestar  
10037  
Wilson  
10556  
12122  
10037  
Windsor  
Windy Sam  
Wintel  
10668, 11037  
10556  
TV/VCR Combination  
United  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11037, 10715, 11652  
10037  
Amstrad  
Ferguson  
Fidelity  
GoldStar  
Grundig  
LG  
10171  
10037  
Unitek  
11709  
10714  
10625  
10556, 10037  
10037, 10668, 11037  
10037  
Universal  
Universum  
10037, 10714  
World-of-Vision  
Wyse  
12001  
10171  
Teletech  
Teleview  
Tennessee  
Tensai  
10037, 10668, 10195,  
11037, 10618, 10512  
11365  
10037  
Xenius  
10634  
10556, 10037, 10195  
10178  
10037  
Univox  
10037  
Xiahua  
10698  
10037, 11037, 10715  
V7 Videoseven  
Vestel  
11666, 11755  
XLogic  
10698  
Mitsubishi  
Philips  
Radiola  
Saba  
10556  
Tesla  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
11037, 11652  
10037, 10668, 11037,  
11585, 11667  
Xrypton  
Yamaha  
Yamishi  
Yokan  
10037  
10556, 10037  
10556  
10650, 11576  
10037  
Tevion  
10556, 10037, 10714,  
10668, 11037, 11248,  
11585, 11667  
Vexa  
10037  
10625  
Victor  
10650, 10653, 11428  
10037, 10508  
10037  
10037  
Sanyo  
11974  
Videocon  
VideoSystem  
Vidtech  
Viewsonic  
Vision  
Yoko  
10037  
Schneider  
Sharp  
10556, 10037  
10818  
Thomson  
Thorn  
10037, 10625, 10560  
10037, 10499, 10512  
10499  
YU-MA-TU  
Zenith  
10037  
10178  
10178, 10037, 11365,  
11423, 12358  
Siemens  
Sony  
10037  
Thorn-Ferguson  
TMK  
11365, 11755, 12049  
10037  
11505  
10178  
Zepto  
Zonda  
11585  
10698  
TEAC  
10178, 10171  
10556  
Tokai  
10037, 10668, 11037  
11037  
Vistron  
Vivax  
11363  
Technics  
Thomson  
Tokaido  
Topline  
Toshiba  
11709  
10625  
10668, 11037  
Vizio  
11758, 12209  
10037  
VCR  
10195, 11037, 10618,  
10650, 10508, 11169,  
11508, 11524, 11652,  
12203  
Vortec  
DirecTV  
Humax  
20739  
20739  
20616  
20739  
20616  
20616  
20739  
DVD  
Voxson  
VU  
10178, 10037  
11365, 12098  
11667  
3D LAB  
Accurian  
Acoustic Solutions  
AEG  
30539  
Panasonic  
Philips  
30675  
Toyoda  
11709  
Walker  
Waltham  
Wansa  
30713  
TRANS-continents  
10556, 10037, 10668,  
11037  
10037, 10668, 11037  
12098  
ReplayTV  
Sonic Blue  
TiVo  
30675  
AFK  
31152  
Transonic  
10037, 10698, 10512,  
11363  
Wards  
10178  
Aiwa  
30533  
Watson  
10037, 10714, 10668,  
11037  
Akai  
30675  
Triad  
10556  
PVR  
Alba  
30539, 30713  
33052  
Trio  
11248  
Wega  
10037  
DirecTV  
Humax  
Panasonic  
Philips  
20739  
20739  
20616  
20739  
Ambiance  
Amstrad  
Anthem  
Triumph  
TVTEXT 95  
Uher  
10556, 10037  
10556  
Welltech  
Weltstar  
10714, 11652  
11037  
30713  
32820  
10037  
Westinghouse  
11755  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
Aristona  
ASDA  
30539, 30646  
32213  
30713  
30713  
32587  
30713  
31571  
30713  
30571  
30713  
30503  
30713  
31152  
Elfunk  
30713  
Kennex  
Kenwood  
Lenco  
Lexicon  
LG  
30713  
Orion  
30713  
30713  
30713  
30713  
Elite  
31152  
30490, 30534  
30713, 33052  
32545  
Ormond  
Pacific  
Audix  
Emerson  
EuroLine  
Ferguson  
Finlux  
30675, 32213  
30675  
Autovox  
Awa  
Palladium  
Panasonic  
30713  
30741, 31602  
33052  
30503, 30490, 31579,  
31641, 32523, 32710,  
32859  
Basic Line  
Bel Canto Design  
Black Diamond  
Blue Parade  
Blue Sky  
Brandt  
30741  
Limit  
Firstline  
Foehn & Hirsch  
Funai  
30713  
Lodos  
Loewe  
30713  
Pelican Accessories  
Philco  
30533  
30675  
33052  
30539, 30741, 32474,  
32783  
30675  
Philips  
30503, 30539, 30646,  
30675, 30713, 31340,  
31354, 32056, 32084,  
32434, 32689  
Logik  
30713  
GE  
30522  
Lumatron  
Lunatron  
Luxman  
Luxor  
30741, 30713  
30741  
GFM  
30675  
Bush  
Global Sphere  
Go Video  
GoldStar  
Goodmans  
GPX  
31152  
30573  
Pioneer  
30571, 30142, 30631,  
31571, 32442, 32860  
C-Tech  
30741  
30713  
California Audio Labs 30490  
30741  
Polk Audio  
Presidian  
ProAudio  
Proscan  
Proson  
30539  
Magnavox  
30503, 30539, 30646,  
30675, 30713, 31354  
Cambridge Audio  
Centrum  
Changhong  
Cinetec  
32808  
30713, 31152  
30741  
30675  
30675, 30713  
30627  
Manhattan  
Marantz  
30713  
31394  
Grandin  
Grundig  
H & B  
30713  
30539, 32414, 32432,  
33444  
30522  
30713  
30539, 30713  
30713  
30713  
Clatronic  
Clayton  
30675  
Mark  
30713  
Pye  
30539, 30646  
30741  
30713  
Haaz  
31152  
Matsui  
30713  
Radionette  
Radiotone  
RCA  
Crown  
30713  
Hanseatic  
Harman/Kardon  
Henss  
30741  
Maxim  
MDS  
30713  
30713  
Dantax  
30539, 30713  
30582, 31229, 33228  
30713  
30713  
30522, 30571, 32213,  
32587  
Denon  
30490, 30634, 31634,  
32258, 32748  
Medion  
Memorex  
Metz  
30630, 30741  
32213  
Hitachi  
30573, 30713, 31664  
30713  
REC  
30490  
32213  
31394  
30713  
30623  
30741  
Dick Smith  
Electronics  
31152  
Hoeher  
30571, 30713  
30503, 30539  
30539  
Red  
HotMedia  
Humax  
31152  
Micromedia  
Micromega  
Microsoft  
Minax  
Redstar  
Roadstar  
Rotel  
Digihome  
DigiLogic  
Digix Media  
Disney  
30713  
30646  
30713  
Inno Hit  
Insignia  
30713  
30522, 32083  
30713  
31394  
30741, 30675, 32428,  
32596  
Salora  
Samsung  
30675  
Mitsubishi  
Momitsu  
NAD  
30713  
30490, 30573, 30199,  
30820, 31635, 32069,  
32329, 32489, 33195  
DSE  
30675, 31152  
30713  
Integra  
30503, 30571, 30627,  
31612, 31634, 32147  
33052  
Dual  
30741  
Durabrand  
Dynex  
30675, 30713  
32596  
Irradio  
JVC  
30646  
Sanyo  
30713  
NEC  
30741, 31602  
30503, 30539, 30623,  
30867, 31597, 31602,  
32855  
Schneider  
Schoentech  
Scott  
30539, 30646, 30713  
30713  
Onkyo  
30503, 30627, 31612,  
32147, 30571, 31634  
Dyon  
33052  
eBench  
31152  
31394  
Kendo  
30713  
Oppo  
30575, 32545  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
DVD  
SEG  
DVD  
Blu-ray Disc  
JVC  
DVD-R  
Irradio  
JVC  
30713  
30503  
Toshiba  
30503, 31639, 32277,  
32551, 32705, 33157  
32855  
30646  
Semp  
Sharp  
Lenco  
33052  
31597  
Transonic  
TVE  
31394  
30630, 30675, 30713,  
32250, 32474, 32652,  
32869  
Lexicon  
LG  
32545  
LG  
30741  
30713  
30741, 31602  
33052  
Loewe  
Magnavox  
Medion  
Panasonic  
30741  
United  
30675, 30713, 31152  
30741, 30713  
30503  
Limit  
30646, 30675  
30741  
Sherwood  
Shinsonic  
Silva Schneider  
SilverCrest  
Skantic  
30741, 33052  
30533  
Universum  
Urban Concepts  
Vestel  
Loewe  
32474, 32783  
30675  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Momitsu  
Onkyo  
30490, 31579, 32523,  
32710, 32859  
30741  
30713  
32414, 32432, 33444  
33052  
31152  
Victor  
31597  
Philips  
Pioneer  
Pye  
30646, 31340  
30631, 32860  
30646  
30539, 30713  
31152  
Vizio  
32563  
32147, 32900, 32910,  
33100, 33101, 33500,  
33501  
SM Electronic  
Smart  
Vtrek  
32587  
30713  
Waltham  
Wellington  
Weltstar  
Wharfedale  
Windsor  
Windy Sam  
Xbox  
30713  
RCA  
30522  
Sony  
30533, 30864, 31033,  
31070, 31431, 31516,  
31633, 32180  
Oppo  
32545  
30713  
Samsung  
Schneider  
Sharp  
30490, 31635  
30646  
Panasonic  
Philips  
31641, 32523, 32859  
32084, 32434, 32689  
30142, 32442  
30199, 33195  
32250, 32474, 32652  
33052  
30713  
30713  
30630, 30675, 32869  
Soundwave  
Star Clusters  
Strato  
30713  
31152  
31152  
30713  
31152  
30630, 30675  
30675  
31394  
30713  
30741  
30741  
32587  
30741  
Pioneer  
Samsung  
Sharp  
30713  
Sony  
31033, 31070, 31431,  
31516, 31633, 32180  
30573  
Sylvania  
Targa  
30675  
30522, 32083  
31152  
Strong  
Sherwood  
Sony  
30741  
XLogic  
Supervision  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tamashi  
Tandberg  
Targa  
31516, 32180  
30675  
Toshiba  
Victor  
31639, 32277, 32551  
31597  
Yamaha  
30490, 30539, 30646,  
30817, 31354, 32298,  
32299  
Sylvania  
TASCAM  
Toshiba  
Vizio  
34004  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
30646  
Zenith  
30503, 30741  
32551, 32705, 33157  
32563  
30741  
Blu-ray Disc  
Ambiance  
Anthem  
HD-DVD  
Integra  
LG  
Yamaha  
32298, 32299  
Tchibo  
33052  
32901, 33104, 33504  
30741  
TCL  
32820  
DVD-R  
Accurian  
Aristona  
Denon  
TCM  
Cambridge Audio  
Denon  
32808  
30675  
30646  
30490  
30675  
30675  
30741  
30741  
31664  
30646  
Microsoft  
Onkyo  
Xbox  
32083  
TEAC  
34004, 30571, 30741,  
30675, 31394  
32258, 32748  
33052  
32901, 33104 33504  
32083  
Dyon  
Technica  
Technics  
30713  
30490  
30713  
30713  
30571  
30522  
Foehn & Hirsch  
Funai  
33052  
Emerson  
Funai  
30675  
TV/DVD Combination  
Techwood  
Teletech  
Harman/Kardon  
Insignia  
33228  
Akai  
11675  
Go Video  
GPX  
30675, 32428, 32596  
Black Diamond  
Blue Sky  
Bush  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
Theta Digital  
Thomson  
Integra  
32147, 32900, 32910,  
33100, 33101, 33500,  
33501  
Hitachi  
Humax  
11037, 10698, 12719,  
30713  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
TV/DVD Combination  
TV/DVD Combination  
Centrum  
Crown  
DMTech  
Dual  
11037, 30713  
Sunstech  
Sylvania  
12001  
11037, 30713  
12001  
10171, 11394, 11864,  
11886, 30630, 30675  
TEAC  
10698  
11037, 30713  
12049  
Technica  
Telefunken  
Teletech  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
United  
11037, 30713  
10698  
Dynex  
Elfunk  
Emerson  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
10625  
11394, 11864, 11886,  
30675  
Ferguson  
Goodmans  
Grandin  
Grundig  
H & B  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
30713  
11524  
11037, 30713  
30713  
Universum  
Vestel  
30539  
11037  
12001  
Viewsonic  
Weltstar  
12049  
Hanseatic  
Hitachi  
Insignia  
JVC  
12001  
11037, 30713  
11037, 11667, 30713  
12049  
12271  
LG  
11423  
Logik  
11037, 30713  
11037, 30713  
12372  
Luxor  
Magnavox  
Matsui  
11037, 30713  
12719  
Medion  
Nordmende  
Odys  
12001  
12719  
Panasonic  
Philips  
12170  
11454, 10556, 11394,  
30539  
Powerpoint  
Prosonic  
Pvision  
RCA  
10698  
12001  
12001  
12746, 12932  
12001  
Schaub Lorenz  
SEG  
11037, 12719, 30713  
10818  
Sharp  
Soniq  
12493  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Control Codes  
Memo  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Y1212-1  
SN 29401471CODE  
(C) Copyright 2013 Onkyo Corporation Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 4 0 1 4 7 1 C O D E *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 

NAD Stereo Amplifier C 320BEE User Manual
Nady Systems Car Speaker PS215 User Manual
National Instruments Power Supply NI PXI 1006 User Manual
NEC Flat Panel Television MultiSync LCD3215 User Manual
Newcon Optik Binoculars NVS 10MG User Manual
Nextar GPS Receiver Q4 User Manual
Niles Audio Stud Sensor WS100R User Manual
Nostalgia Electrics Popcorn Poppers HKP200 User Manual
Ozaki Worldwide Portable Speaker EM688 User Manual
Panasonic DVD Player DVD F61 User Manual